Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
Sibley Hall East
Contract Drilling and Testing SITE REPORT STRUCTURAL STEEL INSPECTION PROJECT: Cornell Univ. Sibley Hall LOCATION: Ithaca, NY CLIENT: Cornell University PROJECT NO.: CT-13-194 CONTRACTOR: Pike Co. DATE: 06-04-14 This SJB SERVICES, INC. Structural Steel and Welding Inspector was present at the above project site to examine the structural steel erection in accordance with project specifications, drawings, AISC Standards and AWS D1.1 Welding Code. Inspected the erection of reinenforcing beam in 3rd floor, per drwg. SKS01 section 9/S300 stair slab support section. Found welding satisfactory. The above stated areas have been visually examined and were found to be as per project drawings, details, AISC Standards and AWS D1.1 and D1.3 Welding Code unless otherwise noted. TECHNICIAN: William J. Leitten Respectfully Submitted, SJB SERVICES, INC. William J. Leitten CWI 07040741 CERTIFIED WELDING INSPECTOR SPECIAL INSPECTOR, P.E. BUFFALO OFFICE 5167 South Park Avenue Hamburg, NY 14075 Phone: (716) 649-8110 Fax: (716) 649-8051 LEVENBETTS 508 W 26 ST 317 NEW YORK NEW YORK 10001 T 212 242 1414 WEB WWW.LEVENBETTS.COM SUBMITTAL COVER Project Name: Cornell University, East Sibley Hall, Third Floor Owner: Cornell University To: The Pike Company Attn: Norm Rockefeller Address: One Circle Street Rochester, NY 14607 Contractors Submittal # 073113-003 Date of Submittal: 03/06/2014 Date of Response: 03/21/2014 Type of Submittal Product Data Color Selection O&M Manual Shop Drawings Sample Record Document Substitution Yes No Product Identification Contract Dwg. No.: Product Name: Part/Paragraph: Manufacturer: Comments (Architect Use Only) Reviewed Revise and Resubmit Rejected Furnish as Noted Corrections or comments made on submittals and/or shop drawings during this review do not relieve the contractor from compliance with requirements of the drawings and specifications. This check is only for review of general conformance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. The contractor is responsible for confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions; selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction; coordinating his work with that of all other trades; and performing his work in a safe and satisfactory manner. By: Stella Betts, LEVENBETTS Date: 03/21/14 Architect Comments 1. Color Selection is Nickel Gray. The PIKE Company SUBMITTAL COVER BY THIS SUBMITTAL HAS BEEN REVIEWED ARCHITECT'S STAMP WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE PIKE COMPANY AS COMPLYING BY: _____________________ DATE: RECEIVED STAMPS 3/6/2014 PIKE JOB NO:13897 PROJECT NO: 3/6/2014DATE:Pike Submittal No: 073113-003 General Contracting The Pike Company, Inc. Construction Management One Circle Street, Rochester, NY 14607 Phone: (585) 271-5256 / 800 264 PIKE / Fax: (585) 271-3101Specialty Contracting Facility Service E-mail: pike@pikeco.com / Online: www.pikeco.com Program Management DESCRIPTION OF SUBMITTAL: REFERENCES:Spec. Section:Review Cycle No.:073113 Remarks: Asphalt Shingle Color Samples Asphalt ShinglesSUBMITTAL NAME: Drawings:Supplier: Albany - Phone: (518) 371-5900 Pike Branch Offices: Hartford, CT - Phone: (860) 251-8000 TYPE OF SUBMITTAL:Sample 001 Weathermaster Roofing Co., Inc. PROJECT NAME:Sibley Hall OWNER: ARCHITECT:The Pike Company, Inc. Norm Rockefeller ®Expedition form sb_20b SUBMITTAL COVER (Attach to each submitted) 300 State Street, Suite 201, Rochester, NY 14614 Contractor’s Submittal No. 283111-002 Phone 585.454.6110 Fax 585.454.3066 A/E Submittal No. www.labellapc.com Contractor: Address: Phone / E-Mail: (585) 271-5256 / pike@pikeco.com Type of Submittal (check one) Product Data Color Selection O&M Manual Date of Submittal: 01/8/2014 Shop Drawings Sample Record Document Resubmitted: Substitution Yes No Product Identification Contractor Approval Specification Section No.: Identify that this submittal has been Contract Dwg. No.: approved by the Contractor in Product Name: accordance with the General Conditions Part/Paragraph: Manufacturer: By: Date: Contractor Comments: (A/E Use Only) Architect / Engineer Comments: Reviewed Revise and Resubmit Rejected Furnish as Noted Corrections or comments made on the shop drawings during this review do not relieve the contractor from compliance with requirements of the drawings and specifications. This check is only for review of general conformance wit h the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. The contractor is responsible for confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions; selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction; coordinating his work with that of all other trades; and performing his work in a safe and satisfactory manner. LaBella Associates, P.C. By: Bob Dumas Date: 01/8/2014 The PIKE Company, Inc. One Circle Street Rochester, NY 14607 Cornell University East Sibley Hall, Third Floor LaBella Project #213072 The PIKE Company SUBMITTAL COVER BY THIS SUBMITTAL HAS BEEN REVIEWED ARCHITECT'S STAMP WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE PIKE COMPANY AS COMPLYING BY: _____________________ DATE: RECEIVED STAMPS 1/8/2014 PIKE JOB NO:13897 PROJECT NO: 1/8/2014DATE:Pike Submittal No: 283111-002 General Contracting The Pike Company, Inc. Construction Management One Circle Street, Rochester, NY 14607 Phone: (585) 271-5256 / 800 264 PIKE / Fax: (585) 271-3101Specialty Contracting Facility Service E-mail: pike@pikeco.com / Online: www.pikeco.com Program Management DESCRIPTION OF SUBMITTAL: REFERENCES:Spec. Section:Review Cycle No.:283111 Remarks: Installer Certification Installer CertificationSUBMITTAL NAME: Drawings:Supplier: Albany - Phone: (518) 371-5900 Pike Branch Offices: Hartford, CT - Phone: (860) 251-8000 TYPE OF SUBMITTAL:Certification 001 Schuler-Haas Electric PROJECT NAME:Sibley Hall OWNER: ARCHITECT:The Pike Company, Inc. Norm Rockefeller ®Expedition form sb_20b SUBMITTAL COVER (Attach to each submitted) 300 State Street, Suite 201, Rochester, NY 14614 Contractor’s Submittal No. 283111-001 Phone 585.454.6110 Fax 585.454.3066 A/E Submittal No. www.labellapc.com Contractor: Address: Phone / E-Mail: (585) 271-5256 / pike@pikeco.com Type of Submittal (check one) Product Data Color Selection O&M Manual Date of Submittal: 12/16/2013 Shop Drawings Sample Record Document Resubmitted: Substitution Yes No Product Identification Contractor Approval Specification Section No.: Identify that this submittal has been Contract Dwg. No.: approved by the Contractor in Product Name: accordance with the General Conditions Part/Paragraph: Manufacturer: By: Date: Contractor Comments: (A/E Use Only) Architect / Engineer Comments: Reviewed Revise and Resubmit Rejected Furnish as Noted Corrections or comments made on the shop drawings during this review do not relieve the contractor from compliance with requirements of the drawings and specifications. This check is only for review of general conformance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. The contractor is responsible for confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions; selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction; coordinating his work with that of all other trades; and performing his work in a safe and satisfactory manner. LaBella Associates, P.C. By: Bob Dumas Date: 1/6/2014 The PIKE Company, Inc. One Circle Street Rochester, NY 14607 1. Per specifications section 1.6(B), submit NICET Level III Certificate. 2. Re-verify device count as indicated on Drawings. Cornell University East Sibley Hall, Third Floor LaBella Project #213072 The PIKE Company SUBMITTAL COVER BY THIS SUBMITTAL HAS BEEN REVIEWED ARCHITECT'S STAMP WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE PIKE COMPANY AS COMPLYING BY: _____________________ DATE: RECEIVED STAMPS 12/16/2013 PIKE JOB NO:13897 PROJECT NO: 12/16/2013DATE:Pike Submittal No: 283111-001 General Contracting The Pike Company, Inc. Construction Management One Circle Street, Rochester, NY 14607 Phone: (585) 271-5256 / 800 264 PIKE / Fax: (585) 271-3101Specialty Contracting Facility Service E-mail: pike@pikeco.com / Online: www.pikeco.com Program Management DESCRIPTION OF SUBMITTAL: REFERENCES:Spec. Section:Review Cycle No.:283111 Remarks: Gamewell/FCI System Digital, Addressable Fire AlarmSUBMITTAL NAME: Drawings:Supplier: Albany - Phone: (518) 371-5900 Pike Branch Offices: Hartford, CT - Phone: (860) 251-8000 TYPE OF SUBMITTAL:Product Data 001 Schuler-Haas Electric PROJECT NAME:Sibley Hall OWNER: ARCHITECT:The Pike Company, Inc. Norm Rockefeller ®Expedition form sb_20b CORNELL UNIVERSITY EAST SIBLEY HALL 3RD FLOOR SUBMITTAL SPEC SEC 283111 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SCHULER‐HAAS ELECTRIC CORP. 1280 DRYDEN RD. ITHACA, NY 14850 SUBMITTAL Schuler-Haas Electric, Inc. 240 Commerce Drive RRoocchheesstteerr,, NNeeww YYoorrkk 1144662233 WWeesstt FFiirree SSyysstteemmss,, IInncc.. 5533 PPiixxlleeyy IInndduussttrriiaall PPaarrkkwwaayy RRoocchheesstteerr,, nneeww YYoorrkk 1144662244 OOffffiiccee;; ((558855))--666633--88553300 FFaaccssiimmiillee;; ((558855))--666633--88663333 Cornell University College of Architecture, Art, & Planning Sibley Hall Third Floor East Ithaca, New York 14850 Specification Section 283111 Digital, Addressable Fire Alarm System BLANK PAGE THIS PAGE WAS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK West Fire Systems, Inc. 53 Pixley Industrial Parkway Rochester, NY 14624 Tel: (585) 663-8530 Fax: (585) 663-8633 11/22/13 Schuler-Haas Electric, Inc. 240 Commerce Drive Rochester, New York 14623 Attention; Jim Frank Reference; Cornell University College of Architecture, Art & Planning Sibley Hall Third Floor East Renovations Ithaca, New York 14850 Specification Section; 283111, Digital, Addressable Fire Alarm System. Jim, Further to the above projects plans and specifications, we are pleased to submit this fire detection system equipment submittal for your review. As specified, the system equipment outlined in this submittal reflects that manufactured by Gamewell/FCI, a Honeywell Fire Solutions Group owned company. Specifically, the following equipment is an extension/modification to this sites existing Gamewell/FCI E3 Series fire detection/life safety platform. All new control and peripheral equipment listed is both UL Listed and cross referenced for use with the existing Gamewell/FCI E3 Series fire detection system. Page 1. BLANK PAGE THIS PAGE WAS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11/22/13 The new fire alarm peripheral equipment for the above project will include the following… Description; Model Number; o Temporary heat detection peripheral equipment; 2 Ea. GFCI analog single input addressable supervision modules. AMM-2F 20 Ea. GFCI conventional 135 degree FT heat detectors w/bases. 5603 o Permanent devices; 3 Ea. GFCI analog 135 degree FT heat detector heads. ATD-L2F 3 Ea. GFCI standard analog smoke/heat detector bases. B210LP 2 Ea. GFCI analog double action manual pull stations. MS-7AF 6 Ea. GFCI analog duct smoke detector housings. DNR 6 Ea. GFCI analog photoelectric duct smoke detector heads. ASD-PL2FR 6 Ea. GFCI air sampling tubes for above housings. DST-5 6 Ea. GFCI remote test stations for above housings. RTS-151 2 Ea. GFCI analog addressable output control relay modules dedicated AOM-2RF for use as fan shut down circuit addressable control relays. 2 Ea. GFCI 24VDC auxiliary tandem relay modules w/enclosures MR-101C/R dedicated for use with the above AOM-2RF control relays to facilitate fan shut down. 2 Ea. GFCI multi-candela wall mounted combination horn/strobe P2R appliances, Red. 5 Ea. GFCI multi-candela wall mounted standalone strobe appliances, SR Red. Page 2. BLANK PAGE THIS PAGE WAS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11/22/13 Description; Model Number; Specification Section 293111 1.9A Extra Materials; Per the above specification section the following fire alarm peripheral devices shall be turned over and spare parts. 1 Ea. GFCI multi-candela wall mounted combination horn/strobe P2R appliance, Red. 1 Ea. GFCI multi-candela wall mounted standalone strobe appliance, SR Red. 1 Ea. GFCI analog 135 degree FT heat detector head. ATD-L2F 1 Ea. GFCI standard analog smoke/heat detector base. B210LP End of bill of materials. o Special notes; Prior to the installation or cabling for any of the fire alarm peripheral devices listed in this submittal, it will be necessary to first coordinate time in the field with the WFS Project Manager for this project. This in order to field verify existing conditions. Specifically, spare capacities for the existing fire alarm systems initiating and notification appliance circuits. The contact information for the WFS Project Manager is as follows…. West Fire Systems, Inc. Michael Torres Cellular; (585)-202-0301 Email; mtorres@westfiresystems.com Page 3. BLANK PAGE THIS PAGE WAS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11/22/13 o General notes; The final system programming shall be coordinated with Cornell University’s E H & S (Environmental Health & Safety) personnel to ensure the system operates in accordance with Cornell University’s standards and the project specifications. The attached CAD drawing we are submitting was created specifically for the Cornell University Sibley Hall Third Floor renovations project. It depicts typical peripheral and control panel wiring requirements specific to this project. - Copy of NYS alarm license is attached - Equipment warranty; 1 year per specification requirements. Name, Address, and telephone number of the nearest fully equipped factory trained and authorized service organization. West Fire Systems, Inc. 53 Pixley Industrial Parkway Rochester, New York 14624 Telephone; (585)-663-8530 Facsimile; (585)-663-8633 We hope the above equipment submittal meets with your approval. If we can be of any further service please feel free to call at any time. Best Regards, Timothy McGee West Fire Systems, Inc. West Fire & Security (585)-663-8530 Ext. 103 Email; tmcgee@westfiresystems.com Web site; www.westfiresystems.com Page 4. BLANK PAGE THIS PAGE WAS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK BLANK PAGE THIS PAGE WAS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Warranty Terms & Support Manufacturer Warranties and Limitation of Liability Manufacturer Warranties. Subject to the limitations set forth herein, Manufacturer warrants that the Products manufactured by it in its Northford, Connecticut facility and sold by it to its authorized Distributors shall be free, under normal use and service, from defects in material and workmanship for a period of thirty six months (36) months from the date of manufacture (effective Jan. 1, 2009). The Products manufactured and sold by Manufacturer are date stamped at the time of production. Manufacturer does not warrant Products that are not manufactured by it in its Northford, Connecticut facility but assigns to its Distributor, to the extent possible, any warranty offered by the manufacturer of such product. This warranty shall be void if a Product is altered, serviced or repaired by anyone other than Manufacturer or its authorized Distributors. This warranty shall also be void if there is a failure to maintain the Products and the systems in which they operate in proper working conditions. MANUFACTURER MAKES NO FURTHER WARRANTIES, AND DISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCTS, TRADEMARKS, PROGRAMS AND SERVICES RENDERED BY MANUFACTURER INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, INFRINGEMENT, TITLE, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. MANUFACTURER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH WHICH MAY ARISE IN THE COURSE OF, OR AS A RESULT OF, PERSONAL, COMMERCIAL OR INDUSTRIAL USES OF ITS PRODUCTS. This document constitutes the only warranty made by Manufacturer with respect to its products and replaces all previous warranties and is the only warranty made by Manufacturer. No increase or alteration, written or verbal, of the obligation of this warranty is authorized. Manufacturer does not represent that its products will prevent any loss by fire or otherwise. Warranty Claims. Manufacturer shall replace or repair, at Manufacturer's discretion, each part returned by its authorized Distributor and acknowledged by Manufacturer to be defective, provided that such part shall have been returned to Manufacturer with all charges prepaid and the authorized Distributor has completed Manufacturer's Return Material Authorization form. The replacement part shall come from Manufacturer's stock and may be new or refurbished. THE FOREGOING IS DISTRIBUTOR'S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY IN THE EVENT OF A WARRANTY CLAIM. Warn-HL-08-2009.fm BLANK PAGE THIS PAGE WAS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Velociti® Series AMM-2F GAMEWELL-FCI 12 Clintonville Road, Northford, CT 06472 - Tel: (203) 484-7161 - Fax: (203) 484-7118 Specifications are for information only, are not intended for installation purposes, and are subject to change without notice. No responsibility is assumed by Gamewell-FCI for their use. ©2008 Gamewell-FCI. All rights reserved. www.gamewell-fci.com 9020-0626 Rev. C1 page 1 of 1 Description The Gamewell-FCI Velociti® Series, addressable monitor module AMM-2F is a single Style B, Class B initiating device circuit (IDC) with a 47KW end-of-line resistor. This module provides an address for any device or group of devices connected to this circuit on the signaling line circuit (SLC) of the Gamewell-FCI addressable series fire alarm control panel. Any initiating device with normally open (N.O.) dry contacts may be made addressable when connected to the AMM-2F module. The Velociti® Series use a communication protocol that substantially increases the speed of communication between the sensors and certain Gamewell-FCI analog addressable fire alarm controls. These devices operate in a grouped fashion. If one of the devices in the group has a status change, the panel’s microprocessor stops the group poll and concentrates on the single device. The net effect is response speed up to five times greater than earlier designs. The AMM-2F module can be programmed to provide a wide variety of input functions to the Gamewell-FCI ad- dressable series fire alarm control panels. It can be iden- tified as a manual station, heat detector, plenum detec- tor, waterflow switch, tamper switch, N.O. contact, smoke detector, projected beam smoke detector, sub loop, remote zone, etc. It can also serve as a remote system silence, system reset, system acknowledge or drill switch. It is even possible to customize its device type to meet specific job requirements. The initiating device circuit of the AMM-2F can support a maximum line resistance of up to 40 ohms allowing the use of linear heat detection devices. The compact size facilitates the installation of the module inside manual stations, or mounting boxes of various types of alarm initiating devices. Velociti® and E3 Series® are registered trademarks of Honeywell International Inc. Addressable Monitor Module AMM-2F Features • Compact size allows easy installation • Class B, Style B, initiating circuit • 40 Ohm line resistance for each initiating device circuit • Connects to any normally open dry contact device • Bicolor LEDs flash green whenever the module is addressed, and light steady red on alarm* *Note: Only the red LED is operative in panels that do not operate in Velociti® mode. Specifications Supervisory current: .000375 amps. Alarm current: .00060 amps. Operating temperature: 32˚ to 120˚ F (0˚ to 49˚ C) Relative humidity: 10 to 93% (non-condensing) End-of-line Resistance: 47K ohms Dimensions: 1.3” L x 2.5” W x 0.5” D (3.3 x 6.4 x 1.3 cm) Ordering Information Model Description AMM-2F Addressable monitor module, single circuit, Style B, Class B An ISO 9001-2000 Company BLANK PAGE THIS PAGE WAS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK AMM-2 Monitor Module INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS 9000-0481 1 I56-1511-01 ©FCI 1999 Before Installing This information is included as a quick reference installa- tion guide. Refer to the control panel installation manual for detailed system information. If the modules will be installed in an existing operational system, inform the oper- ator and local authority that the system will be temporari- ly out of service. Disconnect power to the control panel before installing the modules. NOTICE: This manual should be left with the owner/user of this equipment. General Description The AMM-2 monitor module can be installed in a single gang junction box directly behind the monitored unit. Its small size and light weight allow it to be installed without rigid mounting (see Figure 1). The AMM-2 is intended for use in intelligent, two-wire systems where the individual address of each module is selected using rotary decade switches. It provides a two-wire initiating circuit for nor- mally open contact fire alarm and security devices. Compatibility Requirements To ensure proper operation, this module should only be connected to a compatible control panel. Mounting and Wiring NOTE:This module is intended to be wired and mounted without rigid connections inside a standard electri- cal box. All wiring must conform to applicable local codes, ordinances, and regulations. 1. Connect the red (+) and black (–) wires to the positive and negative loop power leads of the signaling line cir- cuit. 2. Connect the violet (+) and yellow (–) wires to a two- wire, normally open initiating loop. 3. Install the specified EOL resistor value to terminate the initiating loop. 4. Set the address on the module per job drawings. 5. Install the module in the desired mounting location. Figure 2. Typical 2-wire style B initiating circuit con- figuration: Figure 1: A78-1712-06 Specifications Nominal Operating Voltage: 15-32 VDC EOL resistance: 47K Ohms Maximum IDC wiring resistance: 40 Ohms Temperature Range: 32°to 120°F (0°to 49°C) Humidity: 10 to 93% noncondensing Dimensions: 1.3″H x 2.75″W x 0.5″D Wire length: 6″minimum A78-1937-06LOOPADDRESS1.30 2.75 0.50 01234567890123456789TENSONES0 12 3 456789 U.L. LISTED Compatible Control (+) (–) TO NEXT DEVICE BLACKRED(+)(–)(+)(–)47k EOL INCLUDEDVIOLETYELLOW Panel 0 12 3 456789 ALL WIRING SHOWN IS SUPERVISED AND POWER LIMITED 301 2nd Avenue, Waltham, MA 02451-1133 (781) 487-0088, FAX: (781) 370-4132 ® BLANK PAGE THIS PAGE WAS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK GAMEWELL-FCI 12 Clintonville Road, Northford, CT 06472-1610 USA • Tel: (203) 484-7161 • Fax: (203) 484-7118 Specifications are for information only, are not intended for installation purposes, and are subject to change without notice. No responsibility is assumed by Gamewell-FCI for their use. ©2010 by Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved.www.gamewell-fci.com 9020-0590 Rev. C1 page 1 of 2 System Sensor, 5600 Series Mechanical Heat Detectors APPROVED3016008 199-33-4S2101 SIGNALING An ISO 9001-2000 Company FM MEA Approved 7270-1209:227 Description System Sensor® is a registered trademark of Honeywell International Inc. The System Sensor 5600 Series mechanical heat detec- tors offer a low cost solution for property protection against fire and protection in conditions where the non-life safety installations may not require smoke detectors. The 5600 Series offers both single and dual circuit models. Each model is available with low or high temperature rat- ings, and fixed temperature or rate-of-rise activation. The rate-of-rise element is restorable to accommodate field testing of the unit. The detectors mount readily on single gang or octagonal backboxes. They can also mount on a four inch (10.16 cm) square box with the support of a square to round plaster ring. The mounting bracket is reversible to allow for flush and surface mount installations. The 5600 units provide clear markings readily visible on the unit to ensure the proper application. Alphanumeric characters identify the type of detector and temperature rating, both in Fahrenheit and Celsius. Fixed temperature models are labeled “FX,” while the combination units are marked “FX/ROR”. The detector also features a positive indication of actuation of the fixed temperature portion. The collector disc drops from the unit making it readily identifiable. Electrical Specifications Operating Voltage Contact Ratings 6 -125 VAC 3A 6-28 VDC 1A 125 VDC 0.3A 5600 Series Features • Attractive low silhouette design • Multiple configurations available • Single and dual circuit models • Fixed temperature and combination • Fixed temperature/rate-of-rise • Readily visible alphanumeric markings • Standard 3.5” (8.8 cm) or 4-inch (10.16 cm) octagonal mounting • Single gang or standard 4” (10.16 cm) square mounting with a plaster ring GAMEWELL-FCI 12 Clintonville Road, Northford, CT 06472-1610 USA • Tel: (203) 484-7161 • Fax: (203) 484-7118 9020-0590 Rev. C1 page 2 of 2 www.gamewell-fci.com Ordering Information System Sensor, 5600 Series Part Number Circuit Temperature Rating Rating Max. UL Spacing - 10 Foot Ceiling* 5601 Single 135°F (57C)FT + ROR 50 ft. x 50 ft. (15.24 m x 15.2 m) 5602 Single 194°F (90°C) FT + ROR 50 ft. x 50 ft. (15.24 m x 15.2 m) 5603 Single 135°F (57°C) FT only 25 ft. x 25ft. (7.62 m x 7.62 m) 5604 Single 194°F (90°C) FT only 25 ft. x 25ft. (7.62 m x 7.62 m) 5621 Dual 135°F (57°C) FT + ROR 50 ft. x 50 ft. (15.24 m x 15.2 m) 5622 Dual 194°F (90°C) FT + ROR 50 ft. x 50 ft. (15.24 m x 15.2 m) 5623 Dual 135F (57C)FT only 25 ft. x 25ft. (7.62 m x 7.62 m) 5624 Dual 194F (90C)FT only 25 ft. x 25ft. (7.62 m x 7.62 m) * Note: Refer to NFPA 72 for guidelines for spacing reductions when ceiling heights exceed 10 feet. Before Installing This detector must be installed in compliance with the control panel installation manual and meet the requirements of NFPA 72, and/or the local authority having jurisdiction. Read this manual carefully before using the detec- tor. This manual should be left with the owner/user of this equipment. General Description The 5600 series mechanical heat detector is in- tended for use in property protection applications, or for non-life-safety installations where smoke de- tection is not practical or appropriate. WARNING For life-safety installations, smoke detectors must be used, in lieu of, or in addition to mechanical heat detectors. The 5600 series consists of both single- and dual- circuit heat detectors featuring fixed temperature thermal sensors or combination fixed temperature/ rate-of-rise sensors, with temperature ratings of 135ºF (57ºC) or 194ºF (90ºC). D500-46-00 1 I56-2175-003R INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 1-800-SENSOR2, FAX: 630-377-6495 www.systemsensor.com 5600 Series Mechanical Heat Detector Single Circuit: 5601P, 5602, 5603, 5604 Dual Circuit: 5621, 5622, 5623, 5624 Markings on the exterior of the detector indicate the specific activation method and temperature rating. All models are identified as either 135ºF/57ºC or 194ºF/ 90ºC. Models equipped with combination fixed tem- perature/rate-of-rise sensors are marked FX/ROR. Fixed temperature only models are marked FX. Non-Resettable Fixed Temperature Sensor The fixed temperature element reacts to heat by re- sponding to a specific temperature setting (135ºF or 194ºF). The detection method is based on the spring action of a metal contact, held to the metal chamber by a fusible alloy. When the temperature reaches the alloy’s melting point, the metal contact will depress the diaphragm, causing the electrical contact to close the circuit. The circular external heat collector is released from the detector to visu- ally indicate that the detector has been activated. NOTE: 5600 series Fixed Temperature models (5603, 5604, 5623, and 5624) are non-resettable, and can- not be tested. Specifications: Operating Voltage/Contact Ratings (Resistive): 6 – 125 VAC / 3A 6 – 28 VDC / 1A 125 VDC / 0.3A 250 VDC / 0.1A Maximum Installation Temperature: Models 5601P, 5603, 5621, and 5623: 100°F (38°C) Models 5602, 5604, 5622, and 5624: 150°F (65.6°C) Alarm Temperature: Models 5601P, 5603, 5621, and 5623: 135°F (57°C) Models 5602, 5604, 5622, and 5624: 194°F (90°C) Rate-of-Rise Threshold: 15°F (8.3°C) per minute (models 5601P, 5602, 5621, and 5622 only) Operating Humidity Range: 5 to 95% RH non-condensing Input Terminals: 14 – 22 AWG Back Box Mounting: 31⁄2˝ octagonal 4˝ octagonal Single gang 4˝ square with a square to round plaster ring Dimensions with mounting bracket: Diameter: 4.57 inches (11.6cm) Height: 1.69 inches (4.3cm) Weight: 6 oz. (170 grams) CAUTION To prevent the activation of the fixed temperature element, the shipping and storage temperature must not exceed 122°F (50°C).I56-2175-003R Self-Restoring Rate-of-Rise (ROR) Sensor The rate-of-rise element responds to a rapid rise of temperature, approximately 15ºF (8.3ºC) per min- ute. As the temperature rises, the air within the sealed chamber expands. Should the chamber air expand faster than it can escape through the cali- brated vent, the diaphragm is depressed, and the electrical contact closes the circuit. NOTE: Only the ROR element of 5600 series com- bination fixed temperature/ROR models (5601P, 5602, 5621, and 5622) are self-restoring, and may be tested using a hair dryer or heat gun. When testing the ROR element, to prevent the activation of the fixed temperature element, the heat source must not exceed the fixed temperature rating of the detector. Mounting Bracket All 5600 series detectors are equipped with a mount- ing bracket that includes mounting slots to accom- modate single-gang, 31⁄2˝ octagonal, and 4˝ octagonal electrical boxes, as well as 4˝ square boxes equipped with a plaster ring (Figure 1). The mounting bracket is reversible to accommodate flush-mount and sur- face–mount installations (Figure 2). Wiring Installation Guidelines All wiring must be installed in compliance with the National Electrical Code, applicable state and local codes, and any special requirements of the local Authority Having Jurisdiction. Proper wire gauges should be used. The conductors used to connect heat detectors to the alarm control panel and ac- cessory devices should be color-coded to reduce the D500-46-00 2 I56-2175-003R Heat Detector Type RTI Classification Fixed 135°F RTI: SPECIAL RoR and Fixed 135°F RTI: ULTRA FAST and SPECIAL (Respectively) Fixed 194°F RTI: SPECIAL RoR and Fixed 194°F RTI:ULTRA FAST and SPECIAL (Respectively) FM Classification RTI ratings are for installations which must comply with FM 3210. Table 1. 5600 Series Mechanical Heat Detectors Model No.Circuit Temperature Rating Thermal Sensor UL Maximum Spacing (10-foot ceiling) 5601P Single 135ºF (57ºC)Fixed Temperature/Rate of Rise 50-feet x 50-feet 5602 Single 194ºF (90ºC)Fixed Temperature/Rate of Rise 50-feet x 50-feet 5603 Single 135ºF (57ºC)Fixed Temperature 25-feet x 25-feet 5604 Single 194ºF (90ºC)Fixed Temperature 25-feet x 25-feet 5621 Dual 135ºF (57ºC)Fixed Temperature/Rate of Rise 50-feet x 50-feet 5622 Dual 194ºF (90ºC)Fixed Temperature/Rate of Rise 50-feet x 50-feet 5623 Dual 135ºF (57ºC)Fixed Temperature 25-feet x 25-feet 5624 Dual 194ºF (90ºC)Fixed Temperature 25-feet x 25-feet NOTE: Refer to NFPA72 guidelines for spacing reductions when ceiling heights exceed 10 feet. A= 31⁄2˝ Octagonal box B= 4˝ Octagonal box C= Single gang box and 4˝ square with plaster ring D= Directly to Wall/Ceiling Figure 1. Bracket Mounting Locations: S0113-00 S0114-00 S0115-00 Surface–mount Flush–mount Figure 2. Reversible Mounting Bracket: D500-46-00 3 I56-2175-003R likelihood of wiring errors. Improper connections can prevent a system from responding properly in the event of a fire. The non-polarized screw terminals on the back of the detector will accept 14–22 AWG wire. For best system performance, all wiring should be installed in separate grounded conduit; do not mix fire alarm system wiring in the same conduit as any other electrical wiring. Twisted pair may be used to pro- vide additional protection against extraneous elec- trical interference. Wire connections are made by stripping approxi- mately 1⁄4˝ of the insulation from the end of the feed wire, inserting it into the proper base terminal, and tightening the screw to secure the wire in place. + – EOL OR Control Panel Auxiliary Device Auxiliary Device Auxiliary Device Auxiliary Device Auxiliary Device Control Panel + – OR EOL Figure 3. Wiring Diagram – Single Circuit Models: Figure 4. Wiring Diagram – Dual Circuit Models: Installation Remove power from the alarm control unit or initi- ating device circuits before installing detectors. 1. Detach the detector from the mounting bracket by rotating the detector 1⁄4 turn counter-clockwise. 2. Orient the mounting bracket properly for either a flush- or surface-mount installation (Figure 2). 3. Select the pair of mounting holes suitable for the junction box, (Figure 1) and secure the bracket to the box. 4. Connect the wires to the detector per Figure 3 or Figure 4, as applicable. 5. Place the detector onto the mounting bracket by rotating clockwise. The detector will lock into place with a “click”. 6. After all detectors have been installed, apply power to the alarm control unit. 7. Test each detector as described in Testing. 8. Reset all the detectors at the alarm control unit. 9. Notify the proper authorities that the system is in operation. S0239-00 S0240-00 D500-46-00 4 I56-2175-003R ©2009 System Sensor Please refer to insert for the Limitations of Fire Alarm Systems System Sensor warrants its enclosed product to be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of three years from date of manufacture. System Sensor makes no other express warranty for the enclosed product. No agent, representative, dealer, or employee of the Company has the authority to increase or alter the obligations or limitations of this Warranty. The Company’s obligation of this Warranty shall be limited to the replacement of any part of the product which is found to be defec- tive in materials or workmanship under normal use and service during the three year period commencing with the date of manufacture. After phoning System Sensor’s toll free number 800-SENSOR2 (736-7672) for a Return Authorization number, send defective units postage prepaid to: System Sensor, Returns FCC Statement This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in ac- cordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: – Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. – Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. – Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. – Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Department, RA #__________, 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, IL 60174. Please include a note describing the malfunction and suspected cause of failure. The Company shall not be obligated to replace units which are found to be defective because of damage, unrea - sonable use, modifications, or alterations occurring after the date of manufacture. In no case shall the Company be liable for any consequential or incidental damages for breach of this or any other Warranty, ex - pressed or implied whatsoever, even if the loss or dam- age is caused by the Company’s negligence or fault. Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you. This Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state. Three-Year Limited Warranty Testing/Maintenance The rate-of-rise mechanism may be subject to re- duced sensitivity over time. Annual testing of the rate-of-rise operation is therefore recommended. Before testing, notify the proper authorities that maintenance is being performed and the system will be temporarily out of service. Disable the zone or system undergoing maintenance to prevent any un- wanted alarms. Only the ROR element of 5600 series combination fixed temperature/ROR models (5601P, 5602, 5621, and 5622) are self-restoring, and may be tested us- ing a hair dryer or heat gun. WARNING When testing the ROR element, to prevent the ac- tivation of the fixed temperature element, the heat source must not exceed the fixed temperature rating of the detector. WARNING 5600 series fixed temperature models (5603, 5604, 5623, and 5624) are non-resettable, and cannot be tested. CAUTION When using the RRS-MOD with model 2WTA-B, do not mix the 2WTA-B with other model smoke de- tectors and dry contact closure devices, including mechanical heat detectors, manual pull stations and waterflow switches. Such mixing can cause a direct short on the auxiliary power terminals, damaging the control panel’s internal circuitry and/or damage devices connected to the initiating device circuit. GAMEWELL-FCI 12 Clintonville Road, Northford, CT 06472-1610 USA • Tel: (203) 484-7161 • Fax: (203) 484-7118 Specifications are for information only, are not intended for installation purposes, and are subject to change without notice. No responsibility is assumed by Gamewell-FCI for their use. ©2008 by Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved.www.gamewell-fci.com 9020-0620 Rev. C3 page 1 of 2 Velociti® Series ATD-L2F, ATD-RL2F Addressable Thermal SensorDescription The Gamewell-FCI Velociti® Series, addressable plug-in thermal sensors with integral communication provide fea- tures that surpass conventional sensors. Point ID capabil- ity allows each sensor’s address to be set, providing exact locations for pinpointing alarm locations and for selective maintenance. ATD thermal sensors use an innovative ther- mistor sensing circuit to produce 135°F/57°C fixed-temper- ature (ATD-L2F). The ATD-RL2F provides a combination 15°/minute rate-of-rise with 135° fixed thermal detection that is included in a low-profile package. The ATD-HL2F provides fixed high-temperature detection at 190°F/88°C. These thermal sensors provide cost-effective, addressable property protection in a variety of applications. The Velociti® Series uses a communication protocol that substantially increases the speed of communication between the sensors and Gamewell-FCI analog address- able fire alarm controls. These devices operate in a grouped fashion. If one of the devices in the group has a status change, the panel’s microprocessor stops the group poll and concentrates on the single device. The net effect is response speed up to five times greater than earlier designs. Installation ATD plug-in sensors use a separate base to simplify instal- lation, service, and maintenance. A special tool allows maintenance personnel to plug-in and remove sensors without using a ladder. Mount the base on a box which is at least 1.5" (3.8 cm) deep. Suitable mounting base boxes include: • 4.0" (10.2 cm) square box. • 3.5" (8.9 cm) or 4.0" (10.2 cm) octagonal box. • Single-gang box (except relay or isolator base). • With B501BH or B501BHT base, use a 4.0" (10.2 cm) square box. • With B224RB or B224BI base, use a 3.5" (8.9 cm) octagonal box, or a 4.0" (10.2 cm) octagonal or square box. NOTE: Because of the inherent supervision provided by the SLC, end-of-line resistors are not required. Wiring “T- taps” or branches are permitted for Style 4 (Class “B”) wiring. Velociti® and E3 Series® are registered trademarks of Honeywell International Inc. UL® is a registered trademark of Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Features • Sleek, low-profile design • Visual rotary switch addressing • Built-in functional test switch activated by an external magnet • Bicolor LEDs flash green whenever the sensor is addressed, and light steadily red on alarm* • Optional relay, isolator, or sounder bases • Low standby current • Addressable communication • Stable communication technique with noise immunity • Optional remote, single-gang LED accessory (RA-400Z) • Suitable for installation in ducts Note: *Only the red LED is operative in panels that do not operate in Velociti® mode. ATD-L2F An ISO 9000-2000 Company APPROVED FM 3023594 SIGNALING 07270-0694:256S2332 MEA Approved 219-02-E Vol.VI GAMEWELL-FCI 12 Clintonville Road, Northford, CT 06472-1610 USA • Tel: (203) 484-7161 • Fax: (203) 484-7118 9020-0620 Rev. C3 page 2 of 2 www.gamewell-fci.com Specifications Size: 2.1" (5.3 cm) high x 4.1" (10.4 cm) diameter installed in B501 base, 6.1" (15.5 cm) diameter installed in ADB-FLF base Shipping Weight: 4.8 oz. (137 g) Operating Temperature: ATD-L2F or ATD-RL2F –4° F to 100° F (–20° C to 38°C) ATD-HL2 –4° F to 150°F (–20 C to 66°C) Sensor Spacing:UL® approved for 50 ft. (15.2 m) center to center FM approved for 25 x 25 ft. (7.6 x 7.6 m) spacing Relative Humidity: 10 – 93% (non-condensing) ATD-L2F Fixed-temperature setpoint 135°F (57°C) ATD-RL2F Combination 135° F fixed temperature and 15° (8.3°c) per minute rate-of-rise° ATD-HL2F Fixed-temperature setpoint 190°F (88°C) Electrical Specifications Voltage Range:15 - 32 volts DC peak Standby Current:200 mA @ 24 VDC (without communication) max. avg.).0003 A @ 24 VDC (one communication every 5 seconds with LED enabled) LED Current (max.).0065 A @ 24 VDC (LED lit) Voltage Range 15 –32 volts DC peak Specifications Bases and Options ADB-FLF 6.1” (15.5 cm) diameter standard base B501 4.1” (10.4 cm) diameter flangeless base B501BH or B501BHT Sounder base assembly (B501BHT produces a Temporal Pattern) includes B501 base B224RB Relay Base Up to 14 AWG (2.0 mm2) Relay type: Form-C Rating: 2.0A @ 30 VDC resistive 0.3 A @ 110 VDC inductive 1.0 A @ 30 VDC inductive B224RB Relay Base Dimensions: 6.2”: (15.7 cm) x 1.2” (3.0 cm) B224BI Isolator Base Dimensions:6.2” (15.7 cm) x 1.2” (3.0 cm) Maximum 25 devices between isolator bases RA-400Z Remote alarm indicator, LED BCK-200 Black detector covers (box of 10) Ordering Information Model Description ATD-L2F Addressable thermal sensor, fixed, 135° F ATD-RL2F Addressable thermal sensor, combination fixed,135° F and 15°/minute rate-of-rise. ATD-HL2F Addressable thermal sensor, fixed, 190° F This sensor must be installed in compliance with the control panel system installation manual. The installation must meet the requirements of the Au- thority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Sensors offer maximum performance when installed in compliance with the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA); see NFPA 72. Before installing sensors, please read the system wiring and installation man- ual thoroughly. This manual provides detailed information on sensor spac- ing, placement, zoning, and special applications. Copies of these manuals are available from FCI. GENERAL DESCRIPTION Models ATD-L2F, ATD-RL2F and ATD-HL2F are intelligent sensors that utilize a state-of-the-art thermistor sensing circuit for fast response. These sensors are designed to provide open area protection with 50 foot spacing capability as approved by UL 521. Model ATD-L2F is a fixed temperature sensor with 135° F fixed temperature alarm. Model ATD-RL2F is a rate-of-rise temperature sensor with 135° F fixed temperature alarm. Model ATD-HL2F is a high temperature sensor with 190° F fixed temperature alarm. Two LEDs on each sensor light to provide a local, visible sensor indication. Remote LED annunciator capability is available as an optional accessory (Part No. RA400Z). FCI panels offer different feature sets across different models. As a result, certain features of the ATD-L2F, ATD-RL2F and ATD-HL2F may be available on some control panels, but not on others. The sensors will support either Velociti® or CLIP (Classic Loop Interface Protocol) mode. The possible features available, if supported by the control unit include: 1. The panel controls the LED operation on the sensor. Operational modes are RED blink, RED continuous, GREEN blink, and off. 2. The remote output may be synchronized to the LED operation or con- trolled independent of the LEDs. Please refer to the operation manual for the UL listed control unit for specific operation of these models Models ATD-L2F, ATD-RL2F, and ATD-HL2F require compatible address- able communications to function properly. Connect these sensors to listed- compatible control panels only. WIRING GUIDE All wiring must be installed in compliance with the National Electrical Code, applicable local codes and the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Proper wire gauges should be used. The installation wires should be color coded to limit wiring mistakes and ease system troubleshooting. Improper connections will prevent a system from responding properly in the event of a fire. 9000-0586 1 I56-3557-003R INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS ATD-L2F, ATD-RL2F, and ATD-HL2F Intelligent Plug-In Temperature Sensors I56-3557-003RSPECIFICATIONS Diameter: 6.1˝ (155 mm) installed in ADB-FLF; 4.1˝ (104 mm) installed in B501 Height: 2.0˝ (51 mm) Weight: 4.8 ounces (137 gm) Installation Temperature: –4°F to 100°F (–20°C to 38°C); ATD-L2F and ATD-RL2F; –4°F to 150°F (–20°C to 66°C); ATD-HL2F Operating Humidity Range: 10% to 93% Relative Humidity, Non-condensing Mounting: ADB-FLF flanged base; B501 flange less base Voltage Range: 15 to 32 Volts DC Peak Standby Current: 300 µA @ 24 VDC (one communication every 5 seconds with LED blink enabled) LED Current: 6.5 mA @ 24 VDC Fixed Temperature Rating: 135°F (57°C); ATD-L2F and ATD-RL2F; 190°F (88°C); ATD-HL2F Rate-of-Rise Detection: Responds to greater than 15°F/minute; ATD-RL2F Remove power from the communication line before installing sensors. 1. Wire the sensor base (supplied separately) per the wiring diagram, see Figure 1. 2. Set the desired address on the sensor address switches, see Figure 2. 3. Install the sensor into the sensor base. Push the sensor into the base while turning it clockwise to secure it in place. 4. After all sensors have been installed, apply power to the control unit and activatethe communication line. 5. Test the sensor(s) as described in the TESTING section of this manual. FIGURE 1. WIRING DIAGRAM: 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 (–) (+) +-UL LISTED COMPATIBLECONTROL PANELCAUTION: DO NOT LOOP WIRE UNDER TERMINAL 1 OR 2. BREAK WIRE RUN TO PROVIDE SUPERVISION OF CONNECTIONS. CLASS A OPTIONAL WIRING REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR (–) (+) C0129-00 FIGURE 2: TENS ONES 9101112 131415 8765 4 3 2 1 0 98765 4 3 2 1 0 C0162-00 TAMPER RESISTANCE The sensor base includes a tamper proof feature which when activated pre- vents removal of the sensor without the use of a tool. See the installation instruction manual for the sensor base for details in using this feature. 12 Clintonville Road Northford, CT 06472-1653 Phone: 203.484.7161; Fax: 203.484.7118 Velociti ® Series Velociti® is a registered trademark of Honeywell International Inc. 9000-0586 2 I56-3557-003R ©2009 Gamewell-FCI FCC STATEMENT This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installa- tion. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: – Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. – Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. – Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. – Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Please refer to insert for the Limitations of Fire Alarm Systems TESTING Before testing, notify the proper authorities that the system is undergoing maintenance, and will temporarily be out of service. Disable the system to prevent unwanted alarms. All sensors must be tested after installation and periodically thereafter. Test- ing methods must satisfy the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Sensors offer maximum performance when tested and maintained in compliance with NFPA 72. A. Test Magnet (Model No. M02-04 - optional) 1. Place the optional test magnet against the cover in the magnet test area, as shown in Figure 3, to activate the test feature. 2. The LEDs should latch on within 10 seconds, indicating alarm and annunciating the panel. 3. Reset the detector at the system control panel. B. Direct Heat Method (Hair dryer of 1000 – 1500 watts) 1. From the side of the detector, direct the heat toward the sensor. Hold the heat source about 6 inches (15 cm) away to prevent damage to the cover during testing. 2. The LEDs on the detector should light when the temperature at the detector reaches the alarm setpoint. If the LEDs fail to light, check the power to the detector and the wiring in the detector base. 3. Reset the detector at the system control panel. Detectors that fail these tests should be cleaned as described under MAIN- TENANCE and retested. If the detectors still fail these tests, they should be returned for repair. FIGURE 3. VIEWS SHOWING POSITION OF TEST MAGNET : LED TEST MAGNET MARKER LED TEST MAGNET MARKER C0152-00 MAINTENANCE NOTE: Before cleaning notify the proper authorities that the system is under- going maintenance, and therefore the system will temporarily be out of ser- vice. Disable the loop or system undergoing maintenance to prevent unwanted alarms. It is recommended that the sensor be removed from its mounting base for easier cleaning and that sensors be cleaned at least once a year. Use a vacuum cleaner to remove dust from the sensing chamber. FIGURE 4: C0151-00 FM CLASSIFICATION RTI ratings are for installations which must comply with FM 3210. ATD-L2F RTI: FAST ATD-RL2F RTI:V2-FAST ATD-HL2F RTI: QUICK GAMEWELL-FCI 12 Clintonville Road, Northford, CT 06472-1610 USA • Tel: (203) 484-7161 • Fax: (203) 484-7118 Specifications are for information only, are not intended for installation purposes, and are subject to change without notice. No responsibility is assumed by Gamewell-FCI for their use. ©2008 by Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved.www.gamewell-fci.com 9020-0616 Rev. B2 page 1 of 2 MS-7AF, MS-7 and MS-7S Non-Coded, Manual Fire Alarm Stations An ISO 9001-2000 Company APPROVED FM 3023594 SIGNALING 07150-0694:261S2465 MEAApproved 67-02-E Vol.VIII Description The Gamewell-FCI MS-7 Style manual fire alarm stations are available in a wide variety of configurations. The Sta- tions comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) 5-lb. maximum pull force requirement. Operating instruc- tions and Braille text are engraved in the handle. All sta- tions have a key lock/reset which is keyed alike with Gamewell-FCI fire alarm control panels and other manual fire alarm stations. MS-7AF Velociti Addressable Station The MS-7AF Velociti® Series addressable station is a dou- ble action station designed for installation in the signaling line circuit of Gamewell-FCI analog addressable control panels. Activation of the station causes its assigned address to register at the control panel. The door contains an LED which flashes green in normal condition and lights steady red when the station has been activated.* The sta- tion features screw terminals. MS-7ASF Velociti Addressable Station The MS-7ASF Velociti® Series addressable station is a single action station designed for installation in the signal- ing line circuit of Gamewell-FCI analog addressable con- trol panels. Activation of the station causes its assigned address to register at the control panel. The door contains an LED which flashes green in normal condition and lights steady red when the station has been activated.* The sta- tion features screw terminals. The Velociti® Series stations use a communication proto- col that substantially increases the speed of communica- tion between the sensors and certain Gamewell-FCI analog addressable fire alarm controls. These devices operate in a grouped fashion. If one of the devices in the group has a status change, the panel’s microprocessor stops the group poll and focuses on the single device. The net effect is response speed up to five times greater than earlier designs. MS-7 Double Action Station The MS-7 double action station is used with conventional- fire alarm control panels. It features a set of single pole contacts and screw terminals for connection to an initiating circuit. Velociti® is a registered trademark of Honeywell International Inc. UL® is a registered trademark of Underwriter’s Laboratories Inc. LEXAN® is a registered trademark of GE Plastics, a subsidiary of General Electric Company. Features • Addressable stations compatible with all Gamewell-FCI analog addressable fire alarm controls • Conventional stations suitable for use with any UL ® Listed control panel • Both single and double action stations available • Tumbler lock for test and reset keyed alike with Gamewell-FCI controls • Surface or semi-flush mounting • Shock and vibration resistant • Stations (MS-7LOB) Listed for outdoor applications • Complies with ADA pull force requirements Only the red LED is operative in panels that do not operate in Velociti mode. MS-7 GAMEWELL-FCI 12 Clintonville Road, Northford, CT 06472-1610 USA • Tel: (203) 484-7161 • Fax: (203) 484-7118 9020-0616 Rev. B2 page 2 of 2 www.gamewell-fci.com MS-7S Single Action Station The MS-7S single action station is used with conventional fire alarm control panels. It features a set of single pole contacts and wire leads for connection to an initiating cir- cuit. MS-7SP Double Action Station The MS-7SP is a double action station similar to the MS-7 station, with the additional feature of both English and Spanish instructions molded into the unit. MS-7LOB Double Action Station (Listed for Outdoor Applications) The MS-7LOB station must be mounted on a Model SB-I/O backbox. In retrofit applications, the station is UL Listed for use with the WP-10 backbox. It is intended for use with conventional control panels and has a set of single pole contacts and screw terminals. Mounting The MS-7 interior stations may be surface mounted (use backbox SB-I/0) or semi-flush mounted on a standard dou- ble-gang, or 4-inch (10.2 cm) square electrical box. An optional trim ring (BG-TR) may also be used for semi-flush mounting. NYC-Plate The NYC-Plate provides the backplate for the manual pull station. (See Figure 1). Figure 1 NYC-Plate Specifications Material:Lexan® Contact Ratings:0.25 amps. @ 30 VAC/VDC (resistive) Dimensions:5 5/8” H x 4 1/4” W x 1 1/4” D (14 x 10.1 x 3.2 cm) Operating Temperature (MS-7AF):32° to 120° F (0° to 49° C) Relative Humidity (MS-7AF):10 to 93% (non-condensing) Alarm Current:.0030 amp. 0.007 for LED Supervisory Current (MS-7AF):.00030 amps. Ordering Information Model Description MS-7 Double action station. MS-7AF**Velociti addressable double action station. MS-7ASF Velociti addressable single action station MS-7S Single action station, wire leads. MS-7SP Double action station, English and Spanish instructions. MS-7LOB Double action station, outdoor use. (Must use SB-I/O - Indoor/ outdoor use backbox). SB-I/O Indoor/outdoor use backback- box. SB-10 Surface backbox. BG-TR.Trim ring for semi-flush mount NYC-Plate NYC backplate for manual pull station **For use with Gamewell-FCI analog addressable control panels only. MS-7A Addressable Pull Station Document: 9000-0518 Revision: A Patented, U.S. Patent No. Des. 428,351 Other Patents Pending Description The MS-7A Addressable Pull Station is a non-coded manual pull station which provides an intelligent Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) with one addressable alarm initiating input signal. The addressable module is housed inside the pull station. The dual-action station is equiped with a key/lock reset and screw terminals. The pull station is UL listed and meets the ADA requirement of a 5-lb. maximum pull force to activate. Operating instructions are molded into the handle along with Braille text. Molded terminal numbers can be found adjacent to the wiring terminals. Ratings Normal Operation Voltage: 24 VDC Average Operation Current (LED Flash): 300 µA Temperature Range: 32° F - 120° F (0° C - 49° C) Relative Humidity Range: 10% - 93% non-condensing Installation The pull station can be surface mounted to a Surface Backbox (SB-10) or semi-flush mount to a standard double-gang, or 4-inch (10.16cm) square electrical box. An optional Trim Ring (BG-TR) may be used when semi- flush mounting the unit. CAUTION: The door of the pull station may detach from the backplate and cannot be re-attached if backplate is installed on an SB-10 surface backbox or an electrical box. To re-attach the door---- Hold door (A) to the rear of the backplate (B) as shown in the figure below. Bring door forward (1) to align pins with holes. Slide door down (2) onto backplate. Close door partially to lock into place. Operation To activate a dual-action pull station, push in and pull down on the handle. The word ‘ACTIVATED’ appears after the handle is pulled down. This will remain until the pull station is reset. The pull station includes one Single Pole, Single Throw (SPST) Normally Open (N/O) switch which closes upon activation of the pull station. LED Operation With the door closed the LED is visible through the translucent handle. Alarm - Steady RED Normal - Flash REDBG12-FCIfront.cdrA B 12 BG12-doorattach.cdr PINHOLE BG12-FCIactiv.cdr Resetting the Pull Station 1. Insert the key into the lock and rotate 1/4 turn coun- terclockwise. 2. Open the door until the handle returns to normal. 3. Close and lock the door. Note: Closing the door automatically resets the switch to the ‘Normal’ position. Opening the door will not activate or deactivate the alarm switch. Wiring Instructions Prior to wiring the pull station, pull all necessary wiring through a mounted backbox and the optional trim ring. 1. Using the built-in strip gauge, on the back of the pull station, remove the correct amount of wire insulation. 2. Connect the wiring from the FACPs Signaling Line Circuit (SLC), or any previous device on the SLC, to terminals 1 and 2 on the pull stations terminal strip. Connect the next device on the SLC to terminals 1 and 2. 3. Maintain consistent polarity with all connections throughout the IDC. Setting the Address Each pull station can be set to one of 98 addresses (01 - 98). To set an address, use a common screwdriver to adjust the rotary switches on the addressable module mounted inside the pull station. Once the address is set, record it in the space provided on the product identification label and/or the place provided on the module. Note: The pull station is factory preset with address ‘00’. Caution Install the pull station in accordance with the supplied instructions, applicable NFPA standards, national and local Fire and Electrical codes and the requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Conduct regular testing of the devices using appropriate NFPA standards. Fire Control Instruments is not responsible for devices that have not been properly installed, tested and maintained. ADA Compliance For ADA compliance, if the clear floor space only allows forward approach to an object, the maximum forward reach height allowed is 48-inches (121.92cm). If the clear floor space allows parallel approach by a person in a wheelchair, the maximum side reach allowed is 54-inches (137.16cm). Document: 9000-0518 Revision: A (51426:A ECN: 00-365 10/30/2000) – To Next Addressable + Device on SLCFrom FACP + SLC –BG12-wiring4.cdr0 1 2 3 4 5 678 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 678 9 Rotory Switches LED BG12-inside3.cdr GAMEWELL-FCI 12 Clintonville Road, Northford, CT 06472-1610 USA • Tel: (203) 484-7161 • Fax: (203) 484-7118 Specifications are for information only, are not intended for installation purposes, and are subject to change without notice. No responsibility is assumed by Gamewell-FCI for their use. ©2010 by Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved.www.gamewell-fci.com 9021-60475 Rev. C page 1 of 4 InnovairFlex™ Series DNR/DNRW Duct Smoke Housing Intelligent Non-Relay Photoelectric Duct Smoke Housing Description The InnovairFlex™ Series, DNR intelligent, non-relay pho- toelectric duct smoke detector, and the DNRW watertight, non-relay photoelectric duct smoke detector feature a piv- oting housing that fits both square and rectangular foot- prints. These detectors are capable of mounting to a round or rectangular duct. The DNR/DNRW detectors can be used with the E3 Series® and 7100 Series Systems. Note: The InnovairFlex™ Series, DNR requires the Veloc- iti® Series, ASD-PL2FR Sensor and AOM-2RF, if relays are required for the fan control. The DNRW duct smoke detector, with its NEMA 4 rating, is Listed as a watertight enclosure providing protection against falling dirt, rain, and windblown dust, splashing and hose directed water. These features allow operators to use the detector in the most extreme environments. The units sense smoke in the most challenging conditions, operating in airflow speeds of 100 to 4,000 feet per minute, temperatures of -4°F to 158°F, and a humidity range of 0 to 95 percent (non-condensing). An improved cover design isolates the sensor head from the low-flow feature for simple maintenance. A cover tamper feature was added to indicate a trouble signal for a removed or improperly installed sensor cover. The InnovairFlex housing provides a 3/4-inch conduit knockout and ample space to facilitate easy wiring and mounting of the relay module. The InnovairFlex duct smoke detector can be customized to meet local codes and specifications without additional wiring. The new InnovairFlex product line is compatible with all previous Innovair models, including remote test accessories. WARNING:Duct smoke detectors have specific limitations. DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS ARE: NOT a substitute for an open area smoke detector, NOT a substitute for early warning detection, and NOT a replacement for a building’s regular fire detection system. Refer to NFPA 72 and 90A for additional duct smoke detector 2911 application information. E3 Series® and Velociti® are registered trademarks and InnovairFlex™ is a trademark of Honeywell International, Inc. UL® is a registered trademark of Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Features • Photoelectric, integrated low-flow technology • Air velocity rating from 100 ft/min to 4,000ft/min (0.5m/s to 20.32m/sec) • Versatile mounting options: square or rectangular configuration • Broad ranges for operating temperature (-4°F to 158°F) and humidity (0% to 95% non-condensing) • Patented sampling tube installs from front or back of the detector with no tools required • New Cover tamper signal • Increased wiring space with a newly added 3/4-inch conduit knockout • Available space within housing to accommodate the mounting of the relay module • Easily accessible code wheels on sensor head (sold separately) • Clear cover for convenient visual inspection •UL® 268A Listed • Remote testing capability • Requires SLC line power only • NEMA Type 4 UL Listed for non-hazardous indoor and outdoor applications (DNRW only) • UV Resistant, UL ® Listed housing and cover material (DNRW only) InnovairFlex-DNR/DNRW An ISO 9000-2000 Company FM 3029700 APPROVED SIGNALING S911 MSFM 2202 2207 3242-2653:209 S911 GAMEWELL-FCI 12 Clintonville Road, Northford, CT 06472-1610 USA • Tel: (203) 484-7161 • Fax: (203) 484-7118 9021-60475 Rev. C page 2 of 4 www.gamewell-fci.com Architectural/Engineering Specifications The air duct smoke detector shall be a System Sensor InnovairFlex™ DNR Intelligent Non-Relay Photoelectric Duct Smoke Detector and DNRW Watertight NEMA4 Duct Smoke Detector. The detector housing shall be UL Listed per UL 268A specifically for use in air handling systems. The flexible housing of the duct smoke detector fits both square and rectangular footprints. The detector shall operate at air velocities of 100 ft/min to 4,000 ft/min (0.5 m/sec to 20.32 m/ sec). The unit shall be capable of providing a trouble signal in the event that the sensor cover is removed or improperly installed. It shall be capable of local testing via magnetic switch or remote testing using the RTS151KEY remote test station. Terminal connections shall be of the strip and clamp method suitable for 12–18 AWG wiring. Physical Specifications Size: Rectangular Dimensions:14.38 in (37 cm) Length; 5 in (12.7 cm) Width; 2.5 in (6.6 cm) Depth Square Dimensions:7.75 in (19.7 cm) Length; 9 in (22.9 cm) Width; 2.5 in (6.35 cm) Depth Weight:1.6 lb (0.73 kg) Environmental Rating:NEMA4 (DNRW only) Operating Temperature Range:–4° to 158°F (–20° to 70°C) Storage Temperature Range:–22° to 158°F (–30° to 70°C) Operating Humidity Range:0% to 95% relative humidity non-condensing Air Duct Velocity:100 to 4000 ft/min (0.5 to 20.32 m/sec) DCOIL - (if included)17.5 - 26.4 VDC .95mA max. Electrical Ratings For information on the electrical specifications, refer to the InnovairFlex DNR Duct Smoke Detector Installation Instructions, P/N I56-3051-001R. Accessory Current Loads at 24 VDC Device Standby Trouble RA100Z 0 mA 12 mA Max. RTS151/RTS151KEY 0 mA 12 mA Max. Installing the InnovairFlex Sampling Tube The InnovairFlex sampling tube may be installed from the front or back of the detector. The tube locks securely into place and can be removed by releasing the front or rear locking tab. (Figure 3 illustrates the front locking tab). Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3 GAMEWELL-FCI 12 Clintonville Road, Northford, CT 06472-1610 USA • Tel: (203) 484-7161 • Fax: (203) 484-7118 www.gamewell-fci.com 9021-60475 Rev. C page 3 of 4 Wiring for Intelligent Non-Relay Duct Smoke Detector Figure 4 System Wiring Diagram for DNR Figure 5 DNR to RA100Z Figure 6 DNR to RTS151/RTS151 Key Important Notes: • The use of either RTS151 or RTS151KEY requires the installation of an accessory coil, DCOIL, sold separately. For additional information, refer to the DNR or DNRW Duct Smoke Detector Installation Instructions, P/N I56-3051-001R and the Duct Application Smoke Detectors Application Guide. • The RTS151/RTS151KEY test coil circuit requires an external 24 VDC power supply which must be UL Listed. RA100Z RT151/RTS151KEY TEST COIL + TEST COIL - COMM + OUT (CONV ONLY) + COMM – RA/RTS – RA + RTS + RTS451/RTS451KEY RTS151/RTS151KEY RTS + RA + RA/RTS - COMM - OUT (CONV ONLY) + COMM + TEST COIL - TEST COIL + DNR TO RTS451/RTS451KEY/RTS151/ RTS151KEY WITH “R” REMOTE TEST CAPABLE DETECTOR HEAD OPTION: JUMPER 1 2 3 4 5 EXTERNAL (-) POWER (+) SUPPLY REMOTE TEST STATION LED OPTION 1 PER UNIT TEST COIL OPTION 1 PER UNIT 95mA CURRENT DRAW GAMEWELL-FCI 12 Clintonville Road, Northford, CT 06472-1610 USA • Tel: (203) 484-7161 • Fax: (203) 484-7118 9021-60475 Rev. C page 4 of 4 www.gamewell-fci.com Accessories System Sensor provides system flexibility with a variety of accessories, including two remote test stations and different means of visible and audible system annunciation. As with our duct smoke detectors, all duct smoke detector accesso- ries are UL Listed. Figure 7 RTS151 UL S2522 Figure 8 RTS151KEY UL S2522 Figure 9 RA100Z UL S2522 Figure 10 ASD-PL2FR Ordering Information Part Number Description DNR Intelligent non-relay photoelectric low-flow duct smoke detector DNRW Watertight intelligent non-relay photoelectric low-flow duct smoke detector ASD-PL2FR Intelligent photoelectric smoke sensor with remote test capability in duct applications Accessories Part Number Description DCOIL Remove test coil required with RTS151/RTS151151KEY DST1 Metal sampling tube duct width up to 1 ft (0.3m) DST1.5 Metal sampling tube duct widths 1 ft to 2 ft (0.3 to 0.6 m) DST1.5 Metal sampling tube duct widths 1 ft to 2 ft (0.3 to 0.6 m) DST3 Metal sampling tube duct widths 2 ft to 4 ft (0.6 to 1.2 m) DST5 Metal sampling tube duct widths 4 ft to 8 ft (1.2 to 2.4 m) DST10 Metal sampling tube duct widths 8 ft to 12 ft (2.4 to 3.7 m) DH400OE-1 Weatherproof enclosure ETX Metal exhaust tube duct width 1ft (0.3m) M02-04-00 Test magnet P48-21-00 End cap for metal sampling tubes RA100Z/RA100ZA Remote annunciator alarm LED RTS151 Remote test station RTS151KEY Remote test station with key lock SS-300-015 1 I56-3051-001R DNR Duct Smoke Detector INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 1-800-SENSOR2, FAX: 630-377-6495 www.systemsensor.com Table of Contents Page [1] Limitations of Duct Smoke Detectors .........................1 [2] General Description .....................................1 [3] Contents of the Duct Smoke Detector Kit ......................1 [4] Detector Installation .....................................1 [5] Sampling Tube Installation ................................2 [6] Measurement Tests ......................................3 [7] Field Wiring ...........................................4 [8] Verification of Operation ..................................4 [9] Dectector Cleaning Procedures .............................5 [10] Sensor Replacement ....................................5 [11] Optional Accessories ....................................5 Warranty .............................................6 BEfORE INSTALLINg Read the System Sensor Guide for Proper Use of Smoke Detectors in Duct Appli- cations (A05-1004), which provides detailed information on detector spacing, placement, zoning, wiring, and special applications. Copies of this manual are available online at www.systemsensor.com. NFPA Standards 72 and 90A should also be referenced for detailed information. NOTICE: This manual shall be left with the owner/user of this equipment. IMPORTANT: This detector must be tested and maintained regularly following NFPA 72 requirements. The detector should be cleaned at least once a year. [1]LIMITATIONS Of DUCT SMOkE DETECTORS WARNING The National Fire Protection Association has established that DUCT DETEC- TORS MUST NOT BE USED AS A SUBSTITUTE FOR OPEN AREA DETECTOR PROTECTION as a means of providing life safety. Nor are they a substitute for early warning in a building’s regular fire detection system. System Sensor supports this position and strongly recommends that the user read NFPA Standards 90A, 72, and 101. The DNR Air Duct Smoke Detectors are listed per UL 268A. This device will not operate without electrical power. Fire situations may cause an interruption of power. The system safeguards should be discussed with your local fire protection specialist. This device will not sense smoke unless the ventilation system is operating and the cover is installed. For this detector to function properly, it MUST be installed according to the in- structions in this manual. Furthermore, the detector MUST be operated within ALL electrical and environmental specifications listed in this manual and the sensor head installation manual. Failure to comply with these requirements may prevent the detector from activating when smoke is present in the air duct. [2]gENERAL DESCRIPTION Smoke introduced into this air duct system will be distributed throughout the entire building. Smoke detectors designed for use in air duct systems are used to sense the presence of smoke in the duct. Model DNR Air Duct Smoke Detector utilizes photoelectric technology for the detection of smoke. This detection method, when combined with an efficient housing design, samples air passing through the duct and allows detection of a developing hazardous condition. When sufficient smoke is sensed, an alarm signal is initiated at the fire control panel monitoring the detector, and appro- priate action can be taken to shut off fans, blowers, change over air handling systems, etc. These actions can facilitate the management of toxic smoke and fire gases throughout the areas served by the duct system. The DNR incorporates a sensor cover tamper feature that provides a trouble signal at the panel immediately if the cover is removed or improperly installed. Proper installation of the sensor cover removes the trouble condition. If programmed with the system control panel, two LEDs on each duct smoke detector light to provide local visible indication. The DNR provides a remote alarm output for use with auxiliary devices, such as the RA400Z remote LED annunciator, as well as remote test capability with the RTS451 or RTS451KEY Remote Test Stations. [2.1] DETECTOR fEATURE SET - Utilizes plug-in head - Sampling tubes install from front and rear - Compatible with existing accessories - Able to address detector per code switches on sensor head. [3]CONTENTS Of ThE DUCT SMOkE DETECTOR kIT 1. Sensor/power board assembly and covers (use appropriate sensor per the system control panel) 2. Three #10 sheet metal screws for mounting 3. One test magnet 4. Drilling template 5. One sampling tube end cap 6. One plastic exhaust tube NOTE: A sampling tube must be ordered to complete the installation. It must be the correct length for the width of the duct where it will be installed. See Ta- ble 1 on page 3 to determine the inlet tube required for different duct widths. [4]DETECTOR INSTALLATION [4.1]VERIfy DUCT AIR fLOw DIRECTION AND VELOCITy Model DNR detectors are designed to be used in air handling systems having air velocities of 100 to 4000 feet per minute. Duct widths from 6 inches to 12 feet can be accommodated. Be sure to check engineering specifications to ensure that the air velocity in the duct falls within these parameters. If neces- sary, use a velocity meter (anemometer) to check the air velocity in the duct.I56-3051-001RSPECIfICATIONS Operating Temperature: –4° to 158° F (–20° to 70° C) Storage Temperature: –22° to 158° F (–30° to 70° C) Humidity: 0% to 93% Relative Humidity Non-condensing Air Velocity: 100 to 4000 ft./min. (0.5 to 20.3 m/sec.) Rectangular Footprint Dimensions: 14.38 in L x 5 in W x 2.5 in D (37 cm L x 12.7 cm W x 6.36 cm D) Square Footprint Dimensions: 7.75 in L x 9 in W x 2.5 in D (19.7 cm L x 22.9 cm W x 6.35 cm D) Weight: 1.6 pounds; 0.73 kg Electrical (See applicable detector head installation manual for electrical specifications. Use the Base/Sensor Cross Reference chart at http:\\www.systemsensor.com to determine applicable sensor head.) ACCESSORY CURRENT LOADS AT 24 VDC DEVICE STANDBY ALARM RA400Z 0mA 12mA Max. RTS451 0mA 12mA Max. RTS451KEY 12mA 12mA Max. [4.2]DETERMINE MOUNTINg LOCATION AND CONfIgURATION On ducts wider than 18 inches it is recommended that the detector be mounted downstream of a bend, obstruction in the duct, or the supply or return air inlet. Exception: Installation of duct detectors can be on or within a commercial packaged rooftop heating and air-conditioning system, fire/smoke dampers and economizers. They may be mounted in either the supply and/or return air section as determined by local code. Once a suitable location is selected, determine if the detector is to be mounted in a side-by-side “rectangular” configuration or a top-over-bottom “square” configuration as shown in Figure 2. If mounting in the square configuration, remove the rear attachment screw, rotate the unit at hinge, and replace the screw into the new attachment hole as shown in Figure 2. Do NOT remove the hinge screw during this process. Final installation approval shall be based upon passing differential pressure and smoke entry tests described in the Measurement Tests section. fIgURE 2: REMOVE SCREW AND PIVOT DETECTOR AS SHOWN BELOW. REPLACE SCREW TO SECURE DETECTOR IN PLACE. H0550-00 [4.3]DRILL ThE MOUNTINg hOLES Remove the paper backing from the mounting template supplied. Affix the template to the duct at the desired mounting location. Make sure the template lies flat and smooth on the duct. [4.3.1]fOR RECTANgULAR SIDE-By-SIDE MOUNTINg CONfIgURATION: Center punch at (4) target centers: (2) “A” for sampling tubes and (2) “B” for the rectangular configuration mounting tabs as shown on mounting template. Drill pilot holes at target “A” centers and cut two 1.375 inch diameter holes using a 13⁄8 inch hole saw or punch. Drill .156 inch diameter holes using a 5⁄32 inch drill at target “B” centers. [4.3.2]fOR SqUARE TOP-OVER-BOTTOM MOUNTINg CONfIgURATION: Center punch at (4) target centers: (2) “A” for sampling tubes and (2) “C” for the square configuration mounting tabs as shown on mounting template. Drill pilot holes at target “A” centers and cut two 1.375 inch diameter holes using a 1 3⁄8 inch hole saw or punch. Drill .156 inch diameter holes using a 5⁄32 inch drill at target “C” centers. If desired, drill an additional .156 inch hole at the location of one of the mounting tabs on the lower housing. [4.4]SECURE ThE DUCT DETECTOR TO ThE DUCT Use two (rectangular configuration) or three (square configuration) of the pro- vided sheet metal screws to screw the duct detector to the duct. CAUTION: Do not overtighten the screws. [5]SAMPLINg TUBE INSTALLATION [5.1]SAMPLINg TUBE SELECTION The sampling tube must be purchased separately. Order the correct length, as specified in Table 1, for width of the duct where it will be installed. The sampling tube length must extend at least 2/3 across the duct width for optimal performance. The sampling tube is always installed with the air inlet holes facing into the air flow. To assist proper installation, the tube’s connector is marked with an arrow. Make sure the sampling tube is mounted so that the arrow points into the airflow as shown in Figure 3. Mounting the detector housing in a vertical orientation is acceptable provided that the air flows directly into the sam- pling tube holes as indicated in Figure 3. The sampling tube and exhaust tube can be mounted in either housing connection as long as the exhaust tube is mounted downstream from the sampling tube. SS-300-015 2 I56-3051-001R fIgURE 1. ExPLODED VIEw Of DUCT SMOkE DETECTOR COMPONENTS: H0569-00 EXHAUST TUBE SENSOR HEAD SENSOR MODULE COVER WIRING COMPARTMENT COVER WIRING COMPARTMENT SENSOR MODULE SAMPLING TUBE NOTE: SENSOR HEAD IS ONLY INCLUDED ON SPECIFIED MODELS. SOLD SEPERATELY SS-300-015 3 I56-3051-001R fIgURE 4. DETECTOR3/4˝ HOLE 12˝ 1/4˝ 2˝ NOTE: Air currents inside the duct may cause excessive vibration, especially when the longer sampling tubes are used. In these cases, a 3 inch floor flange (available at most plumbing supply stores) may be used to fasten the sampling tube to the other side of the duct. When using the flange/connector mounting technique, drill a 1 to 1 ¼ inch hole where the flange will be used [5.3]MODIfICATIONS Of SAMPLINg TUBES There may be applications where duct widths are not what is specified for the installation. In such cases, it is permissible to modify a sampling tube that is longer than necessary to span the duct width. Use a 0.193-inch diameter (#10) drill and add the appropriate number of holes so that the total number of holes exposed to the air flow in the duct is 10 to 12. Space the additional holes as evenly as possible over the length of the tube. CAUTION: This procedure should only be used as a temporary fix. It is not intended as a permanent substitute for ordering the correct length tubes. [5.4]REMOTE SAMPLINg TUBE INSTALLATION The detector arrangement can also incorporate the remote mounting of the sampling tube and/or exhaust tube. In this case both the detector, sampling tube and exhaust tube (if included) should be rigidly mounted to withstand the pressure and vibrations caused by the air velocity. The location of the detector’s sampling tube should be such that there is uniform airflow in the cross section area. Pressure differential across the sampling and exhaust ports in the detector hous- ing shall be verified to be between 0.01 and 1.11 inches of water. Do so by mea- suring the pressure difference between the inlet and outlet ports on the detector housing using a manometer as described in the Measurement Tests sectiont of this manual. [6]MEASUREMENT TESTS [6.1]AIR fLOw The DNR is designed to operate over an extended air speed range of 100 to 4000 FPM. To verify sufficient sampling of ducted air, turn the air handler on and use a manometer to measure the differential pressure between the two sampling tubes. The differential pressure should measure at least 0.01 inches of water and no more than 1.11 inches of water. Because most commercially TABLE 1. SAMPLINg TUBES RECOMMENDED fOR DIffERENT DUCT wIDThS: Outside Duct Width Sampling Tube Recommended* Up to 1 ft.DST1 1 to 2 ft.DST1.5 2 to 4 ft.DST3 4 to 8 ft.DST5 8 to 12 ft.DST10 (2-piece) *Must extend a minimum of 2⁄3 the duct width fIgURE 3. AIR DUCT DETECTOR SAMPLINg TUBE: SAMPLING TUBE ENDCAP ARROW MUST FACE INTO AIR FLOW AIR FLOW DIRECTION CAUTION: The sampling tube end cap, included with the detector, is critical to proper operation of the duct smoke detector. The end cap is needed to create the proper air flow to the sensor of the duct smoke detector. Once any sampling tube length adjustments are made, plug the end of the sampling tube with the provided end cap. A plastic exhaust tube is included with the unit to be installed if needed. In- stall into the housing connection that is downstream from the sampling tube connection. The exhaust tube can be installed from the front of the detector or the back. A longer 1 foot exhaust tube, model ETX, is available as an acces- sory in cases where the molded exhaust tube does not extend at least 2 inches into the duct. [5.2]SAMPLINg TUBE INSTALLATION 1. For tubes shorter than the width of the duct, slide the sampling tube, with installed end cap, into the housing connection that meets the air- flow first. Position the tube so that the arrow points into the airflow as shown in Figure 3. Per NFPA sampling tubes over 3 feet long should be supported at the end opposite of the duct detector. In ducts wider than 8 feet, work must be performed inside the duct to couple the other section of the sampling tube to the section already installed using the ½ inch conduit fitting supplied. Make sure that the holes on both sections of the air inlet sampling tube are lined up and facing into the airflow. 2. For tubes longer than the width of the air duct, the tube should extend out of the opposite side of the duct. Drill a ¾ inch hole in the duct op- posite the hole already cut for the sampling tube. Ensure that the sam- pling tube is angled downward from the duct smoke detector to allow for moisture drainage away from the detector. The sampling tube should be angled at least 1⁄4” downward for every 12” of duct width per Figure 4.There should be 10 to 12 holes spaced as evenly as possible across the width of the duct. If there are more than 2 holes in the section of the tube extending out of the duct, select a shorter tube using Table 1. Otherwise, trim the tube to leave approximately 1 to 2 inches extending outside the duct. Plug the end with the end cap and tape closed any holes in the protruding section of the tube. Be sure to seal the duct where the tube protrudes. HIGH LOW 9 VOLT BATTERY 9 VOLT BATTERY 9 VOLT BATTERY TO SAMPLING TUBE TO EXHAUST TUBE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER MODEL #607-01 15 TO 36 VDC SUPPLY 1000 OHM 5%1 WATT RESISTOR VOLT METER FLUKE MODEL 87 OR EQUIVALENT +–H0163-01 fIgURE 5. PROCEDURE fOR VERIfyINg AIR fLOw: H0215-00 H0551-00 available manometers cannot accurately measure very low pressure differen- tials, applications with less than 500 FPM of duct air speed may require one of the following: 1) the use of a current-sourcing pressure transmitter (Dwyer Series 607) or 2) the use of aerosol smoke, see below for test descriptions. [6.2]LOw fLOw AIR fLOw TEST USINg DwyER SERIES 607 DIffERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER Verify the air speed of the duct using an anemometer. Air speed must be at least 100 FPM. Wire the Dwyer transmitter as shown in Figure 5. Connect the leads of the meter to either side of the 1000Ω resistor. Allow unit to warm up for 15 seconds. With both HIGH and LOW pressure ports open to ambient air, measure and record the voltage drop across the 1000Ω resistor (measurement 1), 4.00 volts is typical. Using flexible tubing and rubber stoppers, connect the HIGH side of the transmitter to the sampling tube of the duct smoke detec- tor housing, and the LOW side of the transmitter to the exhaust tube of the duct smoke detector housing. Measure and record the voltage drop across the 1000Ω resistor (measurement 2). Subtract the voltage recorded in measure- ment 1 from the voltage recorded in measurement 2. If the difference is greater than 0.15 volts, there is enough air flow through the duct smoke detector for proper operation. [7]fIELD wIRINg; INSTALLATION gUIDELINES All wiring must be installed in compliance with the National Electrical Code and the local codes having jurisdiction. Proper wire gauges should be used. The conductors used to connect smoke detectors to control panels and acces- sory devices should be color-coded to prevent wiring mistakes. Improper con- nections can prevent a system from responding properly in the event of a fire. For signal wiring (the wiring between detectors or from detector to auxiliary devices), it is usually recommended that single conductor wire be no smaller than 18 gauge. The duct smoke detector terminals accommodate wire sizes up to 12 gauge. Flexible conduit is recommended for the last foot of conduit; solid conduit connections may be used if desired. Duct smoke detectors and alarm system control panels have specifications for Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) wiring. Consult the control panel manufacturer’s specifications for wiring requirements before wiring the detector loop. [7.1]wIRINg INSTRUCTIONS Disconnect power from the communication line before installing the DNR duct smoke detector. The DNR detectors are designed for easy wiring. The housing provides a ter- minal strip with clamping plates. Wiring connections are made by sliding the bare end under the plate, and tightening the clamping plate screw. See Figure 6 on below for system wiring. [7.2] SET ThE ADDRESS Set the desired address on the sensor head code wheel switches. on the back of the sensor head. fIgURE 7. ROTARy ADDRESS SwITChES Note: Some panels support extended addressing. In order to set the sensor above the address number 99 on compatible systems, carefully remove the stop on the left hand rotary switch with pliers as shown in Figure 7. NOTE: Verify sensor cover gasket is properly seated on cover prior to cover installation [8] VERIfICATION Of OPERATION [8.1]INSTALL ThE COVER Install the covers making sure that the cover fits into the base groove. Tighten the seven screws that are captured in the covers. Note that the cover must be properly installed for proper operation of the sensor. NOTE: Verify sensor cover gasket is properly seated on cover prior to cover installation. [8.2] POwER ThE UNIT Activate the communication line on terminals COM + and COM —. [8.3] DETECTOR ChECk Standby - If programmed by the system control panel, look for the presence of the flashing LEDs through the transparent housing cover. The LED will flash with each communication. Trouble - If programmed by the system control panel and the detector LEDs do not flash, then the detector lacks power (check wiring, missing or improperly placed cover, panel programming, or power supply), the sensor head is miss- ing (replace), or the unit is defective (return for repair). [8.4]DUCT SMOkE DETECTOR TEST & MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES Test and maintain duct smoke detectors as recommended in NFPA 72. The tests contained in this manual were devised to assist maintenance personnel in verification of proper detector operation. Before conducting these tests, notify the proper authorities that the smoke detection system will be temporarily out of service. Disable the zone or system under test to prevent unwanted alarms. [8.4.1]TEST ThE UNIT 1. M02-04-00 Magnet Test - This sensor can be functionally tested with a test magnet. The test magnet electronically simulates smoke in the sens- ing chamber, testing the sensor electronics and connections to the control panel. 2. Remote Test Accessory - The use of a remote accessory for visible indica- tion of power and alarm is recommended. Verify system control panel alarm status and control panel execution of all intended auxiliary functions (i.e. fan shutdown, damper control, etc.). Two LEDs on the sensor are controlled by the panel to indicate sensor status. Coded signals, transmitted from the panel, can cause the LEDs to blink, latch on, or latch off. Refer to the control panel technical docu- mentation for sensor LED operation and expected delay to alarm. SS-300-015 4 I56-3051-001R fIgURE 6. SySTEM wIRINg DIAgRAM fOR DNR: HO572-00 COMM. LINE (+) UL/FM LISTED CONTROL PANEL 1ST DETECTOR IN LOOP 2ND DETECTOR IN LOOP COMM. LINE (–) COMM. LINE BREAKAWAY STOP HO112-00 SS-300-015 5 I56-3051-001R H0571-01 [8.4.2] ThE DETECTOR MUST BE RESET By ThE SySTEM CONTROL PANEL [8.4.3]SMOkE ENTRy TEST USINg AEROSOL SMOkE This test is intended for low-flow systems (100-500 FPM). If the air speed is greater than 500 FPM, use a conventional manometer to measure differential pressure between the sampling tubes, as described under Measurement Tests on Page 3. Drill a 1⁄4 inch hole 3 feet upstream from the duct smoke detector. With the air handler on, measure the air velocity with an anemometer. Air speed must be at least 100 FPM. Spray aerosol smoke* into the duct through the 1⁄4 inch hole for five seconds. Wait two minutes for the duct smoke detector to alarm. If the duct smoke detector alarms, air is flowing through the detector. Remove the duct smoke detector cover and blow out the residual aerosol smoke from the chamber and reset the duct smoke detector at the panel. Use duct tape to seal the aerosol smoke entry hole. Remember to replace the cover after the test or the detector will not function properly. *Aerosol smoke can be purchased from Home Safeguard Industries, model 25S Smoke Detector Tester, Malibu, CA. Phone: 310/457-5813 and Chekkit Smoke Detector Tester model CHEK02 and CHEK06 available from SDi. When used properly, the canned smoke agent will cause the smoke detector to go into alarm. Refer to the manufacturer’s published instructions for proper use of the canned smoke agent. CAUTION Canned aerosol simulated smoke (canned smoke agent) formulas will vary by manufacturer. Misuse or overuse to these products may have long term adverse effects on the smoke detector. Consult the canned smoke agent manufacturer’s published instructions for any further warnings or caution statements. [9]DETECTOR CLEANINg PROCEDURES Notify the proper authorities that the smoke detector system is undergoing maintenance, and that the system will temporarily be out of service. Disable the zone or system undergoing maintenance to prevent unwanted alarms and possible dispatch of the fire department. [9.1]DETECTOR SENSOR 1. Remove the sensor to be cleaned from the system. 2. Remove the sensor cover by pressing firmly on each of the four removal tabs that hold the cover in place. 3. Vacuum the screen carefully without removing it. If further cleaning is required continue with Step 4, otherwise skip to Step 7. 4. Remove the chamber cover/screen assembly by pulling it straight out. 5. Use a vacuum cleaner or compressed air to remove dust and debris from the sensing chamber. 6. Reinstall the chamber cover/screen assembly by sliding the edge over the sensing chamber. Turn until it is firmly in place. 7. Replace the cover using the LEDs to align the cover and then gently pushing it until it locks into place. 8. Reinstall the detector. [9.2]REINSTALLATION 1. Reinstall the detector in its housing. 2. Restore system power. 3. Perform Detector Check. 4. Notify the proper authorities testing has been completed and the smoke detector system is back in operation. [10]SENSOR REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the sensor head by rotating counterclockwise. 2. Pull gently to remove it. 3. To replace the sensor head, align the mounting features and rotate clock- wise into place. [11] OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES Optional accessories include RA400Z, RTS451 and RTS451KEY fIgURE 8. wIRINg DIAgRAM fOR DNR TO RA400Z: (+) (-) RA400Z– RA + RA REMOTE ALARM LED OPTION 1 PER UNIT H0570-00 Note: Tab on the RA400Z should be broken for use with the intelligent duct smoke detector. [11.1]RTS451/RTS451kEy REMOTE TEST STATION The RTS451/RTS451KEY Remote Test Station facilitates test of the alarm ca- pability of the duct smoke detector. These accessories provide the stimulus to initiate an alarm condition at the detector. The DNR duct smoke detector must be reset by the system control panel. To install the RTS451/RTS451KEY, connect the device as shown in Figure 9 below; wire runs must be limited to 25 ohms or less per interconnecting wire. NOTE: The use of a remote test station requires the installation of an acces- sory coil, part number DCOIL, sold separately. 1) Install DCOIL in housing pocket insuring that arrow is pointing toward detector 2) Install DCOIL mounting screw 3) Connect each DCOIL lead to a Test Coil Terminal See Figure 8 below for reference. fIgURE 8. DNR wITh OPTIONAL TEST COIL TEST COIL TERMINALS TEST COIL TEST COIL SCREW H0561-00 fIgURE 9. wIRINg DIAgRAM fROM DNR TO RTS451/RTS451kEy: EXTERNAL (-) POWER (+) SUPPLY * RTS451/RTS451KEY REMOTE TEST STATION LED OPTION 1 PER UNIT TEST COIL OPTION 1 PER UNIT 95mA CURRENT DRAW 45 321 TEST COIL + TEST COIL – COMM + OUT (CONV ONLY) + COMM – RA/RTS – RA + RTS + NOTE: THE RTS451/RTS451KEY TEST COIL CIRCUIT REQUIRES AN EXTERNAL 24 VDC POWER SUPPLY WHICH MUST BE UL LISTED. NOTE: THE USE OF A REMOTE TEST STATION REQUIRES THE INSTALLATION OF AN ACCESSORY COIL, PA RT NUMBER DCOIL, SOLD SEPARATELY. ThREE-yEAR LIMITED wARRANTy System Sensor warrants its enclosed product to be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of three years from date of manufacture. System Sensor makes no other express warranty for the enclosed product. No agent, representative, dealer, or employee of the Company has the authority to in- crease or alter the obligations or limitations of this Warranty. The Company’s obligation of this Warranty shall be limited to the replacement of any part of the product which is found to be defective in materials or workmanship under normal use and service during the three year period commencing with the date of manufacture. After phoning System Sensor’s toll free number 800-SENSOR2 (736-7672) for a Return Authorization number, send defective units postage prepaid to: System Sensor, Returns Department, RA #__________, 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, IL 60174. Please include a note describing the malfunction and suspected cause of failure. The Company shall not be obligated to replace units which are found to be defective because of damage, unreasonable use, modifications, or alterations occurring after the date of manufacture. In no case shall the Company be liable for any consequential or incidental damages for breach of this or any other Warranty, expressed or implied whatsoever, even if the loss or damage is caused by the Company’s negligence or fault. Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you. This Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state. Please refer to insert for the Limitations of Fire Alarm Systems SS-300-015 6 I56-3051-001R ©2008 System Sensor GAMEWELL-FCI 12 Clintonville Road, Northford, CT 06472-1653 USA • Tel: (203) 484-7161 • Fax: (203) 484-7118 Specifications are for information only, are not intended for installation purposes, and are subject to change without notice. No responsibility is assumed by Gamewell-FCI for their use. ©2008 Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved.www.gamewell-fci.com 9020-0625 Rev. D1 page 1 of 1 Velociti® Series AOM-2RF Addressable Output Relay Control Module Description The Gamewell-FCI Velociti® Series, addressable output relay control module (AOM-2RF) allows an Gamewell-FCI analog addressable fire alarm control to switch discrete relay contacts by code command. The relay provides two (2), isolated sets of Form-C contacts which transfer simul- taneously. Circuit connections to the relay contacts are not supervised by the module. The Velociti® Series use a communication protocol that substantially increases the speed of communication between the sensors and certain Gamewell-FCI analog addressable fire alarm controls. These devices operate in a grouped fashion. If one of the devices in the group has a status change, the panel’s microprocessor stops the group poll and concentrates on the single device. The net effect is response speed up to five times greater than earlier designs. The AOM-2RF Module is designed for installation in the signaling line circuit of any Gamewell-FCI analog address- able fire control panel. The module contains a panel con- trolled LED. The AOM-2RF is designed to mount in a 4” square junction box 2 1/8” deep. Velociti® Series is a registered trademark of Honeywell International Inc. Relay Contact Ratings Current Rating Maximum Voltage Load Description Application 3A 30 VDC Resistive Non-Coded 2A 30 VDC Resistive Coded 0.9A 110 VDC Resistive Non-Coded 0.5A 125 VAC Resistive Non-Coded 0.5A 30 VDC Inductive (L/R=5ms) Coded 1A 30 VDC Inductive (L/R=2ms) Coded 0.5A 125 VAC Inductive (PF=.35) Non-Coded 0.7A 75 VAC Inductive Non-Coded Features • Two (2) sets of Form “C” contacts • Visual rotary, decimal switch addressing (01-159) • Bicolor LEDs flash green whenever the sensor is addressed, and light steady red on alarm* • Compact size allows easy installation Note: Only the red LED is operative in panels that do not operate in Velociti® mode. Specifications Supervisory current:.000375 amps. Alarm current:.0065 amps. Operating temperature:32° to 120° F (0° to 49° C) Relative humidity:10 to 93% relative humidity (non-condensing) Dimensions:4 1/2” H x 4” W x 1 1/4” (11.4 x 10.2 x 3.2 cm) Ordering Information Model Description AOM-2RF Addressable output relay control module AOM-2RF An ISO 9001-2000 Company APPROVED FM 3023594 SIGNALING 07300-0694:178S1949 MEA Approved 227-03-E Vol.IV BLANK PAGE THIS PAGE WAS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 9000-0468 1 I56-1517-00 AOM-2R Relay Control Module INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Before Installing This information is included as a quick reference installation guide. Refer to the control panel installation manual for detailed system information. If the modules will be installed in an existing operational system, inform the operator and local authority that the system will be temporarily out of service. Disconnect power to the control panel before installing the modules. NOTICE: This manual should be left with the owner/user of this equipment. General Description The AOM-2R Relay Control Module is intended for use in intelligent, two-wire systems, where the individual address of each module is selected using the built-in rotary decade switches. It allows a com- patible control panel to switch discrete contacts by code command. The relay contains two isolated sets of Form-C contacts, which oper- ate as a DPDT switch and are rated in accordance with the table in the manual. Circuit connections to the relay contacts are not super- vised by the module. The module also has a panel controlled LED indicator. This module can be used to replace an AOM-2 module that has been configured for Form-C operation. Compatibility Requirements To ensure proper operation, these modules shall be connected to listed compatible system control panels only. Mounting The AOM-2R mounts directly to 4² square electrical boxes (see Figure 2A). The box must have a minimum depth of 21 /8². Surface mounted electrical boxes (SMB500) are available. Wiring NOTE:All wiring must conform to applicable local codes, ordi- nances, and regulations. When using control modules in nonpower limited applications, the CB500 Module Barrier must be used to meet UL requirements for the separation of power-limited and nonpower-limited terminals and wir- ing. The barrier must be inserted into a 4²x4²x21 /8² junc- tion box, and the control module must be placed into the barrier and attached to the junction box (Figure 2A). The power-limited wiring must be placed into the isolated Figure 1. Controls and indicators: Figure 2A. Module mounting with barrier: A78-2611-09 Figure 2B: A78-2610-07 A78-2318-14 Specifications Normal Operating Voltage: 15 to 32 VDC EOL Resistance: Not used Temperature Range: 32˚F to 120˚F (0˚C to 49˚C) Humidity: 10% to 93% Noncondensing Dimensions: 4 1/2² H x 4² W x 11/4² D (Mounts to a 4² square by 21/8² deep box.) Accessories: SMB500 Electrical Box; CB500 Barrier quadrant of the module barrier (Figure 2B). 1. Install module wiring in accordance with the job drawings and appropriate wiring diagrams. 2. Set the address on the module per job drawings. 3. Secure module to electrical box (supplied by installer), as shown in Figure 2A. ISOLATED QUADRANT01234987650TENSONESADDRESSLOOP987654321098765432101234987650TENSONESADDRESSLOOP9876543210987654321301 2nd Avenue, Waltham, MA 02451-1133 (781) 487-0088, FAX: (781) 370-4132 ® 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 012 3 45 6 7 8 9 TENS ONES ADDRESSLOOP 012 3 45 6 7 8 9 9000-0468 2 I56-1517-00 © FCI 1999 WARNING All relay switch contacts are shipped as shown in Figure 3, but may have transferred during shipping. To ensure that the switch contacts are in their correct state, modules must be made to communicate with the panel before connecting circuits controlled by the module. Relay Contact Ratings: Figure 3. Relay module wiring diagram: A78-2286-08 MODULE FROM PANEL OR (+)(–)TO NEXT (+)(–)DEVICE (+)(–)CONTROL CONNECT MODULES TO LISTED COMPATIBLE RELAY COMMON 1 RELAY COMMON 2 NORMALLY CLOSED 1 NORMALLY OPEN 2 NORMALLY CLOSED 2 MODULE DOES NOT SUPERVISE CONTROLLED CIRCUITS NORMALLY OPEN 1 CONTROL PANELS ONLY PREVIOUS DEVICE COMMUNICATION LINE 32 VDC Max. SHIELDED-TWISTED PAIR IS RECOMMENDED 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ADDRESSLOOP CURRENT RATING MAXIMUM VOLTAGE LOAD DESCRIPTION APPLICATION 3 A 2 A .9 A .9 A .5 A 1 A .5 A .7 A 30 VDC 30 VDC 110 VDC 125 VAC 30 VDC 30 VDC 125 VAC 75 VAC Resistive Resistive Resistive Resistive Inductive (L/R=5ms) Inductive (L/R=2ms) Inductive (PF=.35) Inductive (PF=.35) Non Coded Coded Non Coded Non Coded Coded Coded Non Coded Non Coded IF ANY WIRING TO TERMINALS 3 – 9 IS NONPOWER LIMITED, THE CB500 BARRIER IS REQUIRED. THE CB500 INCLUDES A NONPOWER LIMITED LABEL, WHICH MUST BE PLACED OVER THE POWER LIMITED TERMINAL INFORMATION ON THE NAMEPLATE LABEL. MR Series CS-2481 09/01/06 Page 1 of 2 Description The MR and PAM Series both offer multi-voltage control relays with SPDT or DPDT 10.0 amp (7.0 amp with PAM-2) contacts which may be operated by one of four input control voltages. A single relay may be energized from a voltage source of 24 VDC, 24 VAC, 115 VAC, or 230 VAC by wiring to appropriate input terminals. Each relay position contains a red LED which indicates that the relay coil is energized. The relays are available in a four-module assembly and may be snapped apart and used independently. The PAM relays are an encapsulated multi-voltage devices providing 10.0 amp Form-C contacts (7.0 amp with PAM-2). The relay may be energized by one of the three voltages: 24 VDC, 24 VAC, or 115 VAC. The relay is supplied with a red LED which indicates that the coil is energized. Standard Application The MR and PAM Series are ideal when remote relays are required for control, general purpose switching, or status feedback. They are suitable for use in fire alarm, security, HVAC, energy management, and/or lighting control applications. Installation The MR Series relays may be mounted in a control panel or supplied with either a four-position or single-position metal enclosure. The PAM relays may be mounted by using the double-sided adhesive tape, the self-drilling screw, or loosely placed in a backbox. Features •Red LED annunciation when relay coil is energized. •Available in dust-proof metal enclosure with LED viewing port. •Track-mounting hardware to facilitate ease of installation. •Suitable for use with fire alarm, HVAC, energy management and lighting control systems. •UL-Listed as Control Unit Accessory. Listings Listings and approvals below apply to the MR and PAM Series. In some cases, certain modules may not be listed by certain approval agencies, or listing may be in process. Consult factory for latest listing status. • UL-Listed: MR and PAM Series Multi-Voltage Control Relays 3477b101.wmf, 3477c101.tif3477b104.wmf, 3477c104.tif MR Series CS-2481 09/01/06Page 2 of 2 Specifications and wiring information are provided for information only and are believed to be accurate. Gamewell-FCI assumes no responsibility for their use. Data and design are subject to change without notice. Installation and wiring instructions shipped with the product shall always be used for actual installation. For more information, contact Gamewell-FCI. Gamewell-FCI 12 Clintonville Road Northford, CT 06472-1610 Phone: 203-484-7161 Fax: 203-484-7118 www.gamewell-fci.com A Honeywell Company © 2006 Gamewell-FCI Ordering Information MR-101/T Single SPDT relay with LED and track-mounting hardware. MR-101/CR Single SPDT relay with LED mounted in metal enclosure. MR-104/T Four-position SPDT relay with LEDs and track-mounting hardware. MR104/CR Four-position SPDT relay with LEDs mounted in metal enclosure. MR-201/T Single DPDT relay with LED and track-mounting hardware. MR-201/CR Single DPDT relay with LED mounted in metal enclosure. MR-204/T Four-position DPDT relay with LEDs mounted in track- mounting hardware. MR-204/CR Four-position DPDT relay with LEDs mounted in metal enclosure. PAM-1 Single SPDT relay with LED, double-sided adhesive, mounting screw, 12" (30.48 cm) leads and 6 wire nuts. PAM-2 Single SPDT relay with LED, Double-sided adhesive, mounting screws, 12" (30.48 cm) leads and six wire nuts. Specifications Input power MR-101: 24 VDC, 24 VAC, 115 VAC, 230 VAC. MR-210: 24 VDC, 24 VAC, 115 VAC, 230 VAC. PAM-1: 24 VDC, 24 VAC, 115 VAC. Contact rating MR Series:10.0 A @ 115 VAC. PAM-1: 10.0 A @ 115 VAC, 7.0 A @ 28 VDC, and 250 NA @ 5 VDC. PAM-2: 7.0 A @ 115 VAC, 7.0 A @ 28 VDC, and 250 NA @ 5 VDC. Temperature rating —50°C to 85°C (—58°F to 185°F). Dimensions MR-101/T, MR201/T: 3.0 H x 2.125" W x 1.5" D (cm: 7.62 H x 5.398 W x 3.81 D). MR-104/T, MR-204/T: 3.0" H x 8.5" W x 1.5" D (cm: 7.62 H x 21.59 W x 3.81 D). MR-101/CR, MR-210/CR: 6.125" H x 3.25" W X 2.5" D (cm: 15.556 H x 16.51 W x 6.35 D). MR-104/CR, MR-204/CR: 6.125" H x 6.5" W x 2.5" D (cm: 15.556 H x 16.51 W x 6.35 D). PAM-1: 1.15" H x 1.0" W x 5.75" D (cm: 3.0 H x 2.54 W x 14.605 D). Agency Listings Features • Plug-in design with minimal intrusion into the back box • Tamper-resistant construction • Automatic selection of 12- or 24-volt operation at 15 and 15/75 candela • Field-selectable candela settings on wall and ceiling units: 15, 15/75, 30, 75, 95, 110, 115, 135, 150, 177, and 185 • Horn rated at 88+ dBA at 16 volts • Rotary switch for horn tone and three volume selections • Universal mounting plate for wall and ceiling units • Mounting plate shorting spring checks wiring continuity before device installation • Electrically compatible with existing SpectrAlert products • Compatible with MDL sync module The SpectrAlert Advance series offers the most versatile and easy-to-use line of horns, strobes, and horn strobes in the industry. With white and red plastic housings, wall and ceiling mounting options, and plain and FIRE-printed devices, SpectrAlert Advance can meet virtually any application requirement. Like the entire SpectrAlert Advance product line, horns, strobes, and horn strobes include a variety of features that increase their application versatility while simplifying installation. All devices feature plug-in designs with minimal intrusion into the back box, which make installations fast and foolproof while virtually eliminating costly and time-consuming ground faults. Furthermore, a universal mounting plate with an onboard shorting spring tests wiring continuity before the device is installed, protecting devices from damage. In addition, field-selectable candela settings, automatic selection of 12- or 24-volt operation, and a rotary switch for horn tones with three volume selections enables installers to easily adapt devices to suit a wide range of application requirements. Selectable-Output Horns, Strobes, and Horn Strobes SpectrAlert® Advance selectable-output horns, strobes, and horn strobes are rich with features guaranteed to cut installation times and maximize profits. MEA452-05-E3023572 7125-1653:186 (indoor strobes) 7125-1653:188 (horn strobes, chime strobes) 7135-1653:189 (horns, chimes) S4011 (chimes, horn strobes, horns) S5512 (strobes) A05-0395-007 SpectrAlert Advance Specifications Architect/Engineer Specifications General SpectrAlert Advance horns, strobes, and horn strobes shall mount to a standard 4 × 4 × 1½-inch back box, 4-inch octagon back box, or double-gang back box. Two-wire products shall also mount to a single-gang 2 × 4 × 17⁄8-inch back box. A universal mounting plate shall be used for mounting ceiling and wall products. The notification appliance circuit wiring shall terminate at the universal mounting plate. Also, SpectrAlert Advance products, when used with the Sync•Circuit™ Module accessory, shall be powered from a non-coded notification appliance circuit output and shall operate on a nominal 12 or 24 volts. When used with the Sync•Circuit Module, 12-volt-rated notification appliance circuit outputs shall operate between 9 and 17.5 volts; 24-volt-rated notification appliance circuit outputs shall operate between 17 and 33 volts. Indoor SpectrAlert Advance products shall operate between 32 and 120 degrees Fahrenheit from a regulated DC or full-wave rectified unfiltered power supply. Strobes and horn strobes shall have field-selectable candela settings including 15, 15/75, 30, 75, 95, 110, 115, 135, 150, 177, and 185. Strobe The strobe shall be a System Sensor SpectrAlert Advance Model _______ listed to UL 1971 and shall be approved for fire protective service. The strobe shall be wired as a primary-signaling notification appliance and comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act requirements for visible signaling appliances, flashing at 1 Hz over the strobe’s entire operating voltage range. The strobe light shall consist of a xenon flash tube and associated lens/reflector system. Horn Strobe Combination The horn strobe shall be a System Sensor SpectrAlert Advance Model _______ listed to UL 1971 and UL 464 and shall be approved for fire protective service. The horn strobe shall be wired as a primary-signaling notification appliance and comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act requirements for visible signaling appliances, flashing at 1 Hz over the strobe’s entire operating voltage range. The strobe light shall consist of a xenon flash tube and associated lens/reflector system. The horn shall have three audibility options and an option to switch between a temporal three-pattern and a non-temporal (continuous) pattern. These options are set by a multiple position switch. On four-wire products, the strobe shall be powered independently of the sounder. The horn on horn strobe models shall operate on a coded or non-coded power supply. Synchronization Module The module shall be a System Sensor Sync•Circuit model MDL listed to UL 464 and shall be approved for fire protective service. The module shall synchronize SpectrAlert strobes at 1 Hz and horns at temporal three. Also, while operating the strobes, the module shall silence the horns on horn strobe models over a single pair of wires. The module shall mount to a 411⁄16 × 411⁄16 × 21⁄8-inch back box. The module shall also control two Style Y (class B) circuits or one Style Z (class A) circuit. The module shall synchronize multiple zones. Daisy chaining two or more synchronization modules together will synchronize all the zones they control. The module shall not operate on a coded power supply. Physical/Electrical Specifications Standard Operating Temperature 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C) Humidity Range 10 to 93% non-condensing Strobe Flash Rate 1 flash per second Nominal Voltage Regulated 12 DC/FWR or regulated 24 DC/FWR1 Operating Voltage Range2 8 to 17.5 V (12 V nominal) or 16 to 33 V (24 V nominal) Input Terminal Wire Gauge 12 to 18 AWG Ceiling-Mount Dimensions (including lens)6.8˝ diameter × 2.5˝ high (173 mm diameter × 64 mm high) Wall-Mount Dimensions (including lens)5.6˝ L × 4.7˝ W × 2.5˝ D (142 mm L × 119 mm W × 64 mm D) Horn Dimensions 5.6˝ L × 4.7˝ W × 1.3˝ D (142 mm L × 119 mm W × 33 mm D) Wall-Mount Back Box Skirt Dimensions (BBS-2, BBSW-2)5.9˝ L × 5.0˝ W × 2.2˝ D (151 mm L × 128 mm W × 56 mm D) Ceiling-Mount Back Box Skirt Dimensions (BBSC-2, BBSCW-2)7.1˝ diameter × 2.2˝ high (180 mm diameter × 57 mm high) Wall-Mount Trim Ring Dimensions (sold as a 5 pack) (TR-HS, TRW-HS)5.7˝ L × 4.8˝ W × 0.35˝ D (145 mm L × 122 mm W × 9 mm D) Ceiling-Mount Trim Ring Dimensions (sold as a 5 pack) (TRC-HS, TRCW-HS)6.9˝ diameter × 0.35˝ high (175 mm diameter × 9 mm high) Notes: 1. Full Wave Rectified (FWR) voltage is a non-regulated, time-varying power source that is used on some power supply and panel outputs. 2. P, S, PC, and SC products will operate at 12 V nominal only for 15 and 15/75 cd. A05-0395-007 Horn and Horn Strobe Output (dBA) Switch Position Sound Pattern dB 8–17.5 Volts 16–33 Volts 24-Volt Nominal Reverberant Anechoic DC FWR DC FWR DC FWR DC FWR 1 Temporal High 78 78 84 84 88 88 99 98 2 Temporal Medium 74 74 80 80 86 86 96 96 3 Temporal Low 71 73 76 76 83 80 94 89 4 Non-Temporal High 82 82 88 88 93 92 100 100 5 Non-Temporal Medium 78 78 85 85 90 90 98 98 6 Non-Temporal Low 75 75 81 81 88 84 96 92 7†Coded High 82 82 88 88 93 92 101 101 8†Coded Medium 78 78 85 85 90 90 97 98 9†Coded Low 75 75 81 81 88 85 96 92 †Settings 7, 8, and 9 are not available on 2-wire horn strobe. UL Max. Strobe Current Draw (mA RMS) Candela 8–17.5 Volts 16–33 Volts DC FWR DC FWR Standard Candela Range 15 123 128 66 71 15/75 142 148 77 81 30 NA NA 94 96 75 NA NA 158 153 95 NA NA 181 176 110 NA NA 202 195 115 NA NA 210 205 High Candela Range 135 NA NA 228 207 150 NA NA 246 220 177 NA NA 281 251 185 NA NA 286 258 UL Max. Current Draw (mA RMS), 2-Wire Horn Strobe, Standard Candela Range (15–115 cd) DC Input 8–17.5 Volts 16–33 Volts 15 15/75 15 15/75 30 75 95 110 115 Temporal High 137 147 79 90 107 176 194 212 218 Temporal Medium 132 144 69 80 97 157 182 201 210 Temporal Low 132 143 66 77 93 154 179 198 207 Non-Temporal High 141 152 91 100 116 176 201 221 229 Non-Temporal Medium 133 145 75 85 102 163 187 207 216 Non-Temporal Low 131 144 68 79 96 156 182 201 210 FWR Input Temporal High 136 155 88 97 112 168 190 210 218 Temporal Medium 129 152 78 88 103 160 184 202 206 Temporal Low 129 151 76 86 101 160 184 194 201 Non-Temporal High 142 161 103 112 126 181 203 221 229 Non-Temporal Medium 134 155 85 95 110 166 189 208 216 Non-Temporal Low 132 154 80 90 105 161 184 202 211 UL Max. Horn Current Draw (mA RMS) Sound Pattern dB 8–17.5 Volts 16–33 Volts DC FWR DC FWR Temporal High 57 55 69 75 Temporal Medium 44 49 58 69 Temporal Low 38 44 44 48 Non-temporal High 57 56 69 75 Non-temporal Medium 42 50 60 69 Non-temporal Low 41 44 50 50 Coded High 57 55 69 75 Coded Medium 44 51 56 69 Coded Low 40 46 52 50 UL Current Draw Data Horn Tones and Sound Output Data UL Max. Current Draw (mA RMS), 2-Wire Horn Strobe, High Candela Range (135–185 cd) DC Input 16–33 Volts FWR Input 16–33 Volts 135 150 177 185 135 150 177 185 Temporal High 245 259 290 297 Temporal High 215 231 258 265 Temporal Medium 235 253 288 297 Temporal Medium 209 224 250 258 Temporal Low 232 251 282 292 Temporal Low 207 221 248 256 Non-Temporal High 255 270 303 309 Non-Temporal High 233 248 275 281 Non-Temporal Medium 242 259 293 299 Non-Temporal Medium 219 232 262 267 Non-Temporal Low 238 254 291 295 Non-Temporal Low 214 229 256 262 3825 Ohio Avenue • St. Charles, IL 60174 Phone: 800-SENSOR2 • Fax: 630-377-6495 ©2009 System Sensor. Product specifications subject to change without notice. Visit systemsensor.com for current product information, including the latest version of this data sheet. A05-0395-007 • 4/09 • #2132 SpectrAlert Advance Dimensions Model Description Wall Horn Strobes P2R*†2-Wire Horn Strobe, Standard cd‡, Red P2RH*2-Wire Horn Strobe, High cd, Red P2W*2-Wire Horn Strobe, Standard cd, White P2WH*2-Wire Horn Strobe, High cd, White P4R*4-Wire Horn Strobe, Standard cd, Red P4RH 4-Wire Horn Strobe, High cd, Red P4W 4-Wire Horn Strobe, Standard cd, White Wall Strobes SR*†Strobe, Standard cd, Red SRH*†Strobe, High cd, Red SW*Strobe, Standard cd, White SWH*Strobe, High cd, White Ceiling Horn Strobes PC2R*2-Wire Horn Strobe, Standard cd, Red PC2RH 2-Wire Horn Strobe, High cd, Red PC2W*†2-Wire Horn Strobe, Standard cd, White PC2WH*2-Wire Horn Strobe, High cd, White PC4R 4-Wire Horn Strobe, Standard cd, Red PC4RH 4-Wire Horn Strobe, High cd, Red PC4W 4-Wire Horn Strobe, Standard cd, White SpectrAlert Advance Ordering Information Notes: * Add “-P” to model number for plain housing (no “FIRE” marking on cover), e.g., P2R-P. † Add “-SP” to model number for “FUEGO” marking on cover, e.g., P2R-SP. ‡ “Standard cd” refers to strobes that include 15, 15/75, 30, 75, 95, 110, and 115 candela settings. “High cd” refers to strobes that include 135, 150, 177, and 185 candela settings. 4.7˝ 5.6˝ 6.8˝ Dia. 2.5˝ 2.5˝ 2.23˝5.05˝ 5.98˝ 7.1˝ Dia. 2.25˝ 5.1˝ 2.0˝ 5.7˝ 7.1˝ Dia. 2.0˝ Wall-mount horn strobes Ceiling-mount horn strobes Wall back box skirt Ceiling back box skirt Model Description Ceiling Strobes SCR Strobe, Standard cd, Red SCRH Strobe, High cd, Red SCW*Strobe, Standard cd, White SCWH Strobe, High cd, White Horns HR Horn, Red HW Horn, White Accessories BBS-2 Back Box Skirt, Wall, Red BBSW-2 Back Box Skirt, Wall, White BBSC-2 Back Box Skirt, Ceiling, Red BBSCW-2 Back Box Skirt, Ceiling, White TR-HS Trim Ring, Wall, Red TRW-HS Trim Ring, Wall White TRC-HS Trim Ring, Ceiling, Red TRCW-HS Trim Ring, Ceiling, White inSTaLLaTion and mainTenanCe inSTruCTionS Selectable output Strobes, Horns, and Horn/Strobes 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 800/736-7672, FAX: 630/377-6495 www.systemsensor.com D690-03-00 1 I56-2769-015R For use with the following models: P2R, P2RH, P2RK, P2RHK, P2W, P2WK, P2WH, P2WHK, P4R, P4RH, P4RK, P4W, P4WK, P4WHK, SR, SRH, SRK, SRHK, SW, SWK, SWH, SWHK, SW-CLR-ALERT, PC2R, PC2RH,PC2RK, PC2RHK, PC2W, PC2WK, PC2WH, PC2WHK, PC4R, PC4RH, PC4W, PC4WK, PC4WHK, SCR, SCRH, SCRK, SCRHK, SCW, SCWK, SCWH, SCWHK, SCW-CLR-ALERT, HR, HRK, HW, SR-P, SW-P, SRH-P, SWH-P,P2R-P, P2W-P, P2WH-P, P4W-P, SCW-P, PC2R-P, PC2W-P, PC2WH-P, SRK-P, SRHK-P, P2RK-P, P2RHK-P, SWK-P, SWHK-P, P2WK-P, P2WHK-P, SR-SP, P2R-SP, PC2W-SP, SRK-R, SWK-R, SRHK-R, SWHK-R, P2RK-R, P2WK-R, P2RHK-R, P2WHK-R NOTE: All -R models are specifically designed for use with the WTP Series of Weatherproof plates NOTE: When replacing outdoor units; device and back box must be replaced produCT SpeCiFiCaTionS Operating Temperature:Standard Products 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C) K Series –40°F to 151°F Humidity Range:Standard Products 10 to 93% Non-condensing K Series Meets NEMA 4X requirements Strobe Flash Rate:1 flash per second Nominal Voltage:Regulated 12VDC/FWR or regulated 24DC/FWR Operating Voltage Range (includes fire alarm panels with built in sync):8 to 17.5V (12V nominal) or 16 to 33V (24V nominal) Operating Voltage with MDL Sync Module:9 to 17.5V (12V nominal) or 17 to 33V (24V nominal) Input terminal wire gauge:12 to 18 AWG NOTE : Strobes will operate at 12 V nominal for 15 & 15/75 candela settings only. Switching between ranges is automatic. dimenSionS For produCTS and aCCeSSorieS WALL PRODUCTS LENGTH WIDTH DEPTH CEILING PRODUCTS DIAMETER DEPTH Strobes and Horn/Strobes (including lens) 5.6˝4.7˝2.5˝Strobes and Horn/Strobes (including lens) 6.8˝2.5˝ 142 mm 119 mm 64 mm 173 mm 64 mm Horns 5.6˝4.7˝1.3˝SA-WBBC Weatherproof Back Box SA-WBBCW Weatherproof Back Box 7.1˝2.0˝ 142 mm 119 mm 33 mm 180 mm 51 mm SA-WBB Weatherproof Back Box SA-WBBW Weatherproof Back Box 5.7˝5.1˝2.0˝BBSC-2 BBSCW-2 Back Box Skirt 7.1˝2.2˝ 145 mm 130 mm 51 mm 180 mm 57 mm BBS-2 BBSW-2 Back Box Skirt 5.0˝5.9˝2.2˝NOTE: SA-WBB, SA-WBBW, SA-WBBC and SA-WBBCW dimensions do not include the two mounting tabs130 mm 152 mm 57 mm mounTing box opTionS 2-Wire Indoor Products 4-Wire Indoor Products K Series Products 4 × 4 × 11/2, Single Gang, Double Gang, 4˝ Octagon 4 × 4 × 11/2, Double Gang, 4˝ Octagon SA-WBB/W (wall), SA-WBBC/CW (ceiling) generaL deSCripTion The SpectrAlert Advance series of notification appliances offers a wide range of horns, strobes, and horn/strobes, for wall and ceiling applications, indoors and outdoors. They are designed to be used in 12 or 24 volt, DC or FWR (full wave rectified) systems. These products are electrically backward compat- ible with the previous generation of SpectrAlert notification appliances. Horn/ strobe products are available in two versions. The 2-wire products fit systems where a single NAC controls both horn and strobe. The 4-wire products are in- tended for systems which have separate wiring circuits for the horn and strobe. All SpectrAlert Advance products are suitable for use in synchronized systems. The System Sensor MDL module may be used to provide synchronization. K Series products are designed to be used over a wider range of temperatures and are suitable for use in wet locations. Wall and ceiling products may be used interchangeably (wall products may be used on the ceiling and ceiling products may be used on the wall.) Fire aLarm SYSTem ConSideraTionS The National Fire Alarm Code, NFPA 72, requires that all horns, used for building evacuation produce temporal coded signals. Signals other than those used for evacuation purposes do not have to produce the temporal coded sig- nal. System Sensor recommends spacing notification appliances in compli- ance with NFPA 72. Loop deSign and Wiring The system designer must make sure that the total current drawn by the de- vices on the loop does not exceed the current capability of the panel supply, and that the last device on the circuit is operated within its rated voltage. The current draw information for making these calculations can be found in the tables within this manual. For convenience and accuracy, use the voltage drop calculator on the System Sensor website (www.systemsensor.com) or CD-ROM. When calculating the voltage available to the last device, it is necessary to consider the voltage drop due to the resistance of the wire. The thicker the wire, the smaller the voltage drop. Wire resistance tables can be obtained from electrical handbooks. Note that if Class A wiring is installed, the wire length may be up to twice as long as it would be for circuits that are not fault tolerant. NOTE: The total number of strobes on a single NAC must not exceed 40 for 24 volt applications or 12 for 12 volt applications. Loop resistance on a single NAC should not exceed 120 ohms for 24 volt and 30 ohms for 12 volt systems. For 4-Wire installations, terminals 1, 2, and 3 connect to the strobe; terminals 4 and 5 connect to the horn. The horn and strobe circuits must be wired in- dependently, and each circuit must be terminated with the appropriate EOL device. Removal of a notification device will result in an open circuit indica- tion on the strobe loop.I56-2769-015RNOTICE: This manual shall be left with the owner/user of this equipment. D690-03-00 2 I56-2769-015R Figure 1. Wiring 2-Wire produCTS: + – + – INPUT FROM FACPOR PRIOR DEVICE OUTPUT TO NEXTDEVICE OR EOL A0367-01 Figure 2. Wiring 4-Wire produCTS: + – INPUT FROM FACP OR PRIOR STROBE INPUT FROMFACP OR PRIOR HORN + – + –+ – OUTPUT TO NEXT STROBE OR EOL OUTPUT TO NEXT HORN OR EOL A0366-00 Figure 3. SHorTing Spring: SHORTING SPRING A0368-00 NOTE: A shorting spring is provided between terminals 2 and 3 of the mount- ing plate to enable wiring checks after the system has been wired, but prior to installation of the final product. This spring will automatically disengage when the product is installed, to enable supervision of the final system. CandeLa SeLeCTion Adjust the slide switch on the rear of the product to position the desired can- dela setting in the small window on the front of the unit. All products meet the light output profiles specified in the appropriate UL Standards. For K series products used outdoors at low temperatures, listed candela ratings must be re- duced in accordance with Table 2. Use Table 1 to determine the current draw for each candela setting. WIRING DIAGRAMS NOTE: SpectrAlert products set at 15 and 15/75 candela automatically work on either 12V or 24V power supplies. The products are not listed for 12V op- erating voltages when set to any other candela settings. For 4-Wire products, total current draw may be determined by adding current draw for the specific candela selection in Table 1 with the current draw for the specific horn selec- tion in Table 3. TabLe 1. STrobe CurrenT draW ( ) For S, SC, p4 & pC4 SerieS: Candela 8–17.5 Volts 16–33 Volts DC FWR DC FWR Standard Candela Range 15 123 128 66 71 15/75 142 148 77 81 30 NA NA 94 96 75 NA NA 158 153 95 NA NA 181 176 110 NA NA 202 195 115 NA NA 210 205 High Candela Range 135 NA NA 228 207 150 NA NA 246 220 177 NA NA 281 251 185 NA NA 286 258 TabLe 2. CandeLa deraTing: Listed Candela Candela rating at –40°F (K Series Outdoor Applications Only) 15 Do not use below 32°F15/75 30 75 44 95 70 110 110 115 115 135 135 150 150 177 177 185 185 Horn SeLeCTion Turn the rotary switch on the back of the product to the desired setting. For horn and 4-wire horn/strobe products, the current draw for each setting is listed in Table 3. For 2-wire horn/strobe products (P2 series), current draws are listed in Tables 4 and 5. The sound output measurement for each horn setting is shown in Table 6. TabLe 3. Horn CurrenT draW ( ) For H, p4 & pC4 SerieS: Pos Sound Pattern dA Out 8–17.5 Volts 16–33 Volts DC FWR DC FWR 1 Temporal High 57 55 69 75 2 Temporal Medium 44 49 58 69 3 Temporal Low 38 44 44 48 4 Non-temporal High 57 56 69 75 5 Non-temporal Medium 42 50 60 69 6 Non-temporal Low 41 44 50 50 7 Coded High 57 55 69 75 8 Coded Medium 44 51 56 69 9 Coded Low 40 46 52 50 NOTE: In positions 7, 8, and 9, temporal coding must be provided by the NAC. If the NAC voltage is held constant, the horn output will remain constantly on. Positions 7, 8, and 9 are not available on 2-wire horn/strobe products. ma ma TabLe 4. 2-Wire Horn/STrobe CurrenT draW ( ) For p2 and pC2 STandard CandeLa SerieS: DC Input 8–17.5 Volts 16–33 Volts 15 cd 15/75 cd 15 cd 15/75 cd 30 cd 75 cd 95 cd 110 cd 115 cd Temporal High 137 147 79 90 107 176 194 212 218 Temporal Medium 132 144 69 80 97 157 182 201 210 Temporal Low 132 143 66 77 93 154 179 198 207 Non-temporal High 141 152 91 100 116 176 201 221 229 Non-temporal Medium 133 145 75 85 102 163 187 207 216 Non-temporal Low 131 144 68 79 96 156 182 201 210 FWR Input Temporal High 136 155 88 97 112 168 190 210 218 Temporal Medium 129 152 78 88 103 160 184 202 206 Temporal Low 129 151 76 86 101 160 184 194 201 Non-temporal High 142 161 103 112 126 181 203 221 229 Non-temporal Medium 134 155 85 95 110 166 189 208 216 Non-temporal Low 132 154 80 90 105 161 184 202 211 TabLe 5. 2-Wire Horn/STrobe CurrenT draW ( ) For p2 and pC2 HigH CandeLa range SerieS: Sound Pattern 16–33 Volts Volts DC 16–33 Volts Volts FWR 135 cd 150 cd 177 cd 185 cd 135 cd 150 cd 177 cd 185 cd Temporal High 245 259 290 297 215 231 258 265 Temporal Medium 235 253 288 297 209 224 250 258 Temporal Low 232 251 282 292 207 221 248 256 Non-temporal High 255 270 303 309 233 248 275 281 Non-temporal Medium 242 259 293 299 219 232 262 267 Non-temporal Low 238 254 291 295 214 229 256 262 TabLe 6. Horn ouTpuT ( ba) in uL reverberanT room: Switch Position Sound Pattern dA 8–17.5 Volts**16–33 Volts**24 V Nominal Measurements Reverberant Anechoic DC FWR DC FWR DC FWR DC FWR 1 Temporal High 78 78 84 84 88 88 99 98 2 Temporal Medium 75 75 80 80 86 85 96 96 3 Temporal Low 71 71 76 76 81 79 94 89 4 Non-temporal High 82 82 88 88 93 92 100 100 5 Non-temporal Medium 78 78 85 85 90 89 98 98 6 Non-temporal Low 75 75 81 81 86 84 96 92 7*Coded High 82 82 88 88 93 92 101 101 8*Coded Medium 78 78 85 85 90 89 97 98 9*Coded Low 74 75 81 81 85 83 96 92 *Horn & 4-wire Horn/Strobe only. ** Minimum dB rating for Operational Voltage Range as per UL 464. k SerieS mounTing 1. K Series products may be used indoors or outdoors. They must be in- stalled using the proper SpectrAlert Advance weatherproof back box (SA- WBB, SA-WBBW, SA-WBBC or SA-WBBCW). Do not attempt to use boxes other than the ones supplied with the product. 2. The wall mount box (SA-WBB or SA-WBBW) must be mounted with its internal post in the lower left corner, as shown in Figure 8. 3. Threaded holes are provided in the sides of the box for ¾-inch conduit adapters. Knockout plugs in the back of the box can be used for ¾-inch rear entry. Unused holes must be sealed. Plugs and O-Rings are provided with the box for this purpose. 4. It is the responsibility of the installer to make sure that all openings and connections are sealed properly. Outdoor installations that are protected from direct exposure to rain are still subject to condensation or leakage through hidden areas, such as a soffit. 5. Water may pool on the back box due to condensation or direct exposure to rain or snow. Use watertight fittings for all wiring connections, includ- ing the knockout plugs on the back of the box. When using plastic plugs to fill unused threaded holes, apply teflon tape and/or silicone sealant to reduce the chance of leakage. 6. Attach the mounting plate to the weatherproof back box using the four unpainted screws. 7. Follow steps 2 – 6 of the indoor mounting instructions to wire and attach the product. mounTing indoor WaLL or CeiLing produCTS 1. Attach mounting plate to junction box as shown in Figures 4 and 5. The mounting plate is compatible with 4-inch square, double gang, and 4-inch octagon junction boxes (2-wire products may be used with a single gang box). If using a back box skirt, attach the mounting plate to the skirt and then attach the entire assembly to the junction box (see Figures 6 and 7). 2. Connect field wiring to terminals, as shown in Figures 1 and 2. 3. If the product is not to be installed at this point, use the paint cover to prevent contamination of the mounting plate. (For indoor models only) 4. To attach product to mounting plate, remove the paint cover, then hook tabs on the product housing into the grooves on mounting plate. 5. Then, swing product into position to engage the pins on the product with the terminals on the mounting plate. Make sure that the tabs on the back of the product housing fully engage with the mounting plate. 6. Secure product by tightening the single mounting screw in the front of the product housing. For tamper resistance, the standard captivated mounting screw may be replaced with the enclosed Torx screw. ma d ma D690-03-00 3 I56-2769-015R D690-03-00 4 I56-2769-015R ©2010 System Sensor The horn and/or strobe will not work without power. The horn/strobe gets its power from the fire/security panel monitoring the alarm system. If power is cut off for any reason, the horn/strobe will not provide the desired audio or visual warning. The horn may not be heard. The loudness of the horn meets (or exceeds) current Underwriters Laboratories’ standards. However, the horn may not alert a sound sleeper or one who has recently used drugs or has been drinking alcoholic bever- ages. The horn may not be heard if it is placed on a different floor from the person in hazard or if placed too far away to be heard over the ambient noise such as traffic, air conditioners, machinery or music appliances that may prevent alert persons from hearing the alarm. The horn may not be heard by persons who are hearing impaired. NOTE: Strobes must be powered continuously for horn operation. The signal strobe may not be seen. The electronic visual warning signal uses an extremely reliable xenon flash tube. It flashes at least once every second. The strobe must not be in- stalled in direct sunlight or areas of high light intensity (over 60 foot candles) where the visual flash might be disregarded or not seen. The strobe may not be seen by the visually impaired. The signal strobe may cause seizures. Individuals who have positive photoic response to visual stimuli with seizures, such as persons with epilepsy, should avoid prolonged exposure to environments in which strobe signals, including this strobe, are activated. The signal strobe cannot operate from coded power supplies. Coded power supplies produce interrupted power. The strobe must have an uninterrupted source of power in order to operate correctly. System Sensor recommends that the horn and signal strobe always be used in combination so that the risks from any of the above limitations are minimized. WARNING The Limitations of Horn/Strobes Three-Year Limited Warranty System Sensor warrants its enclosed product to be free from defects in ma- terials and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of three years from date of manufacture. System Sensor makes no other express war- ranty for this product. No agent, representative, dealer, or employee of the Company has the authority to increase or alter the obligations or limitations of this Warranty. The Company’s obligation of this Warranty shall be limited to the replacement of any part of the product which is found to be defective in materials or workmanship under normal use and service during the three year period commencing with the date of manufacture. After phoning System Sensor’s toll free number 800-SENSOR2 (736-7672) for a Return Authorization number, send defective units postage prepaid to: System Sensor, Returns Department, RA #__________, 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, IL 60174. Please include a note describing the malfunction and suspected cause of failure. The Company shall not be obligated to replace units which are found to be defective because of damage, unreasonable use, modifications, or alterations occurring after the date of manufacture. In no case shall the Company be liable for any consequential or incidental damages for breach of this or any other Warranty, expressed or implied whatsoever, even if the loss or damage is caused by the Company’s negligence or fault. Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you. This Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state. FCC Statement SpectrAlert Strobes and Horn/Strobes have been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. Please refer to insert for the Limitations of Fire Alarm Systems Figure 4. WaLL mounT produCT : A0348-00 Figure 5. CeiLing mounT produCT : A0369-00 Figure 6. WaLL mounT produCT WiTH baCk box SkirT : A0349-00 4-wire mounting plate 2-wire mounting plate Figure 7: CeiLing mounT produCT WiTH baCk box SkirT : A0370-00 Figure 8. WaLL mounT Horn/STrobe WiTH WeaTHerprooF baCkbox: Figure 9. WaLL and CeiLing mounT WeaTHerprooF baCkboxeS: NOTE: Wall and Ceiling models may be used interchangeably (wall products may be used on the ceiling and ceiling products may be used on the wall). NOTE: Use all four mounting plate screws when installing outdoor units. A0418-00 A0417-00 RTS-451REMOTE TESTSTATION2 #16AWGMS-7AF ADDRESSABLEPULL STATION4312+-ADDRESSABLE SWITCHESLOCATED INSIDE COVER OFUNIT2 #16AWGAOM-2RF ADDRESSABLERELAY MODULEFORM "C" RELAY RATED AT2 A @ 30 VDC,.5 A @ 120 VAC RELAY WILL BE POWEREDALL THE TIME. WIRE RELAYOUTPUT ACCORDINGLY.2 #12AWG2 #12AWGTHE MR-101C/R RELAYS CONTACTS ARE LABELED IN THEIRNON-ENERGIZED STATE. THE RELAYS ARE SHOWN WIRED SO THATTHEY WILL IN FACT BE ENERGIZED AT ALL TIMES AS NOTED.THIS BEING THE CASE, THE ACTUAL CONTACTS WILL FUNCTIONOPOSITE OF THEIR LABELED STATE ENGERGIZED.ACTUAL ENGERGIZED STATE =MR-101C/R RELAY3 #16AWGJUMPER MUST BEINSTALLED BETWEENTERMINALS 2 & 5M/N DNRTYPICAL FAN SHUT DOWN CIRCUITWIRING2 #16AWGB210LP DETECTOR BASED USED WITH ASD-PL2F SMOKEAND ATD-L2F HEAT DETECTOR HEADSGENERAL NOTES;1. SHIELDED CABLE SHALL NOT BE USED ON ANY CIRCUITS AS ITRELATES TO THIS FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM.2. ALL FIRE ALARM CABLING MUST BE INSTALLED A MINIMUM OF1' FROM ALL OTHER HIGH VOLTAGE, LOW VOLTAGE, & TELECOMCABLING AND A MINIMUJM OF 3' FROM ANY BUILDING LIGHTINGBALLASTS.3. A TYPICAL SLC INITIATING CIRCUIT MAY HAVE UP TOO 99SENSOR STYLE DEVICES (SMOKE/HEATS/DUCT DETECTORS) AND98 MODULE STYLE DEVICES (PULL STAITONS, MODULES,CONTROL & INPUT MODULES).4. PRIOR TO ADDRESSING ANY DEVICES, THE ELECTRICALCONTRACTOR SHALL MAKE ARRANGEMENTS FOR AN ON SITEVISITATION WITH WFS PERSONNEL TO REVIEW SYSTEMCAPACITIES AND DEVICE ADDRESSING PROCEDURES.5. POLARITY MUST BE OBSERVED ON ALL CIRCUITS.6. ALL COORDINATION WITH CORNELL UNIVERSITY EH & S FORTHE PURPOSE OF FINAL TESTING AND ARRANGEMENTS FOR SHUTDOWNS SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE ELECTRICALCONTRACTOR.7. THE E.C. SHALL SELECT THE APPROPRIATE STROBE CANDELASETTING AS INDICATED FOR ALL AUDIO/VISUAL APPLIANCES PRIOR TOINSTALLATION.24VDC POWER FROMCLOSEST EXISTINGNAC/BOOSTER PANEL ORFACPFP1FP1FA111/22/13NTSTRMTRMT.R.MCGEESCHULER-HAAS ELECTRIC CORNELL UNIVERSITY SIBLEY HALL THIRD FLOOR EAST RENOVATIONS ITHACA, NEW YORK 14850GFCI FIRE ALARM DEVICE WIRING DETAILS SUBMITTAL COVER (Attach to each submitted) 300 State Street, Suite 201, Rochester, NY 14614 Contractor’s Submittal No. 211313-008 Phone 585.454.6110 Fax 585.454.3066 A/E Submittal No. www.labellapc.com Contractor: Address: Phone / E-Mail: (585) 271-5256 / pike@pikeco.com Type of Submittal (check one) Product Data Color Selection O&M Manual Date of Submittal: 04/03/2014 Shop Drawings Sample Record Document Resubmitted: Substitution Yes No Product Identification Contractor Approval Specification Section No.: Identify that this submittal has been Contract Dwg. No.: approved by the Contractor in Product Name: accordance with the General Conditions Part/Paragraph: Manufacturer: By: Date: Contractor Comments: (A/E Use Only) Architect / Engineer Comments: Reviewed Revise and Resubmit Rejected Furnish as Noted Corrections or comments made on the shop drawings during this review do not relieve the contractor from compliance with requirements of the drawings and specifications. This check is only for review of general conformance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. The contractor is responsible for confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions; selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction; coordinating his work with that of all other trades; and performing his work in a safe and satisfactory manner. LaBella Associates, P.C. By: Caren Rubin Date: 04/23/2014 The PIKE Company, Inc. One Circle Street Rochester, NY 14607 1. At East and West Bays: Contractor to coordinate sprinkler with lighting layout and mechanical diffuser layout to achieve alignments with fixtures and equipment as noted on 6/FP-1 and architectural drawings. Please note that “on site” dimensions off of structure lines “E” and “C” are different at east and west bays. Locations have been set for light fixtures and approved by Architect. Sprinkler layout to follow outside dimensions of lights at 8’-0” at north and south runs. 2. At Middle Bay (between structure lines “5” and “7”): Contractor to coordinate sprinkler layout with mechanical, electrical, drop down ladder and dropped mesh ceiling layout and alignments as per architectural drawings. Cornell University East Sibley Hall, Third Floor LaBella Project #213072 The PIKE Company SUBMITTAL COVER BY THIS SUBMITTAL HAS BEEN REVIEWED ARCHITECT'S STAMP WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE PIKE COMPANY AS COMPLYING BY: _____________________ DATE: RECEIVED STAMPS 4/3/2014 PIKE JOB NO:13897 PROJECT NO: 4/3/2014DATE:Pike Submittal No: 211313-008 General Contracting The Pike Company, Inc. Construction Management One Circle Street, Rochester, NY 14607 Phone: (585) 271-5256 / 800 264 PIKE / Fax: (585) 271-3101Specialty Contracting Facility Service E-mail: pike@pikeco.com / Online: www.pikeco.com Program Management DESCRIPTION OF SUBMITTAL: REFERENCES:Spec. Section:Review Cycle No.:211313 Remarks: Sprinkelr Shop Drawings Wet Pipe Sprinkler SystemsSUBMITTAL NAME: Drawings:Supplier: Albany - Phone: (518) 371-5900 Pike Branch Offices: Hartford, CT - Phone: (860) 251-8000 TYPE OF SUBMITTAL:Product Data & Shop Drawing 003 Davis-Ulmer Fire Protection PROJECT NAME:Sibley Hall OWNER: ARCHITECT:The Pike Company, Inc. Norm Rockefeller ®Expedition form sb_20b SUBMITTAL COVER (Attach to each submitted) 300 State Street, Suite 201, Rochester, NY 14614 Contractor’s Submittal No. 211313-007 Phone 585.454.6110 Fax 585.454.3066 A/E Submittal No. 211313-007 www.labellapc.com Contractor: Address: Phone / E-Mail: (585) 271-5256 / pike@pikeco.com Type of Submittal (check one) Product Data Color Selection O&M Manual Date of Submittal: 12/16/2013 Shop Drawings Sample Record Document Resubmitted: Substitution Yes No Product Identification Contractor Approval Specification Section No.: Identify that this submittal has been Contract Dwg. No.: approved by the Contractor in Product Name: accordance with the General Conditions Part/Paragraph: Manufacturer: By: Date: Contractor Comments: (A/E Use Only) Architect / Engineer Comments: Reviewed Revise and Resubmit Rejected Furnish as Noted Corrections or comments made on the shop drawings during this review do not relieve the contractor from compliance with requirements of the drawings and specifications. This check is only for review of general conformance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. The contractor is responsible for confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions; selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction; coordinating his work with that of all other trades; and performing his work in a safe and satisfactory manner. LaBella Associates, P.C. By: Caren Rubin Date: 12/17/2013 The PIKE Company, Inc. One Circle Street Rochester, NY 14607 1. All pipe rings, hangers, clamps and rods shall have galvanized finish. Cornell University East Sibley Hall, Third Floor LaBella Project #213072 The PIKE Company SUBMITTAL COVER BY THIS SUBMITTAL HAS BEEN REVIEWED ARCHITECT'S STAMP WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE PIKE COMPANY AS COMPLYING BY: _____________________ DATE: RECEIVED STAMPS 12/16/2013 PIKE JOB NO:13897 PROJECT NO: 12/16/2013DATE:Pike Submittal No: 211313-007 General Contracting The Pike Company, Inc. Construction Management One Circle Street, Rochester, NY 14607 Phone: (585) 271-5256 / 800 264 PIKE / Fax: (585) 271-3101Specialty Contracting Facility Service E-mail: pike@pikeco.com / Online: www.pikeco.com Program Management DESCRIPTION OF SUBMITTAL: REFERENCES:Spec. Section:Review Cycle No.:211313 Remarks: Pipe Rings, Hangers, Clamps and Rods Wet Pipe Sprinkler SystemsSUBMITTAL NAME: Drawings:Supplier: Albany - Phone: (518) 371-5900 Pike Branch Offices: Hartford, CT - Phone: (860) 251-8000 TYPE OF SUBMITTAL:Product Data 001 Davis-Ulmer Fire Protection PROJECT NAME:Sibley Hall OWNER: ARCHITECT:The Pike Company, Inc. Norm Rockefeller ®Expedition form sb_20b PH-11.11 PROJECT INFORMATION APPROVAL STAMP Project:q Approved Address:q Approved as noted Contractor:q Not approved Engineer:Remarks: Submittal Date: Notes 1: Notes 2: PIPE RINGS Fig. 69 Adjustable Swivel Ring, Tapped Per NFPA Standards Size Range: 1⁄2" through 8" Material: Carbon steel Finish: Galvanized Service: Recommended for suspension of non-insulated stationary pipe line. Maximum Temperature: 650° F Approvals: Complies with Federal Specification A-A-1192A (Type 10), WW-H-171-E (Type 10), ANSI/MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-58 (Type 10). UL Listed and FM Approved (Sizes 3⁄4" - 8"). Features: • Threads are countersunk so that they cannot become burred or damaged. • Knurled swivel nut provides vertical adjustment after piping is in place. • Captured swivel nut in the 1⁄2" through 6" sizes. The capture is permanent in the bottom portion of the band, allowing the hanger to be opened during installation if desired, but not allowing the nut to fall completely out. Ordering: Specify size, figure number and name. Note: The acceptability of galvanized coatings at temperatures above 450°F is at the discretion of the end user. Metric nut available upon request. Non-captured nut also available upon request. Fig. 69: LOAdS (LbS) • WeighT (LbS) • diMeNSiONS (iN) Pipe Size Max Load Weight Rod Size A B C F G Width 1⁄2 300 0.10 3⁄8 27⁄8 2 19⁄16 5/8 3⁄4 0.10 23⁄4 17⁄8 15⁄16 1 0.10 29⁄16 111⁄16 1 11⁄4 0.10 25⁄8 13⁄4 7⁄811⁄2 0.10 23⁄4 17⁄8 2 0.11 31⁄4 23⁄8 11⁄8 21⁄2 525 0.20 4 23⁄4 15⁄16 3/4 3 0.20 313⁄16 215⁄16 13⁄16 4 650 0.30 411⁄16 313⁄16 19⁄165 1,000 0.54 1⁄2 55⁄16 43⁄8 6 0.65 611⁄16 59⁄16 21⁄4 8 1.00 8 7 211⁄16 1 Note: Reflects changes in rod diameter from previously published data per recent revisions in MSS-SP-58 & 69 A BCF CL G B CF A CL F G 11/4" through 8" pipe 1/2" through 1" pipe PROJECT INFORMATION APPROVAL STAMP Project: Approved Address: Approved as noted Contractor: Not approved Engineer:Remarks: Submittal Date: Notes 1: Notes 2: Catalog PH-2008 Fig. 260 Adjustable Clevis Hanger J`q\IXe^\1(Ð)k_ifl^_*' DXk\i`Xc1:XiYfejk\\c =`e`j_1 GcX`efi >XcmXe`q\[#XcjfXmX`cXYc\ gcXjk`Zfi \gfopZfXk\[ J\im`Z\1I\Zfdd\e[\[]fik_\jljg\ej`fef]jkXk`feXipg`g\c`e\j% DXo`dldK\dg\iXkli\1GcX`e-,'=#>XcmXe`q\[Xe[<gfop+,'= 8ggifmXcj1:fdgc`\jn`k_=\[\iXcJg\Z`ÔZXk`fe8$8$((0)8 Kpg\( #NN$?$(.($< Kpg\( # 8EJ@&DJJJG$-0Xe[DJJJG$,/ Kpg\( %LC#LC:C`jk\[Xe[=D8ggifm\[ J`q\j*Ð+k_ifl^_/ % @ejkXccXk`fe1?Xe^\icfX[elkXYfm\Zc\m`jdljkY\k`^_k\e\[j\Zli\cpkfXjjli\gifg\i _Xe^\ig\i]fidXeZ\% 8[aljkd\ek1M\ik`ZXcX[aljkd\ekn`k_flki\dfm`e^g`g\dXpY\dX[\]ifd*Ð/k_ifl^_,(Ð/# mXip`e^n`k_k_\j`q\f]Zc\m`j%K`^_k\elgg\ielkX]k\iX[aljkd\ek% =\Xkli\j1 ;\j`^e_Xjpfb\feflkj`[\f]cfn\iL$jkiXgjfpfb\ZXeefkjc`[\kfnXi[Z\ek\if]Yfck#k_ljY\e[`e^f]Yfck`jd`e`d`q\[% J`q\j,Xe[lg_Xm\if[Xe[knfelkj`ejk\X[f]YfckXe[elk2k_i\X[c\e^k_feZc\m`jif[`jjlZ_k_Xkk_\k_i\X[cfZbjk_\elkj `egcXZ\#Xe[k_i\X[jXi\efk`ej_\XigcXe\% Fi[\i`e^1Jg\Z`]pg`g\j`q\#Ô^li\ eldY\i#eXd\Xe[Ôe`j_% Efk\j1GleZ_\[]fid`e^_fc\jdXpY\ gi\j\ekfeZ\ikX`ej`q\jf]k_`jZc\m`j _Xe^\i%K_\j\_fc\jXi\jfc\cp]fik_\ gligfj\f]dXel]XZkli`e^#Xe[[fefk \]]\Zkk_\jkilZkliXc`ek\^i`kpficfX[ ZXiip`e^ZXgXZ`k`\jf]k_\j\_Xe^\ij%=fi `ejlcXk\[c`e\fgk`fejn`k_flkj_`\c[j# j\\=`^li\j)-'@JJXe[=`^li\*''%=fi `ejlcXk\[c`e\fgk`fejn`k_j_`\c[j#j\\ =`^li\j(-.Xe[(-/%=fi[lZk`c\`ifeg`g\ j`q\j#j\\=`^li\,0'% :Xlk`fe1N_\eXefm\ij`q\Zc\m`j`jlj\[# Xg`g\jgXZ\ifidlck`jgXZ\ij_flc[Y\ gcXZ\[fm\iZc\m`jYfckkf\ejli\k_Xkk_\ cfn\iL$jkiXgn`ccefkdfm\`efek_\Yfck% =@>%)-'1CF8;J C9J N<@>?KJ C9J ;@D<EJ@FEJ @E Pipe Size Max Load Span Ft.Weight Rod Size A B C Rod Take Out E Adjust. F G 1⁄2 610 7* 0.34 3⁄8 23⁄16 211⁄16 11⁄2 5⁄8 1⁄4 3⁄4 0.34 2 1 5⁄16 1 730 0.35 2 5⁄16 3 1 5⁄8 11⁄4 0.40 2 3⁄8 31⁄4 111⁄16 11⁄2 9* 0.45 2 13⁄16 313⁄16 21⁄8 7⁄8 2 10* 0.50 3 5⁄16 41⁄2 25⁄8 11⁄8 21⁄2 1,350 11* 0.65 1⁄2 41⁄16 51⁄2 33⁄16 15⁄16 3⁄83 12* 0.85 4 3⁄4 61⁄2 41⁄16 15⁄8 31⁄2 13* 1.10 5 1⁄16 71⁄16 43⁄16 113⁄16 4 1,430 14* 1.51 5⁄8 59⁄16 713⁄16 41⁄2 111⁄16 3⁄85 16* 1.70 6 9⁄16 815⁄16 51⁄2 115⁄16 6 1,940 17* 3.10 3⁄4 615⁄16 101⁄4 53⁄4 111⁄16 1⁄28 2,000 19* 4.75 8 3⁄8 1211⁄16 73⁄16 2 10 3,600 22* 8.60 7⁄8 97⁄8 151⁄4 87⁄16 21⁄8 5⁄812 3,800 23* 11.20 11 9⁄16 1715⁄16 101⁄8 213⁄16 14 4,200 25* 12.50 1 129⁄16 199⁄16 1011⁄16 211⁄16 3⁄4 16 4,600 27 19.85 14 22 12 2 3⁄4 118 4,800 28 22.25 15 15⁄16 2415⁄16 1315⁄16 313⁄16 20 4,800 30 40.33 11⁄4 179⁄16 279⁄16 153⁄16 37⁄8 11⁄424 4,800 32 49.83 19 13⁄16 3113⁄16 175⁄16 30 6,000 33 70.18 24 3⁄16 393⁄16 219⁄16 51⁄8 “Span” represents the maximum recommended distance between hangers on a continuous and straight run of horizontal standard weight steel pipe filled with water. In all cases, verify that chosen location of hangers does not subject hangers to a load greater than the maximum recommended load shown above. *Indicates that span represents the maximum span for water filled pipe as given in Table 1 of page 201. A C B G E F CL A C B G E F CL G`g\J`q\(&)kf*&+ G`g\J`q\j( Xe[CXi^\i CLEVIS HANGERS PH-11.11 PROJECT INFORMATION APPROVAL STAMP Project:q Approved Address:q Approved as noted Contractor:q Not approved Engineer:Remarks: Submittal Date: Notes 1: Notes 2: STEEL PIPE CLAMPS Fig. 261 Extension Pipe or Riser Clamp Size Range: 3⁄4" through 24" Material: Carbon steel Finish: q Plain, q Galvanized or q Epoxy coated Service: For support of stationary steel pipe risers, cast iron pipe or conduit. This product is not intended for use with hanger rods. For this application refer to Fig. 40 Riser Clamp, page 43. Maximum Temperature: Plain 650° F, Galvanized and Epoxy 450° F Approvals: Complies with Federal Specification A-A-1192A (Type 8) WW-H-171-E (Type 8), ANSI/MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-58 (Type 8). UL, ULC Listed (Sizes 1 1⁄2" - 8"). Installation: Clamp is fitted and bolted preferably below a coupling, hub or welded lugs on steel pipe. Bolt torques should be per industry standards (see page 233). Clamp is designed for standard steel pipe O.D. and this must be considered in sizing the riser for other types of piping. Ordering: Specify pipe size, figure number, name and finish. FIg. 261: LOAdS (LbS) • WeIghT (LbS) • dIMenSIOnS (In) • TORQUe (FT-LbS) Pipe Size Max Load Weight L G Width B C Bolt Diameter Torque Values 3⁄4 220 1.1 87⁄8 1 27⁄8 3⁄8 3⁄8 2111.1 31⁄8 11⁄4 250 1.6 10 31⁄2 11⁄2 1.6 101⁄4 37⁄8 2 300 1.7 41⁄4 1⁄2 7⁄16 3221⁄2 400 1.9 11 1⁄4 43⁄4 3 500 1.9 11 3⁄8 51⁄2 31⁄2 600 2.3 127⁄8 61⁄2 1⁄2 1⁄2 4647502.4 7 5 1,500 3.6 13 3⁄4 11⁄2 8 6 1,600 4.0 14 3⁄4 9 8 2,500 7.6 18 1⁄2 12 5⁄8 5⁄8 1001011.1 20 1⁄4 2 133⁄4 12 2,700 16.5 22 3⁄4 153⁄4 14 17.7 24 171⁄4 16 2,900 30.4 26 21⁄2 193⁄4 3⁄4 3⁄4 1501833.8 28 213⁄4 20 35.0 30 233⁄4 24 3,200 82.0 36 3⁄4 3 30 1 7⁄8 190 L B C G CL note: Refer to Technical Data Section for cast iron soil pipe data. PH-11.11 PROJECT INFORMATION APPROVAL STAMP Project:q Approved Address:q Approved as noted Contractor:q Not approved Engineer:Remarks: Submittal Date: Notes 1: Notes 2: PIPE RINGS Fig. 138R (Rod Threaded) Extension Split Pipe Clamp Size Range: 3⁄8" through 3" Material: Malleable iron Finish: q Plain or q Galvanized Service: Recommended for non-insulated stationary pipe lines. Maximum Temperature: 450° F Approvals: Complies with Federal Specification A-A-1192A (Type 12) WW-H-171-E (Type 25), ANSI/MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-58 (Type 12). Features: • Rapid installation assured by hinged design and single closure screw. • When used with nipple this clamp is particularly adaptive for use on refrigeration or compressor piping subject to vibration. • Interior design provides firm grip on pipe. • Inside of ring tapered to prevent entrapment of condensed moisture. Ordering: Specify pipe size, figure number, name and finish. Fig. 138R: LOAdS (LbS) • WeighT (LbS) • diMenSiOnS (in) Pipe Size Max Load Weight Rod Size A B 3⁄8 180 0.10 3⁄8 13⁄16 1⁄2 0.13 7⁄8 3⁄4 0.14 1 1 0.16 11⁄8 11⁄4 0.22 15⁄16 11⁄2 0.24 17⁄16 2 0.31 111⁄16 21⁄2 300 0.60 1⁄2 21⁄8 3 0.74 27⁄16 B A CL PH-11.11 PROJECT INFORMATION APPROVAL STAMP Project:q Approved Address:q Approved as noted Contractor:q Not approved Engineer:Remarks: Submittal Date: Notes 1: Notes 2: BEAM CLAMPS Fig. 92 Universal C-type Clamp (Standard Throat) Size Range: 3⁄8" and 1⁄2" Material: Ductile iron, hardened steel cup point set screw and locknut. Finish: q Plain or q Galvanized Service: Recommended for use under roof installations with bar joist type construction, or for attachment to the top or bottom flange of structural shapes where the vertical hanger rod is required to be offset from the edge of the flange and where the thickness of joist or flange does not exceed 3⁄4". Approvals: Complies with Federal Specification A-A-1192A (Type 19 & 23) WW-H-171-E (Type 23), ANSI/MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-58 (Type 19 & 23). UL, ULC Listed and FM Approved. How to size: Size of clamp is determined by size of rod to be used. Installation: Follow recommended set screw torque values per MSS-SP-69 (See table on page 233) Features: • They may be attached to horizontal flanges of structural members in either the top beam or bottom beam positions. • Secured in place by a cup-pointed Set Screw tightened against the flange. A Jam Nut is provided for tightening the Set Screw against the Body Casting. • Thru tapping of the body casting permits extended adjustment of the threaded rod. • Can be used with Fig 89X retaining clip for seismic applications. Ordering: Specify rod size, figure number, name of clamp and finish. FIg. 92: LOAd (LbS) • WeIgHt (LbS) • dIMenSIOnS (In) • tORQUe (In-LbS) Rod Size A Set Screw Size Torque Value Max Loads n Weight C D E F G HTopBottom 3⁄8 3⁄8 60 500 250 0.34 15⁄16 19⁄16 9⁄16 13⁄16 3⁄8 1⁄2 1⁄2 1⁄2 125 950 760 0.63 13⁄8 113⁄16 1⁄2 11⁄16 7⁄16 23⁄32 n Maximum temperature of 450° F F D AT LEAST ONE FULL THREAD OF ROD MUST BE EXPOSED H C E G 3⁄4" JAM - NUT SET SCREW 1" BODY CASTING A PH-11.11 PROJECT INFORMATION APPROVAL STAMP Project:q Approved Address:q Approved as noted Contractor:q Not approved Engineer:Remarks: Submittal Date: Notes 1: Notes 2: HANGER RODS Fig. 146 Continuous Threaded Rod Size Range: 1⁄4" through 1 1⁄2" Stocked in six, ten, and twelve foot lengths. Other even foot lengths can be furnished to order. Material: Carbon steel or Stainless Steel Gr 304 Threads: National Coarse (USS), rod threaded complete length. Finish: q Plain or q Galvanized. Maximum Temperature: 650° F. Ordering: Specify rod diameter and length, figure number, name and finish. Note: The acceptability of galvanized coatings at temperatures above 450°F is at the discretion of the end user. Fig. 146: LOadS (LbS) • WeighTS (LbS) • diMeNSiONS (iN) Rod Size A Threads per Inch Max Load Weight per Ft.650˚ F 1⁄4 20 240 0.12 3⁄8 16 730 0.30 1⁄2 13 1,350 0.53 5⁄8 11 2,160 0.84 3⁄4 10 3,230 1.20 7⁄8 9 4,480 1.70 1 8 5,900 2.30 11⁄4 7 9,500 3.60 11⁄2 6 13,800 5.10 Note: Other rod sizes available upon request. Class 2 fit is available upon request. A Length 0HFKDQLFDO$QFKRULQJ6\VWHPV +',DQG+',/'URSLQ$QFKRU +LOWL,QF 86 _ZZZXVKLOWLFRP,HQHVSDx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·VUHFRPPHQGDWLRQV 0DWHULDO6SHFLILFDWLRQV +',/+',//µ/µ/µDQG+',/µDQG/µDUHPDQXIDFWXUHGIURPPLOG FDUERQVWHHOZKLFKLVSODWHGZLWKD]LQFILQLVKIRUFRUURVLRQSURWHFWLRQLQ DFFRUGDQFHZLWK$670%6&7\SH,,, +',6WDLQOHVV6WHHOPDWHULDOPHHWVWKHUHTXLUHPHQWVRI$,6, 3URGXFW'HVFULSWLRQ &RPELQHG6KHDUDQG7HQVLRQ/RDGLQJ N G/VG/ N UHFVUHF() () 5HI6HFWLRQ 7HFKQLFDO'DWD 7DEOH+',+',/6SHFLÀFDWLRQ7DEOH $QFKRU6L]H 'HWDLOV +',+',/ +', LQ PP GELW QRPLQDOELWGLDPHWHU LQ KQRP VWGGHSWKRIHPEHGPHQW ɤ DQFKRUOHQJWK K KROHGHSWK LQ PP ɤWK XVHDEOHWKUHDGOHQJWK LQ PP WKUHDGVSHULQFK KPLQEDVHPDWHULDOWKLFNQHVV LQ PP 7LQVW LQVWDOODWLRQWRUTXH IWOE 1P /LVWLQJV/$SSURYDOV )0 )DFWRU\0XWXDO 3LSH+DQJHU&RPSRQHQWVIRU$XWRPDWLF6SULQNOHU6\VWHPV /µ/µ +',DQG+',/ 8/ 8QGHUZULWHUV/DERUDWRULHV 8/3LSH+DQJHU(TXLSPHQWIRU)LUH3URWHFWLRQ6HUYLFHV /µ/µ 3URGXFW'HVFULSWLRQ 0DWHULDO6SHFLILFDWLRQV 7HFKQLFDO'DWD ,QVWDOODWLRQ,QVWUXFWLRQV 2UGHULQJ,QIRUPDWLRQ 0HFKDQLFDO$QFKRULQJ6\VWHPV +',DQG+',/'URSLQ$QFKRU +LOWL,QF 86 _ZZZXVKLOWLFRP,HQHVSDxRO ,+LOWL &DQDGD &RUS,ZZZKLOWLFD,$QFKRU)DVWHQLQJ7HFKQLFDO*XLGH 7DEOH&DUERQ6WHHO+',8OWLPDWH/RDGVLQ&RQFUHWH $QFKRU VL]H LQ PP SVL 03D SVL 03D SVL 03D 7HQVLRQ OE N1 6KHDU OE N1 7HQVLRQ OE N1 6KHDU OE N1 7HQVLRQ OE N1 6KHDU OE N1 +', +',/ +', +',/ +', +',/ +', +',/ +', +',/ +', +',/ ² ² ² ² ² ² ² ² ² ² ² ² 7KHXOWLPDWHVKHDUDQGDOORZDEOHVKHDUYDOXHVDUHEDVHGRQWKHXVHRI6$(*UDGHEROWV ¦\ NVL¦XOW NVL ZLWKWKHH[FHSWLRQRIWKH +',+',/LQ¦ F SVLFRQFUHWHZKLFKLVEDVHGXSRQWKHXVHRID6$(*UDGHEROW ¦\ NVL¦XOW NVL $OORZDEOHDQG8OWLPDWHWHQVLRQORDGVIRUWKH+',DUHDSSOLFDEOHWRWKH+',6 7DEOH&DUERQ6WHHO+',$OORZDEOH/RDGVLQ&RQFUHWH $QFKRU VL]H LQ PP SVL 03D SVL 03D SVL 03D 7HQVLRQ OE N1 6KHDU OE N1 7HQVLRQ OE N1 6KHDU OE N1 7HQVLRQ OE N1 6KHDU OE N1 +', +',/ +', +',/ +', +',/ +', +',/ +', +',/ +', +',/ ² ² ² ² ² ² ² ² ² ² ² ² 7KHXOWLPDWHVKHDUDQGDOORZDEOHVKHDUYDOXHVDUHEDVHGRQWKHXVHRI6$(*UDGHEROWV ¦\ NVL¦XOW NVL ZLWKWKHH[FHSWLRQRIWKH +',+',/LQ¦ F SVLFRQFUHWHZKLFKLVEDVHGXSRQWKHXVHRID6$(*UDGHEROW ¦\ NVL¦XOW NVL $OORZDEOHDQG8OWLPDWHWHQVLRQORDGVIRUWKH+',DUHDSSOLFDEOHWRWKH+',6 7DEOH&DUERQ6WHHO+',$OORZDEOH/RDGVLQ/LJKWZHLJKW&RQFUHWHDQG/LJKWZHLJKW&RQFUHWHRYHU0HWDO'HFN $QFKRU VL]H LQ PP $QFKRU,QVWDOOHG LQSVL 03D $QFKRU,QVWDOOHG 7KURXJK6WHHO'HFN8SSHU)OXWH $QFKRU,QVWDOOHG 7KURXJK6WHHO'HFN/RZHU)OXWH /W:W&RQFUHWH,QWRSVL 03D /W:W&RQFUHWH ,QWRSVL 03D /W:W&RQFUHWH 7HQVLRQOE N1 6KHDUOE N1 7HQVLRQOE N1 6KHDUOE N1 7HQVLRQOE N1 6KHDUOE N1 ² ² ² ²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² 66+',² 66+',² 66+',² 66+',² 1RWH 7KHXOWLPDWHDQGDOORZDEOHVKHDUYDOXHVDUHEDVHGRQWKHXVHRI7\SHEROWV 7DEOH6WDLQOHVV6WHHO+',8OWLPDWH/RDGVLQ&RQFUHWH $QFKRU 6L]H LQ PP SVL 03D SVL 03D 7HQVLRQOE N1 6KHDUOE N1 7HQVLRQOE N1 6KHDUOE N1 66+',² 66+',² 66+',² 66+',² 66+',² 0HFKDQLFDO$QFKRULQJ6\VWHPV +',DQG+',/'URSLQ$QFKRU +LOWL,QF 86 _ZZZXVKLOWLFRP,HQHVSDxRO ,+LOWL &DQDGD &RUS,ZZZKLOWLFD,$QFKRU)DVWHQLQJ7HFKQLFDO*XLGH ,QIOXHQFHRI$QFKRU6SDFLQJ DQG(GJH'LVWDQFH¦$¦5 $QFKRU6L]H KQRP LQ PP LQ PP KQRP VWDQGDUGHPEHGPHQWGHSWK $QFKRU6SDFLQJDQG(GJH'LVWDQFH*XLGHOLQHV 6HH$QFKRULQJ7HFKQRORJ\6HFWLRQ $QFKRU6SDFLQJ$GMXVWPHQW)DFWRUV V $FWXDO6SDFLQJ VPLQ KQRP VFU KQRP (GJH'LVWDQFH$GMXVWPHQW)DFWRUV F $FWXDOHGJHGLVWDQFH FPLQ KQRP FFU KQRP /RDG$GMXVWPHQW)DFWRUV $QFKRU6SDFLQJ ¦$/RDG$GMXVWPHQW)DFWRUV (GJH'LVGWDQFH ¦5 7HQVLRQ6KHDU/RDGV 7HQVLRQ¦51 6KHDU¦59 6SDFLQJV $QFKRU'LDPHWHU (GJH'LVWDQFHF $QFKRU'LDPHWHU $QFKRU'LDPHWHU LQ PP LQ PP V PLQ K QRPV FU K QRP ¦$ V² K QRP IRUV FU!V!V PLQ FPLQ K QRPFFU K QRP ¦51 F K QRP IRUFFU!F!FPLQ F PLQ K QRPF FU K QRP ¦59 F² K QRP IRUF FU!F!F PLQ 0HFKDQLFDO$QFKRULQJ6\VWHPV +',DQG+',/'URSLQ$QFKRU +LOWL,QF 86 _ZZZXVKLOWLFRP,HQHVSDxRO ,+LOWL &DQDGD &RUS,ZZZKLOWLFD,$QFKRU)DVWHQLQJ7HFKQLFDO*XLGH ,QVWDOODWLRQ,QVWUXFWLRQV $GMXVWGHSWKJDXJHVR WKDWDQFKRUZLOOEHIOXVK ZLWKWKHFRQFUHWHVXUIDFH ZKHQLQVWDOOHG +DPPHUGULOOKROH &OHDQKROH ,QVWDOODQFKRUXVLQJSURSHU VHWWLQJWRRO6HWWLQJWRRO WREHGULYHQLQWRDQFKRU XQWLOVHWWLQJWRROVKRXOGHU PHHWVWRSRIDQFKRU 2UGHULQJ,QIRUPDWLRQ +',$QFKRUV &DUERQ6WHHO $QFKRU7KUHDG6L]H 'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ 'HVFULSWLRQ %R[4W\ /µ +',/ +',// /µ +',/ +',// /µ +',/ +',//+',6 /µ +',/² /µ +',/² +',$QFKRUV 6WDLQOHVV6WHHO $QFKRU7KUHDG6L]H 'HVFULSWLRQ %R[4W\ /µ +',/ 66 /µ +',/ 66 /µ +',/ 66 /µ +',/ 66 /µ +',/ 66 6HWWLQJ7RROVIRU+',+',/DQG+',6 $QFKRU7KUHDG6L]H 'HVFULSWLRQ /µ +67/6HWWLQJ7RRO /µ +67/6HWWLQJ7RRO /µ +67/6HWWLQJ7RRO /µ +67/6HWWLQJ7RRO /µ +67/6HWWLQJ7RRO $QFKRU7KUHDG6L]H 'HVFULSWLRQ /µ +6'00/µ 7(&6'/µ6HWWLQJWRRO /µ +6'00/µ 7(&6'/µ6HWWLQJWRRO 8VHDXWRPDWLFVHWWLQJWRROVZLWK7(&VW\OH 6'6SOXV KDPPHUGULOOV 8 For the most up to date information, visit www.sammysuperscrew.com SAMMY X-PRESS®STEEL STEEL STEEL STEEL STEELApprovals Rod Size Part Number Model Description Ultimate Pullout (lbs) UL Test Load (lbs) FM Test Load (lbs) Min Thick Max Thick Box Qty Case Qty Application VERTICAL MOUNT 1/4" 8181922 XP 200 X-Press 200 1146 (22 ga) 185 (Luminaire) 250 (Luminaire) .027" .056”.125”25 125 Metal Deck 3/8" 8150922 XP 20 X-Press 20 1146 (22 ga) 850 (2½" Pipe) 185 (Luminaire) 250 (Luminaire) 283 (Conduit & Cable) 940 (2" Pipe) 1475 (4” Pipe) .027" .027” .056” .125” 25 125 Metal Deck 3/8" 8153922 XP 35 X-Press 35 1783 (16 ga) 1500 (4" Pipe) 85 (Luminaire) 250 (Luminaire) 416 (Conduit & Cable) 940 (2" Pipe) 1475 (4” Pipe) .060” .105” .027” .056” .125” 25 125 Purlin 3/8” 8294922 SXP 20 Swivel X-Press 20 1061 (22 ga Vertical) 829 (45° Off Vertical) 750 (2” Pipe) 170 vertical (Luminaire) 80 @ 45° (Luminaire) 283 vertical (Conduit & Cab 233 @ 45° (Conduit & Cabl 635 (2” Pipe) le) e) .027” .125” 25 125 Metal Deck 3/8" 8295922 SXP 35 Swivel X-Press 35 1675 (16 ga Vertical) 1558 (89° Off Vertical) 1500 (4" Pipe) 250 vertical (Luminaire) 80 @ 90° (Luminaire) 500 vertical (Conduit & Cab 333 @ 89° (Conduit & Cabl 635 (2" Pipe) le) e) .060".125” 25 125 Purlin 3/8" 8150922 XP 20 Sammy X-Press 20 1146 (22 ga) 850 (2½ Pipe) Pre-Pour Structural Concrete@ 3000 p Post-Pour Range II LWC 35 PCF (lbs/ si 25 ft³) 125 Metal Deck (Pre-Pour) Metal Deck (Post-Pour) HORIZONTAL MOUNT 3/8" 8293957 SWXP 35 Sidewinder X-Press 35 1798 (16 ga) 1250 (3½" Pipe) 80 (Luminaire) 416 (Conduit & Cable) .060”.125”25 125 Purlin Sammy X-Press® Part Number Model Description Each Qty 8194910 UXPIT* Universal X-Press It Tool 1 8195910 RXPIT Retro Socket for 8151910 1 8152910 XPDB 25/64" Drill Bit 1 Sammy X-Press It® INSTALLATION TOOL UXPIT for extreme or variant roof pitches Post-Pour Range II LWC 35 PCF (lbs/ ft³) Pre-Pour Structural Concrete @ 3000 psi Product Features • The Sammy X-Press expands to provide direct vertical attachment in: - Metal Deck (22-16 gauge) - Z-Purlin (18-16 gauge) • The Sammy X-Press Swivel allows you to hang plumb in extreme roof pitches: - 89° in Z-Purlin - 45° in metal deck for 12/12 pitch • The Sammy X-Press Sidewinder expands to provide horizontal attachment in: - 16 ga - 3/16” steel - purlin, tubular steel. • Installs in seconds, saving time & installation costs. • Use in applications where access to the back of the installed fastener is prohibited. ie. metal roof deck, tubular steel, or vapor barrier fabric. • Less jobsite material needed. • No retaining nut required. • Provides design flexibility. *Tool Includes: Sleeve, Bit Receiver, Hex Wrench, and 25/64” Drill Bit. To watch a video demonstration of the Sammy X-Press, visit http://www.sammysuperscrew.com/sammyxpress.htm (XP) (SXP) (SWXP) Patent Pending Patent No. 6,935,821 Patent Pending Patent Pending Installs into Metal Deck, Purlin, or Tubular Steel SUBMITTAL COVER (Attach to each submitted) 300 State Street, Suite 201, Rochester, NY 14614 Contractor’s Submittal No. 211313-006 Phone 585.454.6110 Fax 585.454.3066 A/E Submittal No. 211313-006 www.labellapc.com Contractor: Address: Phone / E-Mail: (585) 271-5256 / pike@pikeco.com Type of Submittal (check one) Product Data Color Selection O&M Manual Date of Submittal: 12/16/2013 Shop Drawings Sample Record Document Resubmitted: Substitution Yes No Product Identification Contractor Approval Specification Section No.: Identify that this submittal has been Contract Dwg. No.: approved by the Contractor in Product Name: accordance with the General Conditions Part/Paragraph: Manufacturer: By: Date: Contractor Comments: (A/E Use Only) Architect / Engineer Comments: Reviewed Revise and Resubmit Rejected Furnish as Noted Corrections or comments made on the shop drawings during this review do not relieve the contractor from compliance with requirements of the drawings and specifications. This check is only for review of general conformance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. The contractor is responsible for confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions; selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction; coordinating his work with that of all other trades; and performing his work in a safe and satisfactory manner. LaBella Associates, P.C. By: Caren Rubin Date: 12/17/2013 The PIKE Company, Inc. One Circle Street Rochester, NY 14607 1. Finish: White 2. Ordinary temperature rating 3. K factor = 5.6 4. Cover Plate: Plain Cornell University East Sibley Hall, Third Floor LaBella Project #213072 The PIKE Company SUBMITTAL COVER BY THIS SUBMITTAL HAS BEEN REVIEWED ARCHITECT'S STAMP WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE PIKE COMPANY AS COMPLYING BY: _____________________ DATE: RECEIVED STAMPS 12/16/2013 PIKE JOB NO:13897 PROJECT NO: 12/16/2013DATE:Pike Submittal No: 211313-006 General Contracting The Pike Company, Inc. Construction Management One Circle Street, Rochester, NY 14607 Phone: (585) 271-5256 / 800 264 PIKE / Fax: (585) 271-3101Specialty Contracting Facility Service E-mail: pike@pikeco.com / Online: www.pikeco.com Program Management DESCRIPTION OF SUBMITTAL: REFERENCES:Spec. Section:Review Cycle No.:211313 Remarks: Reliable Quick Response Concealed Head Wet Pipe Sprinkler SystemsSUBMITTAL NAME: Drawings:Supplier: Albany - Phone: (518) 371-5900 Pike Branch Offices: Hartford, CT - Phone: (860) 251-8000 TYPE OF SUBMITTAL:Product Data 001 Davis-Ulmer Fire Protection PROJECT NAME:Sibley Hall OWNER: ARCHITECT:The Pike Company, Inc. Norm Rockefeller ®Expedition form sb_20b The Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc., 103 Fairview Park Drive, Elmsford, New York 10523 Bulletin 034 Rev. ABulletin 034 Rev. A Model G5-56 Model G5-42 Quick Response Concealed Automatic Sprinkler UL Quick Response FM Standard Response Concealed Sprinkler With a 3/4” (19mm) Adjustment Features 1. Cover plate attachment (Plain or Perforated) with ¾” (19mm) assembly adjustment. 2. Smooth aesthetic ceiling profile. 3. Factory installed protective cap. 4. Available in brass, chrome or black plated and white painted finishes. 5. Ordinary and Intermediate temperature rating. For K2.8 & additional Sprinklers refer to Bulletin 154 for Technical Specifi cation and Approvals Approvals & Listings 1. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. and cULus - Quick Response 2. Factory Mutual Research Corp. (FM) - Standard Response (See Page 3) • Light Hazard Occupancies - No Limitations • Ordinary Hazard Occupancies Groups 1 & 2 Wet Systems Only U.S. Patent number 6,554,077. Product Description The Reliable Model G5-56 and G5-42 uses a proven quick response fusible element in a standard style sprinkler frame with a drop-down deflector. This assembly is recessed into the ceiling and concealed by a flat cover plate assembly. The threaded engagement provides ¾” (19mm) of cover adjust- ment. The flat cover plate is attached to the skirt using either 135°F (57°C) or 165°F (74°C) ordinary temperature classifica- tion solder. When the ceiling temperature rises, the solder holding the flat cover plate melts, the flat cover plate released thus expos- ing the sprinkler inside to the rising ambient temperature. The subsequent fusing of the element opens the waterway and causes the deflector to distribute the water. Any secure engagement between the cover plate and cup will assure that the drop-down deflector is properly located below the ceiling. Application The Reliable Model G5-56 and G5-42 are the most versatile quick response concealed sprinklers available. It provides the best form of fire protection while offering an attractive ap- pearance and 3/4” (19mm) of cover adjustment for ease of installation. The small diameter cover plate assembly is eas- ily attached and blends into the ceiling, concealing the most dependable fire protection available, an automatic sprinkler system. The Model G5-56 and G5-42 are designed for use where aesthetic appearance is important. Offices, hospitals, motels and restaurants are but a few of the applications where it can be used. The Model G5-56 and G5-42 is a UL Listed Quick Response Concealed sprinklers intended for use in accordance with NFPA 13. FM Approves the G5-56 sprinkler as a standard re- sponse concealed sprinkler intended for use in accordance with FM Loss Prevention Data Sheet 2.0. Plain Cover Plate Perforated Cover Plate Installation Do not install the G5-56 and G5-42 in ceilings which have positive pressure in the space above. • Cut a 25/8” inch (67mm) diameter hole is cut in the ceiling, the sprinkler is easily installed with the Model FC Wrench. The wrench has a socket drive which is inserted into the body of the sprinkler. When installing a sprinkler the wrench is first positioned into the sprinkler/cup assembly until the wrench socket engages the body of the sprinkler. The sprinkler is then tightened into the pipe fitting. When inserting or remov- ing the wrench from the sprinkler/cup assembly, care should be taken to prevent damage to the sprinkler. DO NOT WRENCH ON ANY OTHER PART OF THE SPRINKLER/ CUP ASSEMBLY. Install the cover plate by hand turning the cover in the clockwise direction until it is tight against the ceil- ing. A protective cap is provided to protect the drop-down sprinkler deflector from damage which could occur during construction before the cover plate is installed. The cap is factory installed inside the sprinkler cup. Remove cap to install sprinkler, then re- install cap until the cover plate is installed. Maintenance The Model G5-56 and G5-42 should be inspected quarterly and the sprinkler system maintained in accordance with NFPA 25. Do not clean sprinklers with soap and water, ammonia or any other cleaning fluids. Remove any sprinkler that has been painted (other than factory applied) or damaged in any way. A stock of spare sprinklers should be maintained to allow quick re- placement of damaged or operated sprinklers. Prior to installa- tion, sprinklers should be maintained in the original cartons and packaging to minimize the potential for damage to sprinklers that would cause improper operation or non-operation. UL Listing Category Sprinklers, Automatic and Open Quick Response Sprinkler UL Guide Number VNIV Maximum Working Pressure 175 psi (12 bar) 100% Factory tested Hydrostatically to 500 psi (34.5 bar) Temperature Rating Classifi cation Sprinkler Cover Plate Max. Ambient Temp. Ordinary 165°F/74°C 135°F/57°C 100°F/38°C Intermediate 212°F/100°C 165°F/74°C 150°F/66°C Model FC Sprinkler Wrench Ordering Information 1. Sprinkler Model 2. Nominal Orifice 3. Flat Cover Plate Plain or Perforated 4. Flat Cover Plate Assembly Finish 5. Inlet Type Cover Plate Finishes(1) Standard Finishes Chrome White Paint Special Application Finishes(2) Bright Brass Finished Bronze Black Plating Black Paint Off White Satin Chrome (1) Other finishes and colors are available on special order. Consult factory for details. Coverplate custom paint is semi-gloss, unless specified otherwise. (2) For the perforated style cover- plate, consult factory for avail- ability on these and other cus- tom finishes. 2. Technical Data Sprinkler Inlet Total Adjustment Nominal Orifi ce Nominal K Factor Thread Approvals Sprinkler Identifi cation (SIN)US Metric Non Adjustable ¾” (19mm) ½” (15mm) 5.6 80 ½” NPT (R½) 1,2 RA3415 Non Adjustable ¾” (19mm) ½” (15mm) 4.2 6.0 ½” NPT (R½) 1 RA3413 Notice FOR USE AS A REPLACEMENT OF MODEL G4A SPRINKLERS NOTE: 1. Testing has shown that use of a “nipple extension” will not affect the listing of the sprinkler. 2. For RETROFIT installations, per NFPA 13 (2010) section 8.15.19.4, “which allows the use of nipples as the same pipe thread size as the existing outlet when revamping existing systems”. 3. Do not exceed 8-18 ft-lbs of torque during installation. 3. The Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. (800) 431-1588 Sales Offices (800) 848-6051 Sales Fax (914) 829-2042 Corporate Offices www.reliablesprinkler.com Internet Address Manufactured by Recycled Paper Revision lines indicate updated or new data. EG. Printed in U.S.A. 02/12 P/N 9999970421 The equipment presented in this bulletin is to be installed in accordance with the latest published Standards of the National Fire Protection Association, Factory Mutual Research Corporation, or other similar organizations and also with the provisions of governmental codes or ordinances whenever applicable. Products manufactured and distributed by Reliable have been protecting life and property for over 90 years, and are installed and serviced by the most highly qualified and reputable sprinkler contractors located throughout the United States, Canada and foreign countries. • Automatic sprinklers • Flush automatic sprinklers • Recessed automatic sprinklers • Concealed automatic sprinklers • Adjustable automatic sprinklers • Dry automatic sprinklers • Intermediate level sprinklers • Open sprinklers • Spray nozzles • Alarm valves • Retarding chambers • Dry pipe valves • Accelerators for dry pipe valves • Mechanical sprinkler alarms • Electrical sprinkler alarm switches • Water flow detectors • Deluge valves • Detector check valves • Check valves • Electrical system • Sprinkler emergency cabinets • Sprinkler wrenches • Sprinkler escutcheons and guards • Inspectors test connections • Sight drains • Ball drips and drum drips • Control valve seals • Air maintenance devices • Air compressors • Pressure gauges • Identification signs • Fire department connection Reliable offers a wide selection of sprinkler components. Following are some of the many precision-made Reliable products that guard life and property from fire around the clock. Reliable...For Complete Protection SUBMITTAL COVER (Attach to each submitted) 300 State Street, Suite 201, Rochester, NY 14614 Contractor’s Submittal No. 211313-004 Phone 585.454.6110 Fax 585.454.3066 A/E Submittal No. 211313-004 www.labellapc.com Contractor: Address: Phone / E-Mail: (585) 271-5256 / pike@pikeco.com Type of Submittal (check one) Product Data Color Selection O&M Manual Date of Submittal: 12/16/2013 Shop Drawings Sample Record Document Resubmitted: Substitution Yes No Product Identification Contractor Approval Specification Section No.: Identify that this submittal has been Contract Dwg. No.: approved by the Contractor in Product Name: accordance with the General Conditions Part/Paragraph: Manufacturer: By: Date: Contractor Comments: (A/E Use Only) Architect / Engineer Comments: Reviewed Revise and Resubmit Rejected Furnish as Noted Corrections or comments made on the shop drawings during this review do not relieve the contractor from compliance with requirements of the drawings and specifications. This check is only for review of general conformance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. The contractor is responsible for confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions; selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction; coordinating his work with that of all other trades; and performing his work in a safe and satisfactory manner. LaBella Associates, P.C. By: Caren Rubin Date: 12/17/2013 The PIKE Company, Inc. One Circle Street Rochester, NY 14607 1. Cornell University East Sibley Hall, Third Floor LaBella Project #213072 The PIKE Company SUBMITTAL COVER BY THIS SUBMITTAL HAS BEEN REVIEWED ARCHITECT'S STAMP WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE PIKE COMPANY AS COMPLYING BY: _____________________ DATE: RECEIVED STAMPS 12/16/2013 PIKE JOB NO:13897 PROJECT NO: 12/16/2013DATE:Pike Submittal No: 211313-004 General Contracting The Pike Company, Inc. Construction Management One Circle Street, Rochester, NY 14607 Phone: (585) 271-5256 / 800 264 PIKE / Fax: (585) 271-3101Specialty Contracting Facility Service E-mail: pike@pikeco.com / Online: www.pikeco.com Program Management DESCRIPTION OF SUBMITTAL: REFERENCES:Spec. Section:Review Cycle No.:211313 Remarks: Victaulic Grooved Fittings/Couplings Wet Pipe Sprinkler SystemsSUBMITTAL NAME: Drawings:Supplier: Albany - Phone: (518) 371-5900 Pike Branch Offices: Hartford, CT - Phone: (860) 251-8000 TYPE OF SUBMITTAL:Product Data 001 Davis-Ulmer Fire Protection PROJECT NAME:Sibley Hall OWNER: ARCHITECT:The Pike Company, Inc. Norm Rockefeller ®Expedition form sb_20b STYLE 009 Size Max. Work Pressure * Max. End Load * Allow. Pipe End Sep. † Dimensions Approx. Wgt. Each Nominal Size Inches mm Actual Outside Dia. Inches mm Pre-assembled Joint Assembled psi kPa Lbs. N Inches mm X Inches mm Y Inches mm X Inches mm Y Inches mm Z Inches mm Lbs. kg 1 / 1.660 300 649 0.10 3.13 4.93 2.86 4.83 1.93 1.5 32 42.4 2065 2888 2.54 80 125 73 123 49 0.7 1 / 1.900 300 851 0.10 3.38 5.16 3.11 5.07 1.86 1.7 40 48.3 2065 3787 2.54 86 131 79 129 47 0.8 2 2.375 300 1329 0.12 3.88 5.81 3.59 5.68 1.86 1.9 50 60.3 2065 5914 3.05 99 148 91 144 47 0.9 2 / 2.875 300 1948 0.12 4.38 6.21 4.08 6.10 1.87 2.0 65 73.0 2065 8668 3.05 111 158 104 155 48 0.9 3 3.500 300 2886 0.12 5.03 6.88 4.70 6.78 1.88 2.3 80 88.9 2065 12842 3.05 128 175 119 172 48 1.0 4 4.500 300 4771 0.17 6.19 8.11 5.94 8.01 2.09 3.9 100 114.3 2065 21230 4.32 157 206 151 203 53 1.8 STYLE 009V Size Max. Work Pressure * Max. End Load * Allow. Pipe End Sep. † Dimensions Approx. Wgt. Each Nominal Size Inches mm Actual Outside Dia. Inches mm Pre-assembled Joint Assembled psi kPa Lbs. N Inches mm X Inches mm Y Inches mm X Inches mm Y Inches mm Z Inches mm Lbs. kg 1 / 1.660 300 649 0.10 3.14 4.84 2.85 4.65 1.91 1.6 32 42.4 2065 2888 2.54 80 123 72 118 49 0.7 1 / 1.900 300 851 0.10 3.34 5.06 3.13 4.85 1.92 1.7 40 48.3 2065 3787 2.54 85 129 80 123 49 0.8 2 2.375 300 1329 0.12 3.91 5.66 3.61 5.47 1.94 2.1 50 60.3 2065 5914 3.05 99 144 92 139 49 0.9 76.1 mm 2.875 300 1948 0.12 4.57 6.46 4.17 6.18 1.96 2.3 73.0 2065 8668 3.05 116 164 106 157 50 1.1 3 3.500 300 2886 0.12 5.15 7.12 4.73 6.67 1.94 2.6 80 88.9 2065 12842 3.05 131 181 120 169 49 1.2 4 4.500 300 4771 0.17 6.39 8.74 6.05 8.46 2.11 4.6 100 114.3 2065 21230 4.32 162 222 154 215 54 2.1 † The allowable pipe end separation dimension shown is for system layout purposes only. FireLock EZ couplings are considered rigid connections and will not accommodate expansion or contraction of the piping system. * Refer to General Notes on pg. 13. IMPORTANT NOTES: When assembling Style 009 couplings onto FireLock end caps, take additional care to make certain the cap is fully seated against the gasket and stop. Please make cer tain the 4"/100 mm No. 006 cap includes an “EZ” mark on its reverse side to ensure compatibility. X Y Z X Y Z FireLock EZ Rigid Coupling STYLE 009 STYLE 009V (Europe Only) For Complete Information Request Publication 10.60 • Provides rigidity; does not accommodate expansion, contraction or angular deflection • Installation-ready design – assemble a joint without disassembling the bolts, nuts, gasket and housings • For use in fire protection systems only • Reduces installation time up to 60% • Rated up to 300 psi/2065 kPa • Sizes from 1 ¼ – 4"/32 – 100 mm STYLE 009/009V PRE-ASSEMBLED STYLE 009/009V JOINT ASSEMBLED WWW.VICTAULIC.COM14 Couplings COUPLINGS Size Max. Work Pressure § * Max. End Load * Allow. Pipe End Sep. † * Dimensions Approx. Wgt. Each Nominal Size Inches mm Actual Outside Dia. Inches mm psi kPa Lbs. N Inches mm X Inches mm Y Inches mm Z Inches mm Lbs. kg 1 / 1.660 350 755 0.05 2.75 4.50 1.88 1.2 32 42.4 2410 3370 1.2 70 114 48 0.5 1 / 1.900 350 990 0.05 3.00 4.75 1.88 1.2 40 48.3 2410 4415 1.2 76 121 48 0.5 2 2.375 350 1550 0.07 3.50 5.25 1.88 1.6 50 60.3 2410 6900 1.7 89 133 48 0.7 2 / 2.875 350 2270 0.07 4.00 5.75 1.88 1.9 65 73.0 2410 10110 1.7 102 146 48 0.9 76.1 mm 3.000 350 2475 0.07 4.13 5.75 1.88 1.9 76.1 2410 11010 1.7 105 146 48 0.9 3 3.500 350 3365 0.07 4.63 6.13 1.88 2.1 80 88.9 2410 14985 1.7 118 156 48 1.0 108.0 mm 4.250 300 4255 0.16 5.63 7.25 2.13 3.1 108.0 2065 18940 4.1 143 184 54 1.4 4 4.500 350 5565 0.16 5.75 7.25 2.13 3.1 100 114.3 2410 24770 4.1 146 184 54 1.4 133.0 mm 5.250 300 6495 0.16 6.63 9.00 2.13 4.5 133.0 2065 28900 4.1 168 229 54 2.0 139.7 mm 5.500 300 7125 0.16 6.88 9.00 2.13 4.8 139.7 2065 31715 4.1 175 229 54 2.2 5 5.563 300 7290 0.16 6.88 9.00 2.13 4.5 125 141.3 2065 32445 4.1 175 229 54 2.0 159.0 mm 6.250 300 9200 0.16 7.63 10.00 2.13 5.5 159.0 2065 40955 4.1 194 254 54 2.5 165.1 mm 6.500 300 9955 0.16 8.15 10.00 2.13 5.5 165.1 2065 44295 4.1 207 254 54 2.5 6 6.625 300 10340 0.16 8.00 10.00 2.13 5.0 150 168.3 2065 46020 4.1 203 254 54 2.3 8 8.625 300 17525 0.19 10.50 13.13 2.63 11.3 200 219.1 2065 78000 4.8 267 334 67 5.1 † For field installation only. FireLock Style 005 couplings are essentially rigid and do not accommodate expansion/contraction. § Style 005 couplings are VdS and LPC Approved to 12 Bar/175 psi. * Refer to General Notes on pg. 13. X Y Z FireLock Rigid Coupling STYLE 005 For Complete Information Request Publication 10.02 • Unique angle-pad design for rigidity • Allows supporting/ hanging same as welded or threaded in accordance with NFPA-13 requirements • For use in fire protection services only • Pressure rated up to 350 psi/2410 kPa • Sizes from 1 ¼ – 8"/32 – 200 mm TYPICAL FOR ALL SIZES WWW.VICTAULIC.COM 15 Couplings COUPLINGS Size Max. Work Pressure * Max. End Load * Allow. Pipe End Sep. * Dimensions Approx. Wgt. Each Nominal Size Inches mm Actual Outside Dia. Inches mm psi kPa Lbs. N Inches mm X Inches mm Y Inches mm Z Inches mm Lbs. kg 1 1.315 500 679 0.05 2.36 4.22 1.84 1.6 25 33.7 3450 3020 1.2 60 107 47 0.7 1 / 1.660 500 1082 0.05 2.69 4.62 1.84 1.6 32 42.4 3450 4813 1.2 68 117 47 0.7 1 / 1.900 500 1417 0.05 2.94 5.81 1.84 1.6 40 48.3 3450 6305 1.2 75 148 47 0.7 2 2.375 500 2214 0.07 3.35 5.78 1.84 2.3 50 60.3 3450 9852 1.7 85 147 47 1.0 2 / 2.875 500 3244 0.07 3.88 6.38 1.84 2.6 65 73.0 3450 14437 1.7 98 162 47 1.2 76.1 mm 3.000 500 3533 0.07 4.21 6.61 1.84 3.6 76.1 3450 15720 1.7 107 168 47 1.6 3 3.500 500 4808 0.07 4.54 6.81 1.84 3.0 80 88.9 3450 21396 1.7 115 173 47 1.4 108.0 mm 4.250 500 7090 0.16 5.56 7.98 2.07 5.2 108.0 3450 31548 4.1 141 203 53 2.4 4 4.500 500 7948 0.16 5.81 8.21 2.07 5.3 100 114.3 3450 35369 4.1 148 209 53 2.4 133.0 mm 5.250 500 10818 0.16 6.69 9.60 2.07 7.4 133.0 3450 48141 4.1 170 244 53 3.4 139.7 mm 5.500 500 11873 0.16 6.94 9.82 2.07 7.6 139.7 3450 52835 4.1 176 249 53 3.4 5 5.563 500 12147 0.16 7.03 9.89 2.07 7.4 125 141.3 3450 54053 4.1 179 251 53 3.4 159.0 mm 6.250 500 15332 0.16 7.84 10.54 2.07 9.2 159.0 3450 68228 4.1 199 268 53 4.2 165.1 mm 6.500 500 16583 0.16 8.13 10.84 2.07 8.3 165.1 3450 73795 4.1 207 275 53 3.8 6 6.625 500 17227 0.16 8.26 10.83 2.07 8.3 150 168.3 3450 76660 4.1 210 275 53 3.8 8 § 8.625 450 26278 0.1 10.54 13.74 2.51 15.1 200 219.1 3100 116939 4.8 268 349 64 6.8 10 § † 10.750 400 36287 0.13 12.86 16.98 2.56 23.5 250 273.0 2750 161475 3.3 327 431 65 10.7 12 § † 12.750 400 51045 0.13 14.86 18.88 2.56 28.2 300 323.9 2750 227149 3.3 377 480 65 12.8 14 14.000 175 26926 0.13 16.06 19.89 2.87 32.8 350 355.6 1205 119818 3.3 408 505 73 14.9 16 16.000 175 35168 0.13 18.39 21.84 2.87 41.2 400 406.4 1205 156498 3.3 467 555 73 18.7 18 18.000 175 44510 0.13 20.68 23.89 3.00 54.2 450 457.0 1205 198067 3.3 525 607 76 24.6 20 20.000 175 54950 0.13 22.93 27.47 3.00 67.2 500 508.0 1205 244528 3.3 582 698 76 30.5 24 24.000 175 79128 0.09 27.05 31.61 3.06 76.2 600 609.6 1205 352120 3.2 687 803 78 34.6 § Couplings in 8"/200 mm, 10"/250 mm, and 12"/300 mm sizes are approved for JIS piping standards. † Only couplings in 10"/250 mm and 12"/300 mm sizes are approved for use in China. * Refer to General Notes on pg. 13. Y X Z X Y Z X Y Z Zero-Flex Rigid Coupling STYLE 07 For Complete Information Request Publication 06.02 • Angled-pad design for rigidity • Resists flexural and torsional loads • Pressure rated up to 500 psi/3450 kPa • Sizes from 1 – 24"/25 – 600 mm TYPICAL 1 – 12"/25 – 300 mm SIZES TYPICAL 14 – 18"/350 – 450 mm SIZES TYPICAL 20 – 24"/500 – 600 mm SIZES WWW.VICTAULIC.COM16 Couplings COUPLINGS Size Max. Work Pressure * Max. End Load * Allow. Pipe End Sep. * Dimensions Approx. Wgt. Each Nominal Size Inches mm Actual Outside Dia. Inches mm psi kPa Lbs. N Inches mm X Inches mm Y Inches mm Z Inches mm Lbs. kg 1 1.315 500 680 0 – 0.06 2.38 4.27 1.77 1.3 25 33.4 3450 3025 0 – 1.6 61 108 45 0.6 1 / 1.660 500 1,080 0 – 0.06 2.68 4.61 1.77 1.4 32 42.2 3450 4805 0 – 1.6 68 117 45 0.6 1 / 1.900 500 1,420 0 – 0.06 2.91 4.82 1.77 1.5 40 48.3 3450 6320 0 – 1.6 74 122 45 0.6 2 2.375 500 2,215 0 – 0.06 3.43 5.22 1.88 1.7 50 60.3 3450 9860 0 – 1.6 87 133 48 0.8 2 / 2.875 500 3,245 0 – 0.06 3.88 5.68 1.88 1.9 65 73.0 3450 14440 0 – 1.6 98 144 48 0.9 76.1 mm 3.000 500 3,535 0 – 0.06 4.00 5.90 1.88 1.9 76.1 3450 15730 0 – 1.6 102 150 48 0.9 3 3.500 500 4,800 0 – 0.06 4.50 7.00 1.88 2.9 80 88.9 3450 21360 0 – 1.6 114 178 48 1.3 3 / 4.000 500 6,300 0 – 0.06 5.00 7.50 1.88 2.9 90 101.6 3450 28035 0 – 1.6 127 191 48 1.3 108.0 mm 4.250 450 6,380 0 – 0.13 5.55 7.79 2.13 3.7 108.0 3100 28395 0 – 3.2 141 198 54 1.7 4 4.500 500 7,950 0 – 0.13 5.80 8.03 2.13 4.1 100 114.3 3450 35380 0 – 3.2 147 204 54 1.9 4 / 5.000 450 8,820 0 – 0.13 6.13 9.43 2.13 5.5 120 127.0 3100 39250 0 – 3.2 156 240 54 2.5 133.0 mm 5.250 450 9,735 0 – 0.13 6.55 9.37 2.13 6.0 133.0 3100 43325 0 – 3.2 166 238 54 2.7 139.7 mm 5.500 450 10,665 0 – 0.13 6.80 9.59 2.13 6.3 139.7 3100 47460 0 – 3.2 173 244 54 2.9 5 5.563 450 10,935 0 – 0.13 6.88 10.07 2.13 5.8 125 141.3 3100 48660 0 – 3.2 175 256 54 2.6 152.4 mm 6.000 450 12,735 0 – 0.13 7.38 10.48 1.88 6.2 152.4 3100 56670 0 – 3.2 187 266 48 2.8 159.0 mm 6.250 450 13,800 0 – 0.13 7.63 10.49 2.13 6.8 159.0 3100 61405 0 – 3.2 194 266 54 3.1 165.1 mm 6.500 450 14,940 0 – 0.13 7.84 10.66 2.06 7.2 165.1 3100 66483 0 – 3.2 199 271 52 3.3 6 6.625 450 15,525 0 – 0.13 8.00 11.07 2.13 7.0 150 168.3 3100 69085 0 – 3.2 203 281 54 3.2 203.2 mm #8.000 450 22,635 0 – 0.13 9.72 13.33 2.31 12.6 203.2 3100 100725 0 – 3.2 247 339 54 5.7 8 8.625 450 26,280 0 – 0.13 10.34 13.97 2.32 12.4 200 219.1 3100 116945 0 – 3.2 263 355 59 5.6 # Style 74 Coupling. * Refer to General Notes on pg. 13. ZY X Flexible Coupling STYLE 75 For Complete Information Request Publication 06.05 • For use where moderate pressures are expected and weight considerations are a factor • 50% lighter in weight than Style 77 • Pressure rated up to 500 psi/3450 kPa • Sizes from 1 – 8"/25 – 200 mm TYPICAL FOR ALL SIZES WWW.VICTAULIC.COM18 Couplings COUPLINGS Size Max. Work Pressure * Max. End Load * Allow. Pipe End Sep. * Dimensions Approx. Wgt. Each Nominal Size Inches mm psi kPa Lbs. N Inches mm X Inches mm Y Inches mm Z Inches mm Lbs. kg 2 × 1 / 350 1,000 0 – 0.07 3.38 5.25 1.88 2.0 50 40 2410 4450 0 – 1.8 85 133 48 0.9 2 /× 2 350 2,215 0 – 0.07 4.06 6.00 1.88 2.3 65 50 2410 9850 0 – 1.8 103 152 48 1.0 76.1 × 2 350 1,550 0 – 0.07 4.13 6.00 1.88 4.6 50 2410 6900 0 – 1.8 105 152 48 2.1 3 × 2 350 1,550 0 – 0.07 4.75 7.13 1.88 4.6 80 50 2410 6900 0 – 1.8 121 181 48 2.1 2 / 350 3,250 0 – 0.07 4.75 7.13 1.88 3.8 65 2410 14460 0 – 1.8 121 181 48 1.7 76.1 350 2,275 0 – 0.07 4.75 7.13 1.88 3.8 2410 10125 0 – 1.8 121 181 48 1.7 4 × 2 350 1,550 0 – 0.13 6.25 8.88 2.25 8.8 100 50 2410 6900 0 – 3.2 159 225 57 4.0 2 / 350 2,275 0 – 0.13 6.25 8.88 2.25 8.3 65 2410 10125 0 – 3.2 159 225 57 3.8 3 350 4,810 0 – 0.13 6.00 8.88 2.25 6.3 80 2410 21400 0 – 3.2 152 225 57 2.9 4 /× 76.1 350 2,275 0 – 0.13 6.25 8.88 2.25 6.4 120 2410 10125 0 – 3.2 159 225 57 2.9 5 × 4 350 5,565 0 – 0.13 7.13 10.63 2.13 10.8 125 100 2410 24765 0 – 3.2 181 270 54 4.9 6 × 4 350 5,565 0 – 0.13 8.63 11.88 2.25 16.1 150 100 2410 24765 0 – 3.2 219 302 57 7.3 5 350 8,500 0 – 0.13 8.50 11.88 2.25 12.6 125 2410 37825 0 – 3.2 216 302 57 5.7 165.1 × 4 350 5,565 0 – 0.13 8.50 11.38 2.25 15.2 100 2410 24765 0 – 3.2 216 289 57 6.9 8 × 6 350 12,000 0 – 0.13 10.75 14.75 2.50 22.3 200 150 2410 53400 0 – 3.2 273 375 64 10.1 * Refer to General Notes on pg. 13. IMPORTANT NOTES: Style 750 reducing couplings should not be used with end caps (No. 60) in systems where a vacuum may be developed. Contact Victaulic Company for details. X ZY Reducing Coupling STYLE 750 For Complete Information Request Publication 06.08 • Direct reduction on the piping run • Designed to replace two couplings and a reducing fitting • Special reducing gasket for pressure responsive sealing • Pressure rated up to 350 psi/2410 kPa • Sizes from 2 × 1½"/ 50 × 40 mm through 8 × 6"/200 × 150 mm TYPICAL FOR ALL SIZES WWW.VICTAULIC.COM 19 Couplings COUPLINGS Size Max. Work Pressure * Max. End Load * Sealing Surface Dimensions Approx. Wgt. Each Nominal Size Inches mm Actual Outside Dia. Inches mm psi kPa Lbs. N A Max. Inches mm B Min. Inches mm W Inches mm Z Inches mm Lbs. kg 2 2.375 175 775 2.38 3.41 6.75 0.75 2.7 50 60.3 1200 3450 60 87 172 19 1.2 2 ½ 2.875 175 1135 2.88 3.91 7.88 0.88 4.2 65 73.0 1200 5050 73 99 200 22 1.9 3 3.500 175 1685 3.50 4.53 8.44 0.94 4.8 80 88.9 1200 7500 89 115 214 24 2.2 4 4.500 175 2780 4.50 5.53 9.94 0.94 7.1 100 114.3 1200 11045 114 141 252 24 3.2 5 5.563 175 4250 5.56 6.71 11.00 1.00 8.3 125 141.3 1200 18920 141 171 279 25 3.8 6 6.625 175 6030 6.63 7.78 12.00 1.00 9.3 150 168.3 1200 26840 168 198 305 25 4.2 8 8.625 175 10219 8.63 9.94 14.63 1.13 13.9 200 219.1 1200 45475 219 252 372 29 6.3 * Working Pressure and End Load are total, from all internal and external loads, based on standard weight steel pipe, standard roll or cut grooved in accordance with Victaulic specification. Contact Victaulic for performance on other pipe. IMPORTANT NOTES WARNING: For one time field test only, the Maximum Joint Working Pressure may be increased to 1½ times the figures shown. Style 744 FireLock Flange adapters provide rigid joints when used on pipe with standard roll or cut groove dimensions and consequently allow no linear or angular movement at the joint. WARNING: Depressurize and drain the piping system before attempting to install, remove, or adjust any Victaulic piping products. Style 744 FireLock flange adapters provide rigid joints when used on pipe with standard cut or roll groove dimensions and consequently allow no linear or angular movement at the joint. When used with Victaulic Series 705 butterfly valves, plastic pipe or lightwall metallic pipe, small teeth in I.D. of key section should be removed and may be used on one side of the valve. Z WA B Remove to mate to flat-faced flanges W Z A B FireLock Flange Adapter ANSI Class 150 STYLE 744 For Complete Information Request Publication 10.04 • Directly incorporates ANSI Class 125 or Class 150 bolt hole patterns into a grooved system • Hinged for easy handling with integral end tabs which facilitate assembly • Small teeth inside the key shoulder I.D. prevent rotation • Pressure rated up to 175 psi/1200 kPa • Sizes from 2 – 8"/50 – 200 mm SERIES 744 AND SERIES 741 TYPICAL FOR ALL SIZES SERIES 743 TYPICAL FOR ALL SIZES Orange area of mating face must be free from gouges, undulations or deformities of any type for effective sealing. WWW.VICTAULIC.COM20 Couplings COUPLINGS Size Max. Work Pressure * Max. End Load * Sealing Surface Dimensions Approx. Wgt. Each Nominal Size Inches mm Actual Outside Dia. Inches mm psi kPa Lbs. N A Max. Inches mm B Min. Inches mm W Inches mm Z Inches mm Lbs. kg 2 2.375 250 1107 2.38 3.41 6.75 0.75 3.1 50 60.3 1725 4926 60 87 172 19 1.4 2 / 2.875 250 1622 2.88 3.91 7.88 0.88 4.8 65 73.0 1725 7218 73 99 200 22 2.1 76.1 mm 3.00 250 1766 2.88 3.91 7.88 0.88 4.8 76.1 1725 7860 73 99 200 22 2.1 3 3.500 250 2404 3.50 4.53 8.44 0.94 5.3 80 88.9 1725 10698 89 115 214 24 2.4 4 4.500 250 3974 4.50 5.53 9.94 0.94 7.4 100 114.3 1725 17685 114 141 252 24 3.4 5 5.563 250 6073 5.56 6.71 11.00 1.00 8.6 125 141.3 1725 27026 141 171 279 25 3.9 165.1 mm †6.500 250 8292 6.50 7.66 12.00 1.00 10.0 165.1 1725 36897 165 195 305 25 4.5 6 6.625 250 8614 6.63 7.78 12.00 1.00 9.9 150 168.3 1725 38330 168 198 305 25 4.5 168.3 mm 6.625 250 8614 6.63 7.78 12.00 1.00 9.9 168.3 1725 38330 168 198 305 25 4.5 8 8.625 250 14599 8.63 9.94 14.63 1.13 16.6 200 219.1 1725 64966 219 252 372 29 7.5 10 10.750 250 22679 10.75 12.31 17.19 1.19 24.2 250 273.0 1725 100922 273 313 437 30 11.0 12 12.750 250 31903 12.75 14.31 20.25 1.25 46.8 300 323.9 1725 141968 324 364 514 32 21.2 * Refer to Publication 06.06 for more details. † Approved for use in China by Tianjin Approvals Company. IMPORTANT NOTES: Style 741 Vic-Flange adapters provide rigid joints when used on pipe with standard cut or roll groove dimensions and consequently allow no linear or angular movement at the joint. When used with Victaulic Series 705W butterfly valves, plastic pipe or lightwall metallic pipe, small teeth in I.D. of key section should be removed and may be used on one side of the valve. Contact Victaulic for information on AS2129 - Table E; ISO 2084 (PN10); DIN 2532 (PN10) and JIS B-2210 (10K) flanges. Total bolts required to be supplied by installer, may be ordered from Victaulic Company. For restrictions on where and how Vic-Flange adapters and flange washers can be used, refer to Publication 06.06. Size Max. Work Pressure * Max. End Load * Sealing Surface Dimensions Approx. Wgt. Each Nominal Size Inches mm Actual Outside Dia. Inches mm psi kPa Lbs. N A Max. Inches mm B Min. Inches mm W Inches mm Z Inches mm Lbs. kg 2 2.375 250 1107 2.38 3.41 6.50 0.94 4.8 50 60.3 1725 4926 60 87 165 24 2.2 2 / 2.875 250 1622 2.88 3.91 7.50 1.06 7.4 65 73.0 1725 7218 73 99 191 27 3.4 3 3.500 250 2404 3.50 4.53 8.25 1.19 9.1 80 88.9 1725 10698 89 115 210 30 4.1 4 4.500 250 3974 4.50 5.53 10.00 1.31 15.3 100 114.3 1725 17685 114 141 254 33 6.9 5 5.563 250 6073 5.56 6.71 11.00 1.44 17.7 125 141.3 1725 27026 141 171 279 37 8.0 6 6.625 250 8614 6.63 7.78 12.50 1.50 23.4 150 168.3 1725 38330 168 198 318 38 10.6 8 8.625 250 14599 8.63 9.94 15.00 1.69 34.3 200 219.1 1725 64966 219 252 381 43 15.6 10 10.750 250 22679 10.75 12.31 17.50 1.94 48.3 250 273.0 1725 100922 273 313 445 49 21.9 12 12.750 250 31903 12.75 14.31 20.50 2.00 70.5 300 323.9 1725 141968 324 364 521 51 32.0 * Refer to Publication 06.06 for more details. IMPORTANT NOTES: Style 743 Vic-Flange must be ordered as a factory assembly when connected to a Victaulic fitting or valve. Contact Victaulic for details. Total bolts required to be supplied by installer, may be ordered from Victaulic. For restrictions on where and how Vic-Flange adapters and flange washers can be used, refer to Publication 06.06. Vic-Flange Adapter ANSI Class 300/PN16 STYLE 743 For Complete Information Request Publication 06.06 Vic-Flange Adapter ANSI Class 150/PN10 STYLE 741 For Complete Information Request Publication 06.06 • Directly incorporates ANSI Class 125 or Class 150 flanged components into a grooved system • Pressure rated up to 250 psi/1725 kPa • Sizes from 2 – 12"/ 50 – 300 mm (hinged) • Pressure rated up to 250 psi/1725 kPa • Sizes from 2 – 12"/50 – 300 mm WWW.VICTAULIC.COM 21 Couplings COUPLINGS Size No. 001 90º Elbow No. 003 45º Elbow No. 002 Straight Tee No. 006 Cap Nominal Size Inches mm Actual Outside Diameter Inches mm C to E Inches mm Approx. Wgt. Each Lbs. kg C to E Inches mm Approx. Wgt. Each Lbs. kg C to E Inches mm Approx. Wgt. Each Lbs. kg T Thickness Inches mm Approx. Wgt. Each Lbs. kg 1 / 1.660 2.75 1.0 1.75 0.9 2.75 1.5 0.82 0.3 32 42.4 70 0.5 45 4.1 70 0.7 21 0.1 1 / 1.900 2.75 1.2 1.75 0.9 2.75 2.0 0.82 0.4 40 48.3 70 0.5 44 0.4 70 0.9 21 0.2 2 2.375 2.75 1.7 2.00 1.8 2.75 2.4 0.88 0.6 50 60.3 70 0.8 51 0.8 70 1.1 22 0.3 2 / 2.875 3.00 3.1 2.25 2.2 3.00 3.6 0.88 1.0 65 73.0 76 1.4 57 1.0 76 1.6 22 0.5 76.1 mm 3.000 3.00 3.30 2.25 2.4 — — — —76.1 76 1.5 57 1.1 3 3.500 3.38 4.0 2.50 3.1 3.88 5.3 0.88 1.2 80 88.9 86 1.8 64 1.4 86 2.4 22 0.5 4 4.500 4.00 6.7 3.00 5.6 4.00 8.7 1.00 2.4 100 114.3 102 3.0 76 2.5 102 3.9 25 1.1 139.7 mm 5.500 4.88 12.6 3.25 8.3 4.88 15.7 1.00 4.1 139.7 124 5.7 83 3.8 124 7.1 25 1.9 5 5.563 4.88 12.6 3.25 8.3 4.88 15.7 1.00 4.1 125 141.3 124 5.7 83 3.8 124 7.1 25 1.9 165.1 mm †6.500 5.50 18.3 3.50 11.7 5.50 22.7 1.00 5.9 165.1 140 8.3 89 5.3 140 10.3 25 2.7 6 6.625 5.50 18.3 3.50 11.7 5.50 22.7 1.00 5.9 150 168.3 140 8.3 89 5.3 140 10.3 25 2.7 8 8.625 6.81 25.5 4.25 20.4 6.94 38.7 1.13 12.7 200 219.1 173 11.6 108 9.3 176 17.6 29 5.8 † No. 001 90º elbow and No. 002 straight tee approved for use in China by Tianjin Approvals Company. T C to E C to E C to E C to E C to E FireLock Elbows, Tee and Cap NO. 001 90º Elbow NO. 003 45º Elbow NO. 002 Straight Tee NO. 006 Cap For Complete Information Request Publication 10.03 NO. 001 NO. 003 NO. 002 NO. 006 WWW.VICTAULIC.COM 25 Fittings FITTINGS Size Dimensions Nominal Size Inches mm Actual Outside Dia. Inches mm C to E Inches mm H Inches mm P Inches mm Approx. Weight Each Lbs. kg 2 / 2.875 3.75 2.75 1.68 5.2 65 73.0 95 70 43 2.4 3 3.500 4.25 2.75 2.10 5.3 80 88.9 108 70 53 2.4 4 4.500 5.00 2.75 2.60 8.8 100 114.3 127 70 66 4.0 6 6.625 6.50 2.75 3.65 18.7 150 168.3 165 70 93 8.5 Size Dimensions Approx. Weight Each Equivalent Length of Pipe Nominal Size Inches mm C to E Inches mm Lbs. kg Feet m 1 ¼× ½ NPT 2.38 1.4 2.8 32 15 NPT 61 0.6 0.9 ¾ NPT 2.38 1.4 2.8 20 NPT 61 0.6 0.9 1 NPT 2.38 1.4 2.8 25 NPT 61 0.6 0.9 1 ½× ½ NPT 2.50 1.6 2.9 40 15 NPT 64 0.7 0.9 ¾ NPT 2.50 1.6 2.9 20 NPT 64 0.7 0.9 1 NPT 2.50 1.6 2.9 25 NPT 64 0.7 0.9 2 × ½ NPT 2.75 1.7 4.0 50 15 NPT 70 0.8 1.2 ¾ NPT 2.75 1.7 4.0 20 NPT 70 0.8 1.2 1 NPT 2.75 1.7 4.0 25 NPT 70 0.8 1.2 2 ½× ½ NPT 3.00 2.0 5.7 65 15 NPT 76 0.9 1.7 ¾ NPT 3.00 2.0 5.7 20 NPT 76 0.9 1.7 1 NPT 3.0 2.0 5.7 25 NPT 76 0.9 1.7 USA C to E H C to E P C to E C to E Drain Elbow NO. 10-DR For Complete Information Request Publication 10.05 Vic-End II End of Run Elbow NO. 67 For Complete Information Request Publication 10.21 NO. 67NO. 10-DR WWW.VICTAULIC.COM26 Fittings FITTINGS Size No. 10 90º Elbow No. 11 45º Elbow No. 20 Tee No. 60 Cap Nominal Size Inches mm Actual Outside Dia. Inches mm C to E Inches mm Approx. Wgt. Each Lbs. kg C to E Inches mm Approx. Wgt. Each Lbs. kg C to E Inches mm Approx. Weight Each Lbs. kg T Thickness Inches mm Approx. Weight Each Lbs. kg / 1.050 2.25 0.5 1.50 0.5 2.25 0.6 0.88 0.2 20 26.9 57 0.2 38 0.2 57 0.3 22 0.1 1 1.315 2.25 0.6 1.75 0.6 2.25 1.0 0.88 0.3 25 33.7 57 0.3 44 0.3 57 0.5 22 0.1 1 / 1.660 2.75 1.0 1.75 0.9 2.75 1.5 0.88 0.3 32 42.4 70 0.5 44 0.4 70 0.7 22 0.1 1 / 1.900 2.75 1.2 1.75 0.9 2.75 2.0 0.88 0.5 40 48.3 70 0.5 44 0.4 70 0.9 22 0.2 2 2.375 3.25 1.8 2.00 1.3 3.25 3.0 0.88 0.6 50 60.3 83 0.8 51 0.6 83 1.4 22 0.3 2 / 2.875 3.75 3.2 2.25 2.2 3.75 4.3 0.88 1.0 65 73.0 95 1.5 57 1.0 95 2.0 22 0.5 76.1 mm 3.000 3.75 3.7 2.25 3.4 3.75 5.2 0.88 1.2 76.1 95 1.7 57 1.5 95 2.4 22 0.5 3 3.500 4.25 4.5 2.50 3.1 4.25 6.8 0.88 1.2 80 88.9 108 2.0 64 1.4 108 3.0 22 0.5 3 / 4.000 4.50 5.6 2.75 4.3 4.50 (sw) 7.9 0.88 2.5 90 101.6 114 2.5 70 2.0 114 3.6 22 1.1 108.0 mm 4.250 5.00 11.0 3.00 5.6 5.00 15.5 1.00 2.3 108.0 127 5.0 76 2.5 127 7.0 25 1.0 4 4.500 5.00 7.1 3.00 5.6 5.00 11.9 1.00 2.5 100 114.3 127 3.2 76 2.5 127 5.4 25 1.1 4 / 5.000 5.25 (sw) 10.0 3.13 (sw) 6.0 5.25 (sw) 15.0 1.00 2 .5 120 127.0 133 4.5 79 2.7 133 6.8 25 1.1 133.0 mm 5.250 5.50 11.7 3.25 8.3 5.50 17.8 1.00 4.5 133.0 140 5.3 83 3.8 140 8.1 25 2.0 139.7 mm 5.500 5.50 11.7 3.25 8.3 5.50 17.8 1.00 4.5 139.7 140 5.3 83 3.8 140 8.1 25 2.0 5 5.563 5.50 11.7 3.25 8.3 5.50 17.8 1.00 4.6 125 141.3 140 5.3 83 3.8 140 8.1 25 2.1 159.0 mm 6.250 6.50 18.6 3.50 10.8 6.50 27.1 1.00 6.8 159.0 165 8.4 89 4.9 165 12.3 25 3.1 165.1 mm 6.500 6.50 15.5 3.50 9.8 6.50 22.0 1.00 7.3 165.1 165 7.0 89 4.4 165 10.0 25 3.3 6 6.625 6.50 17.2 3.50 10.8 6.50 25.7 1.00 6.1 150 168.3 165 7.8 89 4.9 165 1.7 25 2.8 8 8.625 7.75 29.9 4.25 20.4 7.75 47.6 1.19 13.1 200 219.1 197 13.6 108 9.3 197 21.6 30 5.9 10 10.750 9.00 63.3 4.75 37.5 9.00 99.0 1.25 21.0 250 273.0 229 28.7 121 17.0 229 44.9 32 9.5 12 12.750 10.00 74.0 5.25 66.7 10.00 133.0 1.25 35.6 300 323.9 254 33.6 133 30.3 254 60.3 32 16.2 Additional fitting configurations available, contact Victaulic for details. (sw) segmentally welded steel. IMPORTANT NOTES: No. 60 cap is not suitable for use in vacuum service with Style 009, Style 72 or 750 couplings. No. 61 bull plugs should be used, request Publication 07.01 for more information. C to E C to E C to E C to E C to E T NO. 10 NO. 11 Elbows, Tee, and Cap NO. 10 90º Elbow NO. 11 45º Elbow NO. 20 Tee NO. 60 Cap For Complete Information Request Publication 07.01 NO. 20 NO. 60 WWW.VICTAULIC.COM 27 Fittings FITTINGS Size Style No. Max. Work Pressure @ Dimensions Approx. Weight Each Run × Branch Nominal Size Inches mm 920 or 920N psi kPa Hole Diameter +0.13 -0.00 T ** Inches mm V ‡ # Thd. Inches mm V ‡ Grv. Inches mm W Inches mm Y Inches mm Z Inches mm Female Thd. Lbs. kg Grv. Lbs. kg 2 × ½ (a) ¤920N 400 1.50 2.00 2.53 —1.61 5.35 2.75 3.1 —50 15 2750 38.1 51 64 41 136 70 1.5 ¾ (a) ¤920N 400 1.50 1.97 2.53 —1.61 5.35 2.75 3.1 —20 2750 38.1 50 64 41 136 70 1.5 1 (a) ¤920N 400 1.50 1.85 2.53 —1.61 5.35 2.75 3.0 —25 2750 38.1 47 64 41 136 70 1.4 1 ¼ (a) † ¤920N 400 1.75 2.05 2.75 3.00 1.61 5.35 3.00 3.5 3.2 32 2750 44.5 52 70 76 41 136 76 1.7 1.5 1 ½ (a) † ¤920N 400 1.75 2.03 2.75 3.12 1.61 5.35 3.25 3.6 3.2 40 2750 44.5 52 70 79 41 136 83 1.7 1.5 2 ½ × ½ (a) § ¤920N 400 1.50 2.21 2.74 —91.82 5.64 2.75 3.0 —65 15 2750 38.1 56 70 46 143 70 1.4 ¾ (a) § ¤920N 400 1.50 2.18 2.74 —1.82 5.64 2.75 3.0 —20 2750 38.1 55 70 46 143 70 1.4 1 (a) § ¤920N 400 1.50 2.06 2.74 —1.82 5.64 2.75 2.9 —25 2750 38.1 52 70 46 143 70 1.4 1 ¼ † (a) ¤920N 400 1.75 2.30 3.00 3.25 1.82 6.29 3.00 3.5 3.2 32 2750 44.5 58 76 83 46 160 76 1.7 1.5 1 ½ † (a) ¤920N 400 2.00 2.28 3.00 3.25 1.82 6.26 3.25 3.6 3.3 40 2750 50.8 58 76 83 46 159 83 1.7 1.6 76.1 × ½ (a) ¤920 300 1.50 2.22 2.75 —2.25 6.46 3.18 3.9 —15 2065 38.1 56 70 57 164 81 1.8 ¾ (a) ¤920 300 1.50 2.19 2.75 —2.25 6.46 3.18 3.9 —20 2065 38.1 56 70 57 164 81 1.8 1 (a) ¤920 300 1.50 2.07 2.75 —2.25 6.46 3.18 3.8 —25 2065 38.1 53 70 57 164 81 1.7 1 ¼ (a)920 400 1.75 2.30 3.00 3.31 1.92 6.29 3.00 3.5 3.2 32 2750 44.5 58 76 84 49 160 76 1.6 1.5 1 ½ (a)920 400 2.00 2.28 3.00 3.31 1.92 6.29 3.25 3.5 3.3 40 2750 50.8 58 76 84 49 160 83 1.6 1.5 3 × ½ (a) ¤920N 400 1.50 2.52 3.05 —2.28 6.15 2.75 3.4 —80 15 2750 38.1 64 78 58 156 70 1.6 ¾ (a) ¤920N 400 1.50 2.49 3.05 —2.28 6.15 2.75 3.4 —20 2750 38.1 63 78 58 156 70 1.6 1 (a) ¤920N 400 1.50 2.38 3.06 —2.28 6.15 2.75 3.3 —25 2750 38.1 61 78 58 156 70 1.6 1 ¼ (a) †920N 400 1.75 2.55 3.25 3.56 2.28 6.15 3.00 3.8 3.7 32 (b) 2750 44.5 65 83 90 58 156 76 1.8 1.8 1 ½ (a) †920N 400 2.00 2.78 3.50 3.56 2.28 6.15 3.25 4.1 3.8 40 (b) 2750 50.8 71 89 90 58 156 83 1.9 1.8 2 (a)920N 400 2.50 2.75 3.50 3.56 2.28 6.75 3.88 4.9 4.6 50 2750 63.5 70 89 90 58 172 99 2.3 2.1 3 ½ × 2 920N 400 2.50 — — 3.75 2.44 6.72 3.88 —3.8 90 50 2750 63.5 95 62 171 99 1.8 4 × ½ (a)920N 400 1.50 3.03 3.56 —2.69 7.01 2.75 3.7 —100 15 2750 38.1 77 90 68 178 70 1.8 ¾ (a)920N 400 1.50 3.00 3.56 —2.69 7.01 2.75 3.7 —20 2750 38.1 76 90 68 178 70 1.8 1 (a)920N 400 1.50 2.88 3.56 —2.69 7.01 2.75 3.6 —25 2750 38.1 73 90 68 178 70 1.8 1 ¼ (a) †920N 400 1.75 3.08 3.78 4.00 2.69 7.01 3.00 4.0 3.6 32 (b) 2750 44.5 78 96 102 68 178 76 1.9 1.8 1 ½ (a) †920N 400 2.00 3.28 4.00 4.00 2.69 7.01 3.25 4.2 3.9 40 (b) 2750 50.8 83 102 102 68 178 83 2.0 1.9 2 (a) †920N 400 2.50 3.25 4.00 4.00 2.69 7.01 3.88 5.0 4.6 50 2750 63.5 83 102 102 68 178 99 2.3 2.1 2 ½ (a) †920 400 2.75 2.88 4.00 4.00 2.69 7.34 4.63 5.8 5.0 65 2750 69.9 73 102 102 68 186 118 2.6 2.3 76.1 mm 920 400 2.75 — — 4.00 2.69 7.34 4.63 —6.4 2750 69.9 102 68 186 118 2.9 3 (a) †920 400 3.50 3.31 4.50 4.12 2.69 7.73 5.12 8.4 6.4 80 2750 88.9 84 114 105 68 196 130 3.8 2.9 TABLE CONTINUED ON PG. 30, SEE FOOTNOTES ON PG. 31 Y V W Z Y T V W Z Mechanical-T Bolted Branch Outlet STYLE 920/920N Grooved Outlet/Female Thd. Outlet For Complete Information Request Publication 11.02 GROOVED OUTLET FEMALE THREADED OUTLET IMPORTANT NOTES: Style 920 and Style 920N housings cannot be mated to one another to achieve cross connections. • Provides a direct branch connection at any location where a hole can be cut in the pipe • A pressure responsive gasket provides the seal • Request Publication 11.03 for Mechanical-T cross assemblies • Pressure rated up to 400 psi/2750 kPa • Sizes from 2 × ½"/ 50 × 15 mm through 8 × 4"/200 × 100 mm WWW.VICTAULIC.COM 29 Hole Cut Piping System HOLE CUT PIPING SYSTEM Size Style No. Max. Work Pressure @ Dimensions Approx. Weight Each Run × Branch Nominal Size Inches mm 920 or 920N psi kPa Hole Dia. +0.13 -0.00 T ** Inches mm V ‡ # Thd. Inches mm V ‡ Grv. Inches mm W Inches mm Y Inches mm Z Inches mm Female Thd. Lbs. kg Grv. Lbs. kg TABLE CONTINUED FROM PG. 29 108.0 × 1 ¼ (a)920N 400 1.75 3.08 3.78 —2.63 7.64 3.05 5.0 —32 2750 44.5 78 96 67 194 78 2.3 1 ½ (a)920N 400 2.00 3.28 4.00 —2.63 7.64 3.25 5.0 —40 2750 50.8 83 102 67 194 83 2.3 2 (a)920N 400 2.50 3.25 4.00 —2.63 7.64 4.00 4.0 —50 2750 63.5 83 102 67 194 102 1.9 76.1 mm 920 400 2.75 2.88 4.00 4.00 2.63 7.64 4.29 8.0 —2750 69.9 73 102 102 67 194 109 3.6 3 (a)920 400 3.50 3.31 4.50 —2.63 7.63 4.88 6.8 6.5 80 2750 88.9 84 114 67 194 124 3.1 3.0 5 × 1 ½ (a) †920 400 2.00 4.03 4.75 4.75 3.16 9.70 3.69 7.4 7.6 125 40 2750 50.8 102 121 121 80 246 94 3.4 3.4 2 (a) †920 400 2.50 4.00 4.75 4.75 3.16 9.70 4.38 8.2 8.0 50 2750 63.5 102 121 121 80 246 111 3.7 3.6 2 ½ (a) †920 400 2.75 3.63 4.75 4.75 3.16 9.70 4.63 8.3 7.9 65 2750 69.9 92 121 121 80 246 118 3.8 3.6 76.1 mm 920 400 2.75 — — 4.75 3.16 9.70 4.63 —8.0 2750 69.9 121 80 246 118 3.6 3 (a) †920 400 3.50 3.81 5.00 4.63 3.16 9.70 5.31 8.4 8.8 80 2750 88.9 97 127 118 80 246 135 3.8 4.0 133.0 × 2 920N 400 2.50 3.75 4.50 —3.17 8.00 3.88 8.0 —50 2750 63.5 95 114 81 203 99 3.6 3 920 400 3.50 3.81 5.00 —3.00 9.46 5.31 8.0 —80 2750 88.9 97 127 76 240 135 3.6 139.7 × 1 ½ †920N 400 2.00 3.78 4.50 —3.30 8.23 3.25 7.0 —40 2750 50.8 96 114 84 209 83 3.2 2 †920N 400 2.50 3.75 4.50 —3.30 8.23 3.88 9.0 —50 2750 63.5 95 114 84 209 99 4.1 76.1 mm 920 400 2.75 3.63 4.75 —3.13 9.85 4.63 8.8 —2750 69.9 92 121 80 250 118 4.0 76.1 mm 920 400 3.50 — — 4.63 3.16 9.70 5.31 —11.0 2750 88.9 118 80 246 135 5.0 3 920 400 3.50 3.81 5.00 4.63 3.16 9.85 5.38 14.0 14.2 88.9 2750 88.9 96.80 127 118 80 250 137 6.4 6.4 6 × 1 ¼ (a)920N 400 1.75 4.43 — — 3.79 9.15 3.25 —4.8 150 32 (b) 2750 44.5 112 96 232 83 2.2 1 ½ (a) †920N 400 2.00 4.40 5.13 5.13 3.79 9.15 3.25 5.4 5.1 40 (b) 2750 50.8 112 130 130 96 232 83 2.4 2.3 2 (a) †920N 400 2.50 4.38 5.13 5.13 3.79 9.15 3.88 6.0 5.6 50 2750 63.5 111 130 130 96 232 99 2.7 2.5 2 ½ (a) †920 400 2.75 4.01 5.13 5.12 3.69 10.51 4.63 8.3 7.6 65 2750 69.9 110 130 130 94 267 118 3.8 3.4 76.1 mm 920 400 2.75 — — 5.21 3.69 10.51 4.63 —8.4 2750 69.9 132 94 267 118 3.8 3 (a) †920 300 3.50 4.31 5.50 5.13 3.69 10.51 5.31 9.9 8.4 80 2065 88.9 110 140 130 94 267 135 4.5 3.8 4 (a) †920 300 4.50 3.81 5.75 5.38 3.69 10.51 6.25 10.1 10.1 100 2065 114.3 97 146 137 94 267 159 4.6 4.6 159.0 × 1 ¼ 920N 400 1.75 4.43 5.13 —3.63 9.40 3.25 9.0 8.7 32 2750 44.5 113 130 92 239 83 4.1 4.0 1 ½ (a)920N 400 2.00 4.41 5.13 —3.63 9.40 3.25 7.8 —40 2750 50.8 112 130 92 239 83 3.5 2 (a)920N 400 2.50 4.38 5.13 —3.63 9.40 3.88 8.0 —50 2750 63.5 111 130 92 239 99 3.6 76.1 mm 920 400 2.75 4.38 5.50 5.13 3.63 9.40 4.63 9.5 9.5 2750 69.9 111 140 130 92 239 118 4.3 4.3 3 920 400 3.50 4.31 5.50 5.13 3.63 9.40 5.31 8.1 14.0 80 2750 88.9 110 140 130 92 239 135 3.7 6.4 108.1 mm 920 400 4.50 — — 5.38 3.63 9.40 6.12 —10.0 2750 114.3 137 92 239 155 4.5 4 920 400 4.50 3.81 5.75 —3.63 9.40 6.25 18.0 —100 2750 114.3 96.80 146 92 239 159 8.2 165.1 × 1 920 400 1.50 3.88 4.56 —3.79 9.34 2.75 8.0 —25 2750 38.1 99 116 96 237 70 3.6 1 ¼ 920 400 1.75 4.43 5.13 —3.79 9.34 3.25 8.4 —32 2750 44.5 113 130 96 237 83 3.8 1 ½ (a) †920 400 2.00 4.41 5.13 —3.79 9.34 3.25 8.4 —40 2750 50.8 112 130 96 237 83 3.8 TABLE CONTINUED ON PG. 31, SEE FOOTNOTES ON PG. 31 Y V W Z Y T V W Z Mechanical-T Bolted Branch Outlet (cont'd) STYLE 920/920N Grooved Outlet/Female Thd. Outlet For Complete Information Request Publication 11.02 GROOVED OUTLET FEMALE THREADED OUTLET IMPORTANT NOTES: Style 920 and Style 920N housings cannot be mated to one another to achieve cross connections. • Provides a direct branch connection at any location where a hole can be cut in the pipe • A pressure responsive gasket provides the seal • Request Publication 11.03 for Mechanical-T cross assemblies • Pressure rated up to 400 psi/2750 kPa • Sizes from 2 × ½"/ 50 × 15 mm through 8 × 4"/200 × 100 mm WWW.VICTAULIC.COM30 Hole Cut Piping System HOLE CUT PIPING SYSTEM Size Style No. Max. Work Pressure @ Dimensions Approx. Weight Each Run × Branch Nominal Size Inches mm 920 or 920N psi kPa Hole Dia. +0.13 -0.00 T ** Inches mm V ‡ # Thd. Inches mm V ‡ Grv. Inches mm W Inches mm Y Inches mm Z Inches mm Female Thd. Lbs. kg Grv. Lbs. kg TABLE CONTINUED FROM PG. 30 165.1 × 2 (a) †920 400 2.50 4.38 5.13 —3.79 9.34 3.88 8.5 —50 2750 63.5 111 130 96 237 99 3.9 2 ½ †920 400 2.75 4.01 5.13 —3.63 10.51 4.63 8.6 7.6 65 2750 69.9 110 130 92 267 118 3.9 3.4 76.1 mm 920 400 2.75 4.01 5.13 5.21 3.63 10.51 4.63 8.6 7.6 2750 69.9 110 130 132 92 267 118 3.9 3.4 3 (a) † ø 920 400 3.50 4.31 5.50 5.13 3.63 10.51 5.31 10.2 8.4 80 2750 88.9 110 140 130 92 267 135 4.6 3.8 4 (a) †920 400 4.50 3.81 5.75 5.38 3.63 10.51 6.25 10.5 8.4 100 2750 114.3 97 146 137 92 267 159 4.8 3.8 8 × 2 (a) †920 400 2.75 5.44 6.19 6.25 4.81 12.42 4.50 11.6 11.6 200 50 2750 69.9 138 157 159 122 316 114 5.3 5.3 2 ½ (a) †920 400 2.75 5.07 6.19 6.19 4.81 12.42 4.50 11.6 11.6 65 2750 69.9 129 157 157 122 316 114 5.3 5.3 76.1 mm 920 400 2.75 — — 6.25 4.81 12.42 4.56 —11.6 2750 69.9 159 122 316 116 5.3 3 (a) †920 300 3.50 5.31 6.50 6.50 4.81 12.42 5.31 12.6 11.6 80 2065 88.9 135 165 165 122 316 135 5.7 5.3 4 (a) †920 300 4.50 4.81 6.75 6.38 4.81 12.42 6.25 15.3 12.5 100 2065 114.3 122 171 162 122 316 159 6.9 5.7 ** Center of run to engaged pipe end, female threaded outlet only (dimensions approximate). † Available with grooved or female threaded outlet. Specify choice on order. ‡ Center of run to end of fitting. # Female threaded outlets are available to NPT and BSPT specifications. @ These pressure ratings are general guidelines. Please consult Publication 10.01 for specific pressure ratings by type of pipe. (a) British Standard female pipe threaded outlet is available as listed. Specify “BSPT” clearly on order. (b) For 76.1 mm threaded outlet, specify 2½" BSPT clearly on order. § Not VdS approved for fire protection services. All other sizes for Style 920/920N are VdS approved. ¤ Not LPCB approved for fire protection services. All other sizes for Style 920/920N are LPCB approved. ø Approved for use in China by Tianjin Approvals Company. Y V W Z Y T V W Z Mechanical-T Bolted Branch Outlet (cont'd) STYLE 920/920N Grooved Outlet/Female Thd. Outlet For Complete Information Request Publication 11.02 GROOVED OUTLET FEMALE THREADED OUTLET IMPORTANT NOTES: Style 920 and Style 920N housings cannot be mated to one another to achieve cross connections. • Provides a direct branch connection at any location where a hole can be cut in the pipe • A pressure responsive gasket provides the seal • Request Publication 11.03 for Mechanical-T cross assemblies • Pressure rated up to 400 psi/2750 kPa • Sizes from 2 × ½"/ 50 × 15 mm through 8 × 4"/200 × 100 mm WWW.VICTAULIC.COM 31 Hole Cut Piping System HOLE CUT PIPING SYSTEM SUBMITTAL COVER (Attach to each submitted) 300 State Street, Suite 201, Rochester, NY 14614 Contractor’s Submittal No. 211313-003 Phone 585.454.6110 Fax 585.454.3066 A/E Submittal No. 211313-003 www.labellapc.com Contractor: Address: Phone / E-Mail: (585) 271-5256 / pike@pikeco.com Type of Submittal (check one) Product Data Color Selection O&M Manual Date of Submittal: 12/16/2013 Shop Drawings Sample Record Document Resubmitted: Substitution Yes No Product Identification Contractor Approval Specification Section No.: Identify that this submittal has been Contract Dwg. No.: approved by the Contractor in Product Name: accordance with the General Conditions Part/Paragraph: Manufacturer: By: Date: Contractor Comments: (A/E Use Only) Architect / Engineer Comments: Reviewed Revise and Resubmit Rejected Furnish as Noted Corrections or comments made on the shop drawings during this review do not relieve the contractor from compliance with requirements of the drawings and specifications. This check is only for review of general conformance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. The contractor is responsible for confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions; selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction; coordinating his work with that of all other trades; and performing his work in a safe and satisfactory manner. LaBella Associates, P.C. By: Caren Rubin Date: 12/17/2013 The PIKE Company, Inc. One Circle Street Rochester, NY 14607 1. Cornell University East Sibley Hall, Third Floor LaBella Project #213072 The PIKE Company SUBMITTAL COVER BY THIS SUBMITTAL HAS BEEN REVIEWED ARCHITECT'S STAMP WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE PIKE COMPANY AS COMPLYING BY: _____________________ DATE: RECEIVED STAMPS 12/16/2013 PIKE JOB NO:13897 PROJECT NO: 12/16/2013DATE:Pike Submittal No: 211313-003 General Contracting The Pike Company, Inc. Construction Management One Circle Street, Rochester, NY 14607 Phone: (585) 271-5256 / 800 264 PIKE / Fax: (585) 271-3101Specialty Contracting Facility Service E-mail: pike@pikeco.com / Online: www.pikeco.com Program Management DESCRIPTION OF SUBMITTAL: REFERENCES:Spec. Section:Review Cycle No.:211313 Remarks: Smith-Cooper Cast Iron Threaded Fittings Wet Pipe Sprinkler SystemsSUBMITTAL NAME: Drawings:Supplier: Albany - Phone: (518) 371-5900 Pike Branch Offices: Hartford, CT - Phone: (860) 251-8000 TYPE OF SUBMITTAL:Product Data 001 Davis-Ulmer Fire Protection PROJECT NAME:Sibley Hall OWNER: ARCHITECT:The Pike Company, Inc. Norm Rockefeller ®Expedition form sb_20b * ALL FITTINGS 100% AIR TESTED * ANSI B16.4 * ISO 9002 MANUFACTURER * ASTM A126 * LISTED/APPROVED AT 300 PSI * ANSI B 1.20.1 Cast Iron 90° Elbow Figure 37E Cast Iron 45° Elbow Figure 37F Size Size A Wgt/lbs. 1/2 1 1.26 0.83 3/4 1-1/4 1.29 1.33 1 1-1/2 1.44 1.79 1-1/4 2 1.69 2.89 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 Cast Iron Tee Figure 37T Cast Iron Reducing 90° Elbow Figure 37RE Size A Wgt/lbs. 1/2 1.13 0.56 3/4 1.31 0.84 1 1.50 1.25 1-1/4 1.75 2.03 Size A Wgt/lbs.1-1/2 1.94 2.70 1 x 1/2 1.36 0.67 2 2.25 4.23 1 x 3/4 1.45 0.76 1-1/4 x 1/2 1.53 1.07 1-1/4 x 3/4 1.63 1.02 Cast Iron Hex Reducing Coupling Figure 37RC 1-1/4 x 1 1.67 1.21 1-1/2 x 1/2 1.75 1.53 1-1/2 x 3/4 1.75 1.55 1-1/2 x 1 1.80 1.44 1-1/2 x 1-1/4 1.88 1.74 2 x 1/2 1.97 2.22 2 x 3/4 1.97 2.20 2 x 1 2.02 2.08 Size A Wgt/lbs. 2 x 1-1/2 2.16 2.59 1 x 1/2 1.69 0.54 1 x 3/4 1.69 0.63 2 x 1(not hex)2.81 1.83 1.31 1.50 Cast Iron Threaded Fittings SMITH - COOPER I N T E R N A T I O N A L A 1.26 Wgt/lbs. 0.40 0.60 1.75 1.94 2.25 2.70 0.92 1.44 1.95 3.13 4.94 B 1.26 1.38 1.34 1.45 1.58 1.52 1.52 1.73 2.02 1.65 1.82 1.60 1.60 Cast Iron Threaded Fittings * ALL FITTINGS 100% AIR TESTED *ANSI B16.4 * ISO 9002 MANUFACTURER * ASTM A126 * LISTED/APPROVED AT 300 PSI *ANSI B 1.20.1 Cast Iron Reducing Tee Figure 37RT Cast Iron Reducing Tee Con't Figure 37RT Size A B C Wgt. 1-1/2 x 1-1/2 x 3/4 1.52 1.52 1.75 1.95 1-1/2 x 1-1/2 x 1 1.65 1.65 1.80 2.13 1-1/2 x 1-1/2 x 1-1/4 1.82 1.82 1.88 2.44 2 x 1 x 2 2.25 2.02 2.25 3.46 2 x 1-1/4 x 2 2.25 2.10 2.25 3.71 2 x 1-1/2 x 1/2 1.49 1.41 1.88 2.34 Size A B C Wgt.2 x 1-1/2 x 3/4 1.60 1.52 1.97 2.46 1 x 1/2 x 1 1.50 1.36 1.50 1.08 2 x 1-1/2 x 1 1.73 1.65 2.02 2.66 1 x 3/4 x 1 1.50 1.45 1.50 1.13 2 x 1-1/2 x 1-1/4 1.90 1.82 2.10 2.98 1 x 1 x 1/2 1.26 1.26 1.36 1.01 2 x 1-1/2 x 1-1/2 2.02 1.94 2.16 3.24 1 x 1 x 3/4 1.38 1.38 1.45 1.11 2 x 1-1/2 x 2 2.25 2.16 2.25 3.70 1-1/4 x 1/2 x 1-1/4 1.75 1.53 1.75 1.64 2 x 2 x 1/2 1.49 1.49 1.88 2.74 1-1/4 x 3/4 x 1-1/4 1.75 1.62 1.75 1.73 2 x 2 x 3/4 1.60 1.60 1.97 2.86 1-1/4 x 1 x 1/2 1.34 1.26 1.53 1.27 2 x 2 x 1 1.73 1.73 2.02 3.05 1-1/4 x 1 x 3/4 1.45 1.38 1.63 1.36 2 x 2 x 1-1/4 1.90 1.90 2.10 3.38 1-1/4 x 1 x 1 1.58 1.50 1.69 1.53 2 x 2 x 1-1/2 2.02 2.02 2.16 3.59 1-1/4 x 1 x 1-1/4 1.75 1.69 1.75 1.79 1-1/4 x 1-1/4 x 1/2 1.34 1.34 1.53 1.47 1-1/4 x 1-1/4 x 3/4 1.45 1.45 1.62 1.57 Cast Iron Bull Head Tee Figure 37BT 1-1/4 x 1-1/4 x 1 1.58 1.58 1.67 1.73 1-1/2 x 1/2 x 1-1/4 1.81 1.56 1.88 1.93 1-1/2 x 1/2 x 1-1/2 1.94 1.66 1.94 2.14 1-1/2 x 3/4 x 1-1/4 1.94 1.66 1.88 2.11 1-1/2 x 3/4 x 1-1/2 1.94 1.75 1.94 2.18 1-1/2 x 1 x 1/2 1.44 1.25 1.69 1.75 1-1/2 x 1 x 3/4 1.50 1.44 1.75 1.70 1-1/2 x 1 x 1 1.65 1.50 1.80 1.72 1-1/2 x 1 x 1-1/4 1.82 1.67 1.88 2.08 Size A B C Wgt. 1-1/2 x 1 x 1-1/2 1.94 1.80 1.94 2.29 1 x 1 x 1-1/4 1.67 1.67 1.58 1.49 1-1/2 x 1-1/4 x 1/2 1.41 1.34 1.66 1.67 1-1/4 x 1 x 1-1/2 1.88 1.80 1.82 2.07 1-1/2 x 1-1/4 x 3/4 1.52 1.45 1.75 1.79 1-1/4 x 1-1/4 x 1-1/2 1.88 1.88 1.82 2.29 1-1/2 x 1-1/4 x 1 1.65 1.58 1.80 1.97 1-1/2 x 1-1/4 x 2 2.16 2.10 2.02 3.07 1-1/2 x 1-1/4 x 1-1/4 1.82 1.75 1.88 2.28 1-1/2 x 1-1/2 x 2 2.16 2.16 2.02 3.23 1-1/2 x 1-1/4 x 1-1/2 1.94 1.88 1.94 2.50 2 x 2 x 2-1/2 2.60 2.60 2.39 5.17 1-1/2 x 1-1/2 x 1/2 1.41 1.41 1.66 1.84 All Weights in Pounds Smith-Cooper International 1057 So. Vail Ave., Montebello, CA 90640 Tel: (323) 890-4455, (800) 766-0076 Fax: (323) 890-4456 www.smithcooper.com I N T E R N A T I O N A L SMITH - COOPER SUBMITTAL COVER (Attach to each submitted) 300 State Street, Suite 201, Rochester, NY 14614 Contractor’s Submittal No. 211313-002 Phone 585.454.6110 Fax 585.454.3066 A/E Submittal No. 211313-002 www.labellapc.com Contractor: Address: Phone / E-Mail: (585) 271-5256 / pike@pikeco.com Type of Submittal (check one) Product Data Color Selection O&M Manual Date of Submittal: 12/16/2013 Shop Drawings Sample Record Document Resubmitted: Substitution Yes No Product Identification Contractor Approval Specification Section No.: Identify that this submittal has been Contract Dwg. No.: approved by the Contractor in Product Name: accordance with the General Conditions Part/Paragraph: Manufacturer: By: Date: Contractor Comments: (A/E Use Only) Architect / Engineer Comments: Reviewed Revise and Resubmit Rejected Furnish as Noted Corrections or comments made on the shop drawings during this review do not relieve the contractor from compliance with requirements of the drawings and specifications. This check is only for review of general conformance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. The contractor is responsible for confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions; selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction; coordinating his work with that of all other trades; and performing his work in a safe and satisfactory manner. LaBella Associates, P.C. By: Caren Rubin Date: 12/17/2013 The PIKE Company, Inc. One Circle Street Rochester, NY 14607 1. Cornell University East Sibley Hall, Third Floor LaBella Project #213072 The PIKE Company SUBMITTAL COVER BY THIS SUBMITTAL HAS BEEN REVIEWED ARCHITECT'S STAMP WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE PIKE COMPANY AS COMPLYING BY: _____________________ DATE: RECEIVED STAMPS 12/16/2013 PIKE JOB NO:13897 PROJECT NO: 12/16/2013DATE:Pike Submittal No: 211313-002 General Contracting The Pike Company, Inc. Construction Management One Circle Street, Rochester, NY 14607 Phone: (585) 271-5256 / 800 264 PIKE / Fax: (585) 271-3101Specialty Contracting Facility Service E-mail: pike@pikeco.com / Online: www.pikeco.com Program Management DESCRIPTION OF SUBMITTAL: REFERENCES:Spec. Section:Review Cycle No.:211313 Remarks: Wheatland Schedule 40 Pipe Wet Pipe Sprinkler SystemsSUBMITTAL NAME: Drawings:Supplier: Albany - Phone: (518) 371-5900 Pike Branch Offices: Hartford, CT - Phone: (860) 251-8000 TYPE OF SUBMITTAL:Product Data 001 Davis-Ulmer Fire Protection PROJECT NAME:Sibley Hall OWNER: ARCHITECT:The Pike Company, Inc. Norm Rockefeller ®Expedition form sb_20b Wheatland Schedule 40 Pipe Wheatland Schedule 40 Pipe Wheatland Steel Pipe is made by specialists who understand that it's the small details that make the difference between average products and superior products. At the Wheatland Plant, most department heads and foremen have been employed in some phase of pipe manufacturing for 25 or more years. This kind of specialization, experience and knowledge pays off...in workable, threadable, uniform pipe. Delivered clean. Delivered promptly. Wheatland specializes in manufacturing welded steel pipe in 1/2 through 4 nominal sizes. Available inventory in 1/8 to 12 pipe sizes produced to various ASTM standards is maintained to meet your pipe requirements. Care, pride and personal concern are bonus features that go into every inch of Wheatland Pipe. Don't settle for less. Make sure it's quality. Make sure it's Wheatland. Standard Pipe Schedule 40 Nominal Pipe Size Outside Diameter (inches) Inside Diameter (inches) Wall Thickness (inches) Weight per foot (Lbs.) Plain End Threads & Couplings 1/8 .405 .269 .068 .24 .24 1/4 .540 .364 .088 .42 .42 3/8 .675 .493 .091 .57 .57 1/2 .840 .622 .109 .85 .85 3/4 1.050 .824 .113 1.13 1.13 1 1.315 1.049 .133 1.68 1.68 1-1/4 1.660 1.380 .140 2.27 2.28 http://www.wheatland.com/sch40.htm (1 of 3)2/18/2005 9:31:07 AM Wheatland Schedule 40 Pipe 1-1/2 1.900 1.610 .145 2.72 2.73 2 2.375 2.067 .154 3.65 3.68 2-1/2 2.875 2.469 .203 5.79 5.82 3 3.500 3.068 .216 7.58 7.62 3-1/2 4.000 3.548 .226 9.11 9.20 4 4.500 4.026 .237 10.79 10.89 5 5.563 5.047 .258 14.62 14.81 6 6.625 6.065 .280 18.97 19.18 8 8.625 7.981 .322 28.55 29.35 10 10.750 10.020 .365 40.48 41.85 Standard Pipe 12¹12.750 12.000 .375 49.56 51.15 Note: ¹ NPS 12 dimensions are for standard wall pipe, not schedule 40. Product Type and Specification: Standard welded pipe is produced in 1/8 to 4 trade sizes. Trade sizes 1/8 to 4 are available in seamless or electric resistance welded. Trade sizes 1/8 to 4 are produced to ASTM A 53, A 501*, and A 589* Type II, API 5L and Federal Specification WW-P404. Trade sizes 5 and up are produced to ASTM A 53 and API 5L. All pipe threads conform to ANSI B1.20.1. Merchant couplings comply with ASTM A 865. * 1/2 through 4 only Permissible Variations for ASTM A 53-A Pipe O.D.Over Under Length 1/8" to 1 1/2"1/64" 1/64" 2" and up 1%1% Wall Thichness at Any Point -------12.5% ASTM A 53-A: Black and Galvanized Pipe is manufactured for ordinary uses in steam, water, gas, and air lines. Mechanical Properties: Yield: 30,000 psi minimum Tensile: 48,000 psi minimum http://www.wheatland.com/sch40.htm (2 of 3)2/18/2005 9:31:07 AM Wheatland Schedule 40 Pipe For additional information or to order, contact our pipe department at 800.257.8182, Fax: 856.854.0616, or e-mail info@wheatland.com Go to | Home Page | Pipe| Sprinkler| Last Update 08/08/2001 10:21:37 Webmaster: Marty Brett marty.brett@wheatland.com Copyright© 1995,2001 Wheatland Tube Company http://www.wheatland.com/sch40.htm (3 of 3)2/18/2005 9:31:07 AM SUBMITTAL COVER (Attach to each submitted) 300 State Street, Suite 201, Rochester, NY 14614 Contractor’s Submittal No. 211313-001 Phone 585.454.6110 Fax 585.454.3066 A/E Submittal No. 211313-001 www.labellapc.com Contractor: Address: Phone / E-Mail: (585) 271-5256 / pike@pikeco.com Type of Submittal (check one) Welding Cert.s Color Selection O&M Manual Date of Submittal: 12/16/2013 Shop Drawings Sample Record Document Resubmitted: Substitution Yes No Product Identification Contractor Approval Specification Section No.: Identify that this submittal has been Contract Dwg. No.: approved by the Contractor in Product Name: accordance with the General Conditions Part/Paragraph: Manufacturer: By: Date: Contractor Comments: (A/E Use Only) Architect / Engineer Comments: Reviewed Revise and Resubmit Rejected Furnish as Noted Corrections or comments made on the shop drawings during this review do not relieve the contractor from compliance with requirements of the drawings and specifications. This check is only for review of general conformance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. The contractor is responsible for confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions; selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction; coordinating his work with that of all other trades; and performing his work in a safe and satisfactory manner. LaBella Associates, P.C. By: Caren Rubin Date: 12/17/2013 The PIKE Company, Inc. One Circle Street Rochester, NY 14607 1. Cornell University East Sibley Hall, Third Floor LaBella Project #213072 The PIKE Company SUBMITTAL COVER BY THIS SUBMITTAL HAS BEEN REVIEWED ARCHITECT'S STAMP WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE PIKE COMPANY AS COMPLYING BY: _____________________ DATE: RECEIVED STAMPS 12/16/2013 PIKE JOB NO:13897 PROJECT NO: 12/16/2013DATE:Pike Submittal No: 211313-001 General Contracting The Pike Company, Inc. Construction Management One Circle Street, Rochester, NY 14607 Phone: (585) 271-5256 / 800 264 PIKE / Fax: (585) 271-3101Specialty Contracting Facility Service E-mail: pike@pikeco.com / Online: www.pikeco.com Program Management DESCRIPTION OF SUBMITTAL: REFERENCES:Spec. Section:Review Cycle No.:211313 Remarks: Welding Certificates Wet Pipe Sprinkler SystemsSUBMITTAL NAME: Drawings:Supplier: Albany - Phone: (518) 371-5900 Pike Branch Offices: Hartford, CT - Phone: (860) 251-8000 TYPE OF SUBMITTAL: 001 Davis-Ulmer Fire Protection PROJECT NAME:Sibley Hall OWNER: ARCHITECT:The Pike Company, Inc. Norm Rockefeller ®Expedition form sb_20b SUBMITTAL COVER (Attach to each submitted) 300 State Street, Suite 201, Rochester, NY 14614 Contractor’s Submittal No. 210553-002 Phone 585.454.6110 Fax 585.454.3066 A/E Submittal No. www.labellapc.com Contractor: Address: Phone / E-Mail: (585) 271-5256 / pike@pikeco.com Type of Submittal (check one) Product Data Color Selection O&M Manual Date of Submittal: 04/17/2014 Shop Drawings Sample Record Document Resubmitted: Substitution Yes No Product Identification Contractor Approval Specification Section No.: Identify that this submittal has been Contract Dwg. No.: approved by the Contractor in Product Name: accordance with the General Conditions Part/Paragraph: Manufacturer: By: Date: Contractor Comments: (A/E Use Only) Architect / Engineer Comments: Reviewed Revise and Resubmit Rejected Furnish as Noted Corrections or comments made on the shop drawings during this review do not relieve the contractor from compliance with requirements of the drawings and specifications. This check is only for review of general conformance wit h the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. The contractor is responsible for confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions; selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction; coordinating his work with that of all other trades; and performing his work in a safe and satisfactory manner. LaBella Associates, P.C. By: Caren Rubin Date: 04/22/2014 The PIKE Company, Inc. One Circle Street Rochester, NY 14607 Cornell University East Sibley Hall, Third Floor LaBella Project #213072 SUBMITTAL COVER (Attach to each submitted) 300 State Street, Suite 201, Rochester, NY 14614 Contractor’s Submittal No. 210553-002 Phone 585.454.6110 Fax 585.454.3066 A/E Submittal No. www.labellapc.com Contractor: Address: Phone / E-Mail: (585) 271-5256 / pike@pikeco.com Type of Submittal (check one) Product Data Color Selection O&M Manual Date of Submittal: 04/17/2014 Shop Drawings Sample Record Document Resubmitted: Substitution Yes No Product Identification Contractor Approval Specification Section No.: Identify that this submittal has been Contract Dwg. No.: approved by the Contractor in Product Name: accordance with the General Conditions Part/Paragraph: Manufacturer: By: Date: Contractor Comments: (A/E Use Only) Architect / Engineer Comments: Reviewed Revise and Resubmit Rejected Furnish as Noted Corrections or comments made on the shop drawings during this review do not relieve the contractor from compliance with requirements of the drawings and specifications. This check is only for review of general conformance wit h the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. The contractor is responsible for confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions; selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction; coordinating his work with that of all other trades; and performing his work in a safe and satisfactory manner. LaBella Associates, P.C. By: Caren Rubin Date: 04/22/2014 The PIKE Company, Inc. One Circle Street Rochester, NY 14607 Cornell University East Sibley Hall, Third Floor LaBella Project #213072 SUBMITTAL COVER (Attach to each submitted) 300 State Street, Suite 201, Rochester, NY 14614 Contractor’s Submittal No. 210518-001 Phone 585.454.6110 Fax 585.454.3066 A/E Submittal No. www.labellapc.com Contractor: Address: Phone / E-Mail: (585) 271-5256 / pike@pikeco.com Type of Submittal (check one) Product Data Color Selection O&M Manual Date of Submittal: 04/17/2014 Shop Drawings Sample Record Document Resubmitted: Substitution Yes No Product Identification Contractor Approval Specification Section No.: Identify that this submittal has been Contract Dwg. No.: approved by the Contractor in Product Name: accordance with the General Conditions Part/Paragraph: Manufacturer: By: Date: Contractor Comments: (A/E Use Only) Architect / Engineer Comments: Reviewed Revise and Resubmit Rejected Furnish as Noted Corrections or comments made on the shop drawings during this review do not relieve the contractor from compliance with requirements of the drawings and specifications. This check is only for review of general conformance wit h the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. The contractor is responsible for confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions; selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction; coordinating his work with that of all other trades; and performing his work in a safe and satisfactory manner. LaBella Associates, P.C. By: Caren Rubin Date: 04/22/2014 The PIKE Company, Inc. One Circle Street Rochester, NY 14607 Cornell University East Sibley Hall, Third Floor LaBella Project #213072 SUBMITTAL COVER (Attach to each submitted) 300 State Street, Suite 201, Rochester, NY 14614 Contractor’s Submittal No. 210518-001 Phone 585.454.6110 Fax 585.454.3066 A/E Submittal No. www.labellapc.com Contractor: Address: Phone / E-Mail: (585) 271-5256 / pike@pikeco.com Type of Submittal (check one) Product Data Color Selection O&M Manual Date of Submittal: 04/17/2014 Shop Drawings Sample Record Document Resubmitted: Substitution Yes No Product Identification Contractor Approval Specification Section No.: Identify that this submittal has been Contract Dwg. No.: approved by the Contractor in Product Name: accordance with the General Conditions Part/Paragraph: Manufacturer: By: Date: Contractor Comments: (A/E Use Only) Architect / Engineer Comments: Reviewed Revise and Resubmit Rejected Furnish as Noted Corrections or comments made on the shop drawings during this review do not relieve the contractor from compliance with requirements of the drawings and specifications. This check is only for review of general conformance wit h the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. The contractor is responsible for confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions; selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction; coordinating his work with that of all other trades; and performing his work in a safe and satisfactory manner. LaBella Associates, P.C. By: Caren Rubin Date: 04/22/2014 The PIKE Company, Inc. One Circle Street Rochester, NY 14607 Cornell University East Sibley Hall, Third Floor LaBella Project #213072 LEVENBETTS ! 508 W 26 ST 317 NEW YORK NEW YORK 10001 T 212 242 1414 WEB WWW.LEVENBETTS.COM ! SUBMITTAL COVER Project Name: Cornell University, East Sibley Hall, Third Floor Owner: Cornell University To: The Pike Company Attn: Norm Rockefeller Address : One Circle Street Rochester, NY 14607 ! Contractors Submittal # 114850-001! Date of Submittal: 01/08/2014! Date of Response: 01/22/2014! ! ! ! ! ! Type of Submittal Product Data Color Selection O&M Manual Shop Drawings Sample Record Document Substitution Yes No Product Identification Contract Dwg. No.: Product Name: Part/Paragraph: Manufacturer: Comments ! ! ! ! (Architect Use Only) Reviewed Revise and Resubmit Rejected Furnish as Noted Corrections or comments made on submittals and/or shop drawings during this review do not relieve the contractor from compliance with requirements of the drawings and specifications. This check is only for review of general conformance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. The contractor is responsible for confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions; selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction; coordinating his work with that of all other trades; and performing his work in a safe and satisfactory manner. By: Andrew Feuerstein, LEVENBETTS Date: 01/22/14! !! Architect Comments 1. Provide finishes as noted. ! The PIKE Company SUBMITTAL COVER BY THIS SUBMITTAL HAS BEEN REVIEWED ARCHITECT'S STAMP WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE PIKE COMPANY AS COMPLYING BY: _____________________ DATE: RECEIVED STAMPS 1/8/2014 PIKE JOB NO:13897 PROJECT NO: 1/8/2014DATE:Pike Submittal No: 114580-001 General Contracting The Pike Company, Inc. Construction Management One Circle Street, Rochester, NY 14607 Phone: (585) 271-5256 / 800 264 PIKE / Fax: (585) 271-3101Specialty Contracting Facility Service E-mail: pike@pikeco.com / Online: www.pikeco.com Program Management DESCRIPTION OF SUBMITTAL: REFERENCES:Spec. Section:Review Cycle No.:114580 Remarks: Super Simplex Disappearing Stairway Disappearing StairwellSUBMITTAL NAME: Drawings:Supplier: Albany - Phone: (518) 371-5900 Pike Branch Offices: Hartford, CT - Phone: (860) 251-8000 TYPE OF SUBMITTAL:Product Data & Shop Drawing 001 Precision Ladders, LLC PROJECT NAME:Sibley Hall OWNER: ARCHITECT:The Pike Company, Inc. Norm Rockefeller ®Expedition form sb_20b Precision Ladders, LLC Products are under the following Warranty terms and conditions: Limited One Year Warranty Super Simplex and Automatic Electric Disappearing Stairways manufactured by Precision Ladders, LLC are warrantied to be free from defects, in workmanship and material, under normal use and service, where such defects develop, within 1 year from the date of delivery to the original purchaser. Limited Five Year Warranty Products, other than those listed above, manufactured by Precision Ladders, LLC are warrantied to be free from defects, in workmanship and material, under normal use and service, where such defects develop within 5 years from the date of delivery to the original purchaser. The following standard terms apply for all products listed above: Precision’s obligation under this warranty is limited to replacing or repairing at its factory in Morristown, Tennessee, any part or parts returned with transportation charges prepaid, which Precision’s examination discloses, to its satisfaction, to have been thus defective. This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, expressed, or implied. Precision does not assume, nor authorize any other party to assume for it, any other obligation or liability in connection with the sale or use of its products. This warranty shall not apply to any part or parts which have been altered or repaired outside of the factory, nor to parts which have been subjected to misuse, abuse, neglect, accident or to damage caused by overloading, or to the product where improperly applied or installed. An improper installation or application, or any substitution of parts not manufactured by Precision, shall void this warranty. Precision makes no warranty as to normal wear and tear, nor shall it be liable for loss of time to the user while the product is out of commission, nor for any labor or other expense, damage or loss occasioned, or claimed to be occasioned, by such defective parts. Precision Ladders, LLC Steven M. Richey, President LEVENBETTS 508 W 26 ST 317 NEW YORK NEW YORK 10001 T 212 242 1414 WEB WWW.LEVENBETTS.COM SUBMITTAL COVER Project Name: Cornell University, East Sibley Hall, Third Floor Owner: Cornell University To: The Pike Company Attn: Norm Rockefeller Address : One Circle Street Rochester, NY 14607 Contractors Submittal # 087100-001 Cycle 2 Date of Submittal: 01/30/2014 Date of Response: 02/02/2014 Type of Submittal Product Data Color Selection O&M Manual Shop Drawings Sample Record Document Substitution Yes No Product Identification Contract Dwg. No.: Product Name: Part/Paragraph: Manufacturer: Comments (Architect Use Only) Reviewed Revise and Resubmit Rejected Furnish as Noted Corrections or comments made on submittals and/or shop drawings during this review do not relieve the contractor from compliance with requirements of the drawings and specifications. This check is only for review of general conformance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. The contractor is responsible for confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions; selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction; coordinating his work with that of all other trades; and performing his work in a safe and satisfactory manner. By: Andrew Feuerstein, LEVENBETTS Date: 02/02/14 Architect Comments 1. Revise D oor 401 & 402 handing as noted. The PIKE Company SUBMITTAL COVER BY THIS SUBMITTAL HAS BEEN REVIEWED ARCHITECT'S STAMP WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE PIKE COMPANY AS COMPLYING BY: _____________________ DATE: RECEIVED STAMPS 1/30/2014 PIKE JOB NO:13897 PROJECT NO: 1/30/2014DATE:Pike Submittal No: 087100-001 General Contracting The Pike Company, Inc. Construction Management One Circle Street, Rochester, NY 14607 Phone: (585) 271-5256 / 800 264 PIKE / Fax: (585) 271-3101Specialty Contracting Facility Service E-mail: pike@pikeco.com / Online: www.pikeco.com Program Management DESCRIPTION OF SUBMITTAL: REFERENCES:Spec. Section:Review Cycle No.:087100 Remarks: Hardware Schedule Hardware ScheduleSUBMITTAL NAME: Drawings:Supplier: Albany - Phone: (518) 371-5900 Pike Branch Offices: Hartford, CT - Phone: (860) 251-8000 TYPE OF SUBMITTAL:Product Data & Shop Drawing 002 Kelley Brothers LLC PROJECT NAME:Sibley Hall OWNER: ARCHITECT:The Pike Company, Inc. Norm Rockefeller ®Expedition form sb_20b HARDWARE SCHEDULE Architectural Specification Section #087100 Contractor : Project : Architect : 2014-01-22-REVISEDSubmittals : CU SIBLEY HALL NEW YORK, NY 508 WEST 26TH LEVENBETTS Ph (585) 271-5256 Fax (585) 271-3101 Rochester, NY 14607 One Circle Drive The Pike Co. Distributor : Detailer :Fran Dotts Fran Dotts Elmira, NY 14902 P.O. Box 878 Project Manager : Ph (607) 734-8884 Fax (607) 734-4518 Kelley Bros. 2014-01-02-REVIEW Job ID :7-13-181 1/23/2014 JobID: 7-13-181 CU SIBLEY HALL Architect and General Contractor please note Unless you instruct us otherwise, the hardware will be ordered IMMEDIATELY upon receipt of the APPROVED Hardware Schedule. Any subsequent hardware changes will be treated as EXTRA and excess hardware will be delivered to the job site as "Owners Stock". 1/23/2014 JobID: 7-13-181 CU SIBLEY HALL Please review all finish hardware for accuracy or omissions. Some notes need to be addressed prior to the ordering of any material. Hardware: KELLEY Bros. GENERAL NOTES : 1/23/2014 JobID: 7-13-181 CU SIBLEY HALL Accurate Lock Quantity FinishDescription Code Flush Pull - FC5001EA3 26D 401A DCI Quantity FinishDescription Code Flush Bolt, Extension, Manual - 780FEA1 US26D 201A Floor Stop, Low Dome - 3310XEA4 US26D 700A Marlboro Manufacturing Quantity FinishDescription Code Continuous Hinge - S12009672{1''LHOD}EA4 MILL 101A Continuous Hinge - S12006472{1''LHOD}EA2 MILL 102A McKinney Quantity FinishDescription Code 4-1/2 Std Wt(.134) Hinge - TA2714 4-1/2'' x 4-1/2''EA24 26D 100A Sargent Quantity FinishDescription Code Mortise Lockset - 8255 x LNL x L/CEA2 US26D 301A Mortise Lockset - 50-8225 x LNL x L/CEA1 US26D 302A Mortise Lockset - 8237 x LNL x L/CEA1 US26D 303A Mortise Lockset - 8204 x LNL x L/CEA1 US26D 304A Deadlock, Mortise - 4875 x L/CEA3 US26D 305A Closer - 351-OEA2 EN 502A Hardware Summary 1/23/2014 JobID: 7-13-181 CU SIBLEY HALL 313 6.00 314 3.00 315 5.00 316 4.00 401 7.00 402 7.00 B41 2.00 B47 2.00 DOOR INDEX Door Number KeysetHdwe Set Door Number KeysetHdwe Set 1/23/2014 JobID: 7-13-181 CU SIBLEY HALL Heading #2.00 Number Keyset Location Frame Door Size Label Hand Qty Type B41 B60 1 SNGL3'-0" x 7'-0" x 1-3/4"LMECHANICAL ROOM B- 41 HMHM B47 B60 1 SNGL3'-0" x 7'-0" x 1-3/4"RNEW STORAGE ROOM B- 47 HMHM Qty Act MfrFinishDescriptionQty Inact 3 0 4-1/2 Std Wt(.134) Hinge TA2714 4-1/2'' x 4-1/2''26D McKinney 100A 1 0 Mortise Lockset 8255 x LNL x L/C US26D Sargent 301A 1 0 Closer 351-O EN Sargent 502A 1 0 Floor Stop, Low Dome 3310X US26D DCI 700A Note CYLINDERS TO BE PROVIDED BY CORNELL LOCK SHOP.FIRE RATED DOORS ARE REQUIRED TO BE SELF CLOSING.PLEASE ADVISE IF CLOSERS ARE TO BE ADDED.(CLOSERS ADDED AS PER ARCHITECTS REVIEW.) Heading #3.00 Number Keyset Location Frame Door Size Label Hand Qty Type 314 ---1 SNGL3'-0" x 8'-0" x 1-3/4"LRWATER CLOSET 300TC HMHM Qty Act MfrFinishDescriptionQty Inact 4 0 4-1/2 Std Wt(.134) Hinge TA2714 4-1/2'' x 4-1/2''26D McKinney 100A 1 0 Mortise Lockset 50-8225 x LNL x L/C US26D Sargent 302A 1 0 Floor Stop, Low Dome 3310X US26D DCI 700A Note CYLINDERS TO BE PROVIDED BY CORNELL LOCK SHOP. Heading #4.00 Number Keyset Location Frame Door Size Label Hand Qty Type 316 ---1 SNGL2'-6" x 8'-0" x 1-3/4"RRWATER CLOSET 300TB HMHM Qty Act MfrFinishDescriptionQty Inact 4 0 4-1/2 Std Wt(.134) Hinge TA2714 4-1/2'' x 4-1/2''26D McKinney 100A 1 0 Mortise Lockset 8237 x LNL x L/C US26D Sargent 303A 1 0 Floor Stop, Low Dome 3310X US26D DCI 700A Note CYLINDERS TO BE PROVIDED BY CORNELL LOCK SHOP. 1/23/2014 JobID: 7-13-181 CU SIBLEY HALL Heading #5.00 Number Keyset Location Frame Door Size Label Hand Qty Type 315 ---1 SNGL3'-0" x 8'-0" x 1-3/4"RRJANITOR CLOSET 300JC HMHM Qty Act MfrFinishDescriptionQty Inact 4 0 4-1/2 Std Wt(.134) Hinge TA2714 4-1/2'' x 4-1/2''26D McKinney 100A 1 0 Mortise Lockset 8204 x LNL x L/C US26D Sargent 304A Note CYLINDERS TO BE PROVIDED BY CORNELL LOCK SHOP. Heading #6.00 Number Keyset Location Frame Door Size Label Hand Qty Type 313 ---1 UNPR9'-9 1/2" x 10'-9" x 1-3/4"LRAELECTRIC CLOSET ALHM Qty Act MfrFinishDescriptionQty Inact 2 2 Continuous Hinge S12009672{1''LHOD}MILL Marlboro Manufacturing 101A 0 2 Continuous Hinge S12006472{1''LHOD}MILL Marlboro Manufacturing 102A 0 1 Flush Bolt, Extension, Manual 780F US26D DCI 201A 1 0 Deadlock, Mortise 4875 x L/C US26D Sargent 305A 1 0 Flush Pull FC5001 26D Accurate Lock 401A Note CYLINDERS TO BE PROVIDED BY CORNELL LOCK SHOP. NOTE: ADDITIONAL CONTINUOUS HINGE(S) ADDED PER ASI 01 OF 1-14-14. Heading #7.00 Number Keyset Location Frame Door Size Label Hand Qty Type 401 ---1 SNGL4'-6 5/8" x 4'-2 5/8" x 1-3/4"LRATTIC ACCESS HMHM 402 ---1 SNGL4'-6 5/8" x 4'-2 5/8" x 1-3/4"RRATTIC ACCESS HMHM Qty Act MfrFinishDescriptionQty Inact 3 0 4-1/2 Std Wt(.134) Hinge TA2714 4-1/2'' x 4-1/2''26D McKinney 100A 1 0 Deadlock, Mortise 4875 x L/C US26D Sargent 305A 1 0 Flush Pull FC5001 26D Accurate Lock 401A Note CYLINDERS TO BE PROVIDED BY CORNELL LOCK SHOP. 1/23/2014 JobID: 7-13-181 CU SIBLEY HALL MANUAL FLUSH BOLTS Solid Brass or Bronze Material Top Strike Std. ANSI A115.4 Top Frame Operation No. 780F—Rod lengths available. All rods have 1/2" adjustment for door and strike clearance. Conforms to ANSI/BHMA 156.16, BHMA L14251 Stock Finishes:US Standard: US3, US4, US10, US10B, US26, US26D BHMA Standard: 605, 606, 612, 613, 625, 626 Printed in the U.S.A. - © 2009 C-7 Up to 8' x 10' Metal Door Pairs 3 Hour Fire Rating Up to 8' x 10' Wood Door Pairs 1-1/2 Hour Fire Rating No. 780 F No. 790 F Solid Brass or Bronze Material Top Strike Std. ANSI A115.4 Conforms to ANSI/BHMA 156.16, BHMA L14261 Stock Finishes:US Standard: US3, US4, US10, US10B, US26, US26D BHMA Standard: 605, 606, 612, 613, 625, 626 Listed No. R13354 No. 790F Template No. 780F Template DOME STOPS Printed in the U.S.A. - © 2009 D-4 No. 3310X—Solid cast brass or bronze. Conforms to ANSI/BHMA 156.16. Durable rubber cushion. No. 3300R—Cast aluminum stack riser for 3310X dome stop (3/8" riser). Finishes:US Standard: US3, US4, US10, US10B, US26, US26D BHMA Standard: 605, 606, 612, 613, 625, 626 No. 3320X—Solid cast brass or bronze. Conforms to ANSI/BHMA 156.16. Durable rubber cushion. Finishes:US Standard: US3, US4, US10, US10B, US26, US26D BHMA Standard: 605, 606, 612, 613, 625, 626 Fasteners:3310X and 3320X dome stops are individually pack- aged with wood screws, machine screws, lead shields, and plastic anchors. 3310X anchor post will accommodate one 3300R riser. No. 3320X No. 3310X McKINNEY Hinge Catalog Full Mortise Bearing Hinges Five Knuckle Standard Weight Series 34 An ASSAABLOY Group companyJanuary 20041-800-346-7707 www.mckinneyhinge.com © McKINNEY Products Company 2006 • NRP (non-removable pin) TB (ball bearing) • TCA (concealed bearing) • RC (round corner - 1⁄4"radius furnished unless specified otherwise) • HT (hospital tip) • BT (ball tip) • ST (steeple tip) • SSF (safety stud feature) • QC (ElectroLynx hinge) 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 or 12 wire available • CC (concealed circuit) 4, 6 or 8 wire available* • CS- (concealed switch - handing required)* • MM (magnetic monitoring) • “S” (sherardizing, our additional rust resistant base under prime coat on steel base) • Slip In (Type 1 or Type 2) • Beveled Edge (where doors are beveled on hinge side specify TA4314 or TA4714) * Not available in Stainless All standard weight full mortise non-ferrous hinges are packed with all machine x 1⁄2 wood screws. Steel hinges (except USP) are packed all machine x all wood screws. For special screws consult price book on availability. Recommended for standard weight, medium frequency doors, or doors with closing devices. Stainless steel base or available in brass or bronze base material polished and plated or furnished in prime or powder coat. Steel base polished and plated or furnished in prime or powder coat finish. 31⁄2 x 31⁄2 88.9 x 88.9 .123 4 x 4 101.6 x 101.6 .130 41⁄2 x 4 114.3 x 101.6 .134 41⁄2 x 41⁄2 114.3 x 114.3 .134 5 x 41⁄2 127 x 114.3 .146 5 x 5 127 x 127 .146 6 x 6* 152.4 x 152.4 .160 *Not available in Stainless Available Sizes Inches MM Gauge TA2314 TA2714 Available Options: A2112 Brass, Bronze A5112 Stainless A8112 Steel ANSI Cross Reference: Packing: APPLICATION 351 Series Powerglide®Door Closer Features and Benefits 1-800-727-5477 www.sargentlock.com 3An ASSAABLOY Group company 12/15/05© SARGENT Manufacturing Company 2005The 351 Series complies with ADA for reduced open forces of 5 lbs. for interior and 8 lbs. for exterior doors. HEAT TREATED STEEL SPINDLE “O” RING SEAL GLAND NEEDLE BEARINGS NON HANDED COVER INSERT IS REMOVABLE AND PLACED IN UNUSED OPENING 5/8" SPRING POWER ADJUSTMENT NUT CAPTIVATED ADJUSTING VALVES Features • ANSI/BHMA A156.4 Grade 1 • Conforms to UL10C and UBC for positive pressure fire test • UL Listed and cUL Listed to Canadian Safety Standards listed for use on fire doors • 10-year or 10 million cycle warranty • Versatile mounting applications permit standard, top jamb, parallel and track installations • Adjustable spring power allows 351 closers a size range of 1 through 6. They are adjusted to size 3 before leaving the factory • One door closer body for all applications. All 351 are non-handed. • Meets ADA requirements in all applications except Push Side Track application • High impact non-corrosive plastic covers standard, metal optional. Both secured with two machine screws • All weather capabilities • Captivated brass valves Full Complement of Arm Types • Interchangeable forged steel arms • Standard and parallel arms • Push and pull track arms (including double egress) • Heavy duty forged steel arms are finely finished and interchangeable between SARGENT 351, 1430 and 281 Series Innovation • SARGENT’s revolutionary SARGuard™available. This antimicrobial silver-based finish coating permanently suppresses the growth of bacteria, algae, fungus, mold and mildew. EPA and NSF approved and FDA listed Heavy Duty Construction • Heat treated full closed rack and pinion provide control from the full open position • Heavy duty one piece die cast aluminum silicon alloy body with 14% silicon provides superior strength and wear resistance Valves • Brass body low sensitivity control valves offer separate regulating for door speed, latching, backcheck and optional delayed action • All valves are controlled by an 1/8" Allen wrench to discourage tampering and are captivated to prevent removing valves from the body and damaging door closer • Adjustable backcheck (standard) protects the door and hardware from damage during the opening cycle • Adjustable delayed action (optional) permits easy access for physically impaired individuals 351 Series Powerglide®Door Closer Arms and Accessories for Standard Application 1-800-727-5477 www.sargentlock.com 5An ASSAABLOY Group company 12/15/05© SARGENT Manufacturing Company 2005OLC - Standard Arm for Low Ceiling • Forged Steel Arm 11-1/4" (286mm) long • Non-handed • Must be used when the distance between the top of door to ceiling is less than 1-1/4" (32mm) • Permits 120° door opening with standard mounting Order as 25-OLC x finish for arm only Includes: 63-2549 - Main arm and link assembly 63-2216 - Foot assembly 63-3684 - Screw pack O8 - Mortise Foot Arm • Forged Steel Arm 11-1/4" (286mm) long • Non-handed • Permits 120° door opening • Commonly used with bull nose frames Order as 25-O8 x finish for arm only Includes: 63-2607 - Main arm and link assembly 63-2273 - Foot assembly 63-2391 & 63-3684 - Screw packs H - Hold Open Arm • Forged Steel Arm 11-1/4" (286mm)long • Non-handed • Hand is changed by inverting the foot assembly • Friction type holder easily adjusted by a wrench • Permits 180° door opening • Holds open from 80° to 180° Order as 25-H x finish for arm only Includes: 63-2229 - Main arm and swivel assembly 61-2303 - Foot assembly 63-3684 - Screw pack F - Fusible Link Hold Open Arm • Forged Steel Arm 11-1/4" (286mm) long • Handed same as door • Friction type holder easily adjusted by a wrench • Holds open from 80° to 140° • 160° F Link Standard • Specify 125°F Link when required Order as 25-F x hand x finish for arm only Includes: 63-2240 - Left hand main arm and link assembly 63-2241 - Right hand main arm and link assembly 63-2468 - Foot assembly 63-3684 - Screw pack H8 - Mortise Foot Hold Open Arm • Forged Steel Arm 11-1/4" (286mm) long • Handed same as door • Friction type holder easily adjusted by a wrench • Holds open from 80° to 180° Order 25 R-H8 for right hand and 25 L-H8 for left hand x finish for arm only Includes: 63-2289 - Left hand foot assembly 63-2290 - Right hand foot assembly 63-2229 - Main Arm and Link Assembly 63-2391 & 63-3684 - Screw packs O - Standard Arm • Forged Steel Arm 11-1/4" (286mm) long • Non-handed • Permits 120° door opening with standard mounting • Permits 180° door opening with alternate mounting or corner bracket Order as 25-O x finish for arm only Includes: 63-2607 - Main arm and link assembly 63-2216 - Foot assembly 63-3684 - Screw pack UO Package • Universal arm package provides brackets and arms to install closer in standard top jamb or parallel applications Order closer as 351-UO x finish Screw packs 63-3684 & 63-2391 125-P9 UH Package • Universal hold open arm package provides brackets and arms to install closer in top jamb, standard or parallel applications Order Closer as 351-UH x finish Screw packs 63-3684 125-PH9 F8 - Mortise Foot Fusible Link Hold Open Arm • Forged Steel Arm 11-1/4" (286mm) long • Handed same as door • Friction type holder easily adjusted by a wrench • Permits 140° door opening • Holds open to 140° • 160° F Link Standard • Specify 125° F Link when required Order as 25-F x hand x finish for arm only Includes: 63-2240 - Left hand main arm assembly 63-2241 - Right hand main arm assembly 61-2273 - Foot assembly 63-3684 - Screw packs 351 Series Powerglide®Door Closer How to Order 1-800-727-5477 www.sargentlock.com 15An ASSAABLOY Group company 12/15/05© SARGENT Manufacturing Company 2005Series Number per Carton Approx. wt per Carton Special Conditions The SARGENT Template Book contains templates for all common applications of SARGENT Door Closers. To ensure a satisfactory installation for other holders, it is recommended that complete details be submitted as follows: •Type, size and make of holder • Submit holder template being used •Holding position (maximum door opening) • Closer application being used •Size and type of butt or hinge In the case of unusual door, frame and hinge conditions where regular templates will not meet requirements prior to order, submit drawings and complete details specifying the degree of door openings required to SARGENT Technical Services. Packing All closer assemblies are packaged 4 per carton. On request, door closers will be be packed 2 per carton. How To Order Complete Door Closer Example Series 351 351 Delayed Action When delayed action is required specify suffix DA 351 DA Arm with Closer See applicable catalog section for arms available 351 DA P10 Finish, powder coated EB — Bronze Enamel to match 10B 351 DA P10 EB on all exposed surfaces ED — Bronze Enamel to match 20D EN — Aluminum Enamel EP — Bronze Enamel to match US10 EAB — Brass Enamel to be used with brass finishes Optional Plated Finishes (Handed metal cover required) Symbol BHMA Description 3 605 Polished Brass 4 606 Dull Brass 9 637 Bright Bronze, Clear Coated 10 612 Dull Bronze 10B 613 Oxidized Dull Bronze, Oil Rubbed 26 625 Chrome 26D 626 Dull Chrome Hand (Applies to FF, PH and DE arms and metal covers only) Non-handed 351 DA P10 EB Thru Bolts and When ordering mortise nuts, use suffix TB 1-3/4"(44.5mm) 351 DA P10 EB TB Mortise Nuts std door thickness. For all others, specify Corrosion Protection Special rust inhibitor process (arm only) suffix SRI 351 DA P10 EB TB SRI for additional protection in corrosive environments Note: SARGuard can be added to your door closer. Specify prefix SG when ordering. How To Order Accessories Example Arm Only Specify arm required and finish 25-PSH EN Arm conversion Units Specify unit and finish 125-P4 EB Cover Only (Standard) 351-C x finish 351-C EN Cover Only (Metal) 351-MC x finish and hand and arm type 351-MC + 26D + LH Accessories Specify accessory and finish - See applicable catalog section 351-D EB When complete closer assembly is ordered with an accessory, order accessory as a separate item 351 4-Standard (2 upon request) 19 lbs. per 4 Screw Prefix 36 — 6 lobe screws PULL SIDE PULL SIDE PUSH SIDE PUSH SIDE LEFT HAND DOOR RIGHT HAND DOOR 8200 Mortise Locks Levers with Rose Designs 1-800-727-5477 www.sargentlock.com 5An ASSA ABLOY Group company 3/01/07©SARGENTManufacturingCompany2004,2005,2007• All lever meet ADA guidelines. • Lever designs C, J, L and P have lever returns within 1/2" (13mm) or less of door face and meet California State Reference Fire Code •All lever designs on this page are available with only with Standard rose and escutcheon designs, which does NOT include Coastal or Studio/Metro designs. • Rose: L-Heavy wrought • Rose: LN-Heavy wrought F Lever Design J Lever Design •Lever: F-Solid forged or cast 4-1/2" (114mm) +/- 1-15/16" (49mm)2-3/4"(67mm)B Lever Design 5-1/4" (133mm) +/- 5/16" (8mm)2-13/16"(71mm)•Lever: J-Solid bar stock 2-5/8"(67mm)5" (127mm) NOTE: All lever height (+/- 1/16") measurements represent total distance from door face. A Lever Design E Lever Design •Lever: A-Solid forged or cast •Must specify hand when ordering 5" (127mm) +/- 1-15/16" (49mm)2-15/16"(51mm)L Lever Design •Lever: E-Solid forged or cast 2-1/2"(64mm)4-1/2" (114mm) +/- 2" (51mm) •Lever: L-Solid forged or cast 5" (127mm)2-3/8"(60mm)5/16" (8mm)3-1/2" (89mm) 2" (51mm) +/- 1-5/8" (41mm) +/- 5/16" (8mm) •Lever: B-Solid forged or cast LN Rose Design E Rose Design W Lever Design 2-1/2"(64mm)4-1/2" (114mm) P Lever Design L Rose Design •Lever: P-Solid forged or cast 5-1/2" (140mm) +/- 5/16" (8mm)2-1/2"(67mm)O Rose Design +/- 2-1/16" (52mm) •Lever: W-Solid bar stock 3-1/16" (78mm) 2-3/4" (67mm) 5/16" (8mm) 5/16" (8mm) 5/16" (8mm) •Rose: E-Heavy wrought •Rose: O-Heavy wrought 10 An ASSA ABLOY Group company3/01/07©SARGENTManufacturingCompany2004,2005,20077800/8200 Mortise Locks Functions 1-800-727-5477 www.sargentlock.com 8204, 7804 • Key outside or lever/knob inside retracts latchbolt • Lever/Knob outside rigid at all times • Lever/Knob inside retracts latchbolt • Auxiliary deadlatch • A Multi-Function Lock Body •ANSI F07 8205, 7805 •Key outside retracts latchbolt when outside lever/knob is locked •Lever/Knob inside retracts latchbolt only, outside Lever/Knob remains locked •Lever/Knob outside is locked/unlocked by thumb turn inside or by key outside •Auxiliary deadlatch • A Multi-Function Lock Body •ANSI F04 The Multi-Function Advantages with Rose Trim: (1) This lock will accommodate 04,05,15 & 37 Functions without additional parts. (2) By adding an additional Cylinder,this lock will accommodate 17 &38 Functions. (3) By adding a Trim One Side Kit, this lock will accommodate 06, 13, 31 & 36 Functions. Note: Office/Entry Function with toggle is available– order as a 55 function. 8206, 7806 •No outside lever/knob, cylinder only •Lever/Knob inside or key outside retracts latchbolt •Auxiliary deadlatch • Same as 04 Function without lever/knob outside •A Multi-Function Lock Body *‡04 Storeroom or Closet *05 Office or Entry 06 Storeroom or Service 8231, 7831 •Key outside retracts latchbolt • Lever/Knob outside is always rigid •Inside: no lever/knob or cylinder • A Multi-Function Lock Body • Auxiliary deadlatch *31 Utility 8236, 7836 • Key outside locks and unlocks outside lever/knob • Lever/Knob outside retracts latchbolt, except when locked • Inside: no lever/knob or cylinder • A Multi-Function Lock Body • Auxiliary deadlatch *36 Closet 8237, 7837 • Key outside locks and unlocks lever/knob outside • Key outside retracts latchbolt • Lever/Knob outside retracts latchbolt, except when outside lever/knob is locked by key • Lever/Knob inside always retracts latchbolt • Auxiliary deadlatch • A Multi-Function Lock Body •ANSI F05 *‡37 Classroom If shaded, knob or lever rigid at all times *8200 Available with Freewheeling Trim ‡7800 Available with Push/Pull Trim CAUTION:Not recommended for use on any door used for Life Safety egress Single Cylinder without Deadbolt 8255, 7855 •Key outside retracts latchbolt when outside lever/knob is locked • Lever/Knob inside retracts latchbolt only, outside Lever/Knob remains locked • Lever/Knob outside is locked by toggle only •Auxiliary deadlatch 55 Office or Entry 8256, 7856 •Key outside retracts latchbolt when outside lever/knob is locked • Lever/Knob inside retracts latchbolt and unlocks outside lever/knob • Lever/Knob outside is locked by thumb turn or key •Auxiliary deadlatch 56 Office & Inner Entry Lock 8267, 7867 • Key outside retracts latchbolt, with override of turn inside when held in locked position •Lever/Knob outside retracts latchbolt except when locked by thumb turn • Lever/Knob outside unlocks when the door closes or operating lever/knob inside •Lever/Knob inside always retracts latchbolt •Auxiliary deadlatch •ANSI F26 67 Institutional Privacy 11An ASSA ABLOY Group company 3/01/07©SARGENTManufacturingCompany2004,2005,20077800/8200 Mortise Locks Functions 1-800-727-5477 www.sargentlock.com 8228, 7828 • Deadbolt operation only •Key outside retracts and projects deadbolt •Lever/Knob inside retracts deadbolt •Lever/Knob outside is always rigid •Thumb turn inside retracts and projects deadbolt 8224, 7824 • Key outside or thumb turn inside retracts and projects deadbolt • Lever/Knob either side retracts latchbolt • Latchbolt and deadbolt are independent of each other •ANSI F21 8227, 7827 • Key outside retracts and projects deadbolt •Lever/Knob from either side retracts latchbolt • Same as 24 function without thumb turn • Latchbolt and deadbolt are independent of each other 8225, 7825 •Key outside or thumb turn inside retracts and projects deadbolt •Lever/Knob from either side retracts latchbolt, when the deadbolt is in the retracted position •Lever/Knob outside is locked, when the deadbolt is projected •When deadbolt is projected, lever/knob inside retracts latchbolt and deadbolt simultaneously,unlocking outside lever/knob •ANSI F13 8230, 7830 • Deadbolt operation only • Key outside retracts and projects deadbolt • Lever/Knob inside retracts deadbolt • Lever/Knob outside is always rigid • Same as 28 Function without a thumb turn 28 Dummy Trim Deadlock *‡24 Storeroom Door *25 Dormitory or Exit 27 Closet or Storeroom 30 Dummy Trim Deadlock 8235, 7835 • Key outside retracts and projects deadbolt • Lever/Knob outside retracts latchbolt, except when deadbolt is projected • Inside: no lever/knob or cylinder *35 Storeroom 8289 • Key outside retracts latchbolt when lever/knob outside is locked • Lever/Knob outside retracts latchbolt, unless locked by key outside • Lever/Knob inside is always active • Auxiliary deadlatch • Latch hold back - set by rotating lever all the way down, then rotate key twice toward latchbolt. Lever will remain in rotated position for unlocked indication. 89 Holdback 8291 • Key outside retracts latchbolt • Key outside can lock latchbolt in retracted position • Lever/Knob inside retracts latchbolt • There is no outside lever or knob • Auxiliary deadlatch • Latch hold back - set by rotating lever all the way down, then rotate key twice toward latchbolt. Lever will remain in rotated position for unlocked indication 91 All Purpose Holdback Single Cylinder with Deadbolt If shaded, knob or lever rigid at all times *8200 Available with Freewheeling Trim ‡7800 Available with Push/Pull Trim CAUTION:Not recommended for use on any door used for Life Safety egress 8243, 7843 •Key outside or thumb turn inside retracts and projects deadbolt • Key outside retracts both latchbolt and deadbolt, lever/knob outside remains locked •Lever/Knob from either side retracts latchbolt, except when lever/knob outside is locked • Lever/Knob outside is locked by toggle or projecting deadbolt •Lever/Knob outside is unlocked by toggle only • Lever/Knob inside (when deadbolt is projected) retracts latchbolt and deadbolt simultaneously, and lever/knob outside remains locked •Auxiliary deadlatch •ANSI F20 ‡43 Apartment Corridor Door • For both curved and flat lip strikes •Optional- ordering with lockset specify suffix WBS. 17An ASSA ABLOY Group company 3/01/07©SARGENTManufacturingCompany2004,2005,20077800/8200 Mortise Locks Strikes and Fronts 1-800-727-5477 www.sargentlock.com Curved Lip Strike (Standard) 3⁄32" (2mm) Thick 1-3⁄4" (45mm) 1-1⁄32" (26mm) Curved Lip Strike 4-7⁄8"(124mm)11/16" (17mm) 3⁄32" (2mm) Thick 1-1⁄2" (38mm) 11/16" (17mm) 1/8" (3mm) Thick 1-1/4" (32mm) or 1-1/16" (27mm) 6-1/2" (165.1mm) Outside Front Plate 8"(203mm)Standard 1-1/4" 1-1/16" Functions (32mm) (27mm) 82-0080 82-0235 15, 65 82-0081 82-0236 04, 05, 06, 13, 16, 17, 31, 36, 37, 38, 67 82-0082 82-0237 03, 20, 21, 22, 23, 28, 29, 30 82-0083 82-0238 24, 25, 26, 27, 35, 39, 66, 68 82-0084 82-0239 40, 41, 50, 52, 57 82-0086 82-0241 45, 46, 47, 48 82-0087 82-0242 43 82-0088 82-0587 89, 90, 91, 92 82-0578 82-0588 70, 71, 72, 73 82-0578 – 78, 79 82-0579 –76, 77 82-0627 – 95, 96, 97 82-0085 82-0240 55 Outside Front Plate Door Thickness Part No.Part No. RHRB LHRB 1-3⁄4" (44mm) 82-0332 82-0333 2" (51mm) 82-0334 82-0335 2-1⁄4" (57mm) 82-0336 82-0337 2-1⁄2" (64mm) 82-0338 82-0339 2-3⁄4"(70mm)82-0340 82-0341 3"(76mm)82-0342 82-0343 877 Open Back Strike • Strike handed by active leaf • All strikes: Brass, bronze or stainless steel. • To order strikes separately, specify strike part number and finish • Strikes ordered separately are furnished with machine screws • Order strike box 77-1141 separately • All locks are packed standard with a universal non-handed curved lip ANSI 4-7⁄8"(124mm) strike. • Specify part number when ordering with complete lock • See chart below for part number and lip lengths • Open back strike not available for deadbolt functions Door Thickness Part No. Lip Length Double Door 82-0229 7/8" (23mm) 1-3/8" - 1-1/2" 82-0109 1-1⁄8" (29mm) (35mm) (38mm) 1-5/8" - 1-3/4" 82-0110 (Std) 1-1⁄4" (32mm) (41mm) (44mm) 1-7/8" - 2" 82-0111 1-3⁄8" (35mm) (48mm) (51mm) 2-1/8" - 2-1/2" 82-0112 1-5⁄8" (41mm) (54mm)(64mm) 2-5/8" - 3" 82-0113 1-7⁄8" (48mm) (67mm)(76mm) 3-1/8" - 3-1/2" 82-0114 2-1⁄8"(54mm) (79mm) (89mm) 3-3/8" - 4" 82-0115 2-3⁄8" (61mm) (86mm)(101mm) 4-1/8" - 4-1/2"82-0116 2-5⁄8" (67mm) (105mm) (114mm) 4-5/8" - 5" 82-0117 2-7⁄8" (73mm) (117mm)(127mm)1-1⁄4"(32mm)4-7⁄8"(124mm)2-3⁄4"(70mm)1-1/4" (32mm) Lip Length 4-1/8" (104.7mm)4-1/8" (104.7mm) • Provided standard with deadlock functions 03, 20, 21, 22, 23, 28, 29, 30 1-1⁄4" (32mm)4-7⁄8"(124mm)4-1/8" (104.7mm) 78-0034 Deadbolt Strike 77-1141 Wrought Box Strike 877 Open Back Strike No. 677 Rabbeted Door Kits 677 Kit adapts 7800/8200 locks for rabbeted doors consists of rabbeted strip and strike. Std for 1-3⁄4" to 2" doors. Specify 2-677 for 2-1⁄4" thick doors. Hardware Finished. 18 An ASSA ABLOY Group company3/01/07©SARGENTManufacturingCompany2004,2005,20078200 Mortise Locks Electrical Functions and Monitoring Options 1-800-727-5477 www.sargentlock.com Electrical Functions: SARGENT 8200 Electromechanical Mortise locks are designed to handle single opening, stand alone applications, or can be readily integrated into sophisticated access control systems. They meet ANSI/BHMA A 156.13 Grade 1 requirements, are UL listed on fire doors, and satisfy industry standards for operating temperature, shock and fire hazard. Applications:Security and restricted access areas in schools, computer rooms, offices, banks, equipment rooms, laboratories, pharmacies and hospitals. Also used with fire and alarm controls in buildings and stair tower doors. Electrical Requirements: Voltage: 12VDC or 24VDC Regulated. Full wave rectification installed inside the lockbody. Current: .25A at 24VDC or .5A at 12VDC Operating Temp.: Max. 151°F (66°C), Min –31°F (-35°C) UL and CUL listed for use on Fire Doors Note: Repeated operation at voltage exceeding +/- 10% is not recommended. • SPDT type C switches, rated 2A at 24VDC •RX- Request to Exit or Enter –Two switches mounted internally in lockbody that provide independent monitoring of inside and outside lever rotation –Available in all functions w/non rigid levers –Not available for the following prefixes: 1-, 3P, 74 –Not available for the following trims: LS or FE • LX- Latchbolt Monitor –Single switch mounted internally in lockbody that indicates latch retraction –Available for all non deadbolt functions –Not available with DX •DX- Deadbolt Monitor –Single switch mounted internally in lockbody that indicates deadbolt retraction –Not available for the following prefixes: 3P-, 74 or LX –Available in all deadbolt functions 8200 Electromechanical Mortise Lever Locks are available with internal switches for independently monitoring inside/outside lever rotation (RX-), latch position (LX-) and deadbolt position (DX-). Warning: •Do not connect locks with a circuit sharing an additional electromagnetic device as the lock may be damaged •Transient voltage must be suppressed at the source or before connecting with the lock •Varistor rated at 35 volts (peak) may be used for transient voltage protection • See Function Page 16 for full description of lock operation 8270 8271 8272 8273 • Fail Safe • Power On locks outside lever •Fail Secure • Power Off locks outside lever •Fail Safe • Power On locks both levers •Fail Secure • Power Off locks both levers SARGENT Power Supplies •3510 Power Supply, for up to a maximum of 7 locks – 24VDC, 1.8 Amp regulated and filtered. UL Listed Class II •3530 Power Supply,for up to a maximum of 8 locks – 24VDC, 2 Amp regulated and filtered. UL Listed •3560 Power Supply,for up to a maximum of 28 locks – 24VDC, 7.2 Amp regulated and filtered. UL ListedNote: Opening the lockbody or the solenoid replacement in the field by non-authorized personnel voids UL label and lock warranty. RX, LX, and DX Monitor Switch Prefixes for 8200 Mechanical Mortise Locks Auxiliary Locks 4870 Series Deadbolts 47/20/07©SARGENTManufacturingCompany2006,2007Allrightsreserved1-800-727-5477 • www.sargentlock.com Functions Specifications For Doors Door thickness 1-3/4" (44mm) standard (For thicker doors, consult factory) Backset 2-3/4" only Strike No. 480, 3-1/2" x 1-1/8" with strike box. Available finishes 03, 04, 09, 10, 10B, 15, 32, 32D Bolt One piece hardened stainless steel deadbolt with 1" throw Cylinder Brass 6-pin. 2 keys per lock Cylinder Ring No. 97 furnished standard, 1KB rosette available on order Case Heavy wrought steel, .093 thick, protected with a zinc dichromate finish Armored Front Brass, bronze, stainless steel. 4-5/8" x 1-1/8" Adjustable for flat or beveled doors (bevel adjustment 1/8" in 2") Hand Non handed, completely reversible (except for 74-) Thumb Turn No. 130W furnished standard UL/cUL Listed Listed for use on fire doors Prefixes 10- Signature 10UL- Signature systems meeting UL437 (Security Grade 1) 11- XC key system (Not available with 7800PT) 21- Construction key system 22- Construction key 28- 7710 strike 4-7/8" x 1-1/4" ANSI A115-1 36- Torx security screws 37- Spanner head security screws 60- Disposable construction core 63- Removable core 64- Construction removable core 65-73- Small format interchangeable cores – 6-pin uncombinated 65-73 - Small format interchangeable cores – 7-pin uncombinated 70- Small format interchangeable core plastic disposable core provided 72- Small format interchangeable core with construction core provided 73- Small format 6-pin interchangeable core SARGENT 4A, 4B keyway only 73-7P- Small format 7-pin interchangeable core SARGENT 4A, 4B keyway only 74- Lock case wrapped in lead (specify hand) F1-82- Keso security cylinder with Front Profile 82- Keso security cylinder F1-83- Removable core Keso with Front Profile 83- Removable core Keso 84- Removable construction core Keso BR- Bump Resistant Cylinder (Available with Conventional & XC Cylinders Only) SC/ SE -Furnished in Schlage C or E keyway (1-1/8" cylinder only) VA - SARGENT V-10 standard cylinder VC - SARGENT V-10 interchangeable core VS - SARGENT V-10 cylinder unassembled VCVS - SARGENT V-10 interchangeable core cylinder unassembled Finishes 03, 04, 09, 10, 10B, 10BL, 20D, 26, 26D, 32, 32D For other finishes consult factory •Key from either side operates deadbolt •Key outside operates deadbolt •Turn lever inside operates deadbolt •Key outside operates deadbolt •No inside operation •Key outside operates deadbolt •Turn lever inside retracts deadbolt, but will not project it •Key from either side operates deadbolt •Turn lever inside retracts deadbolt, but will not project it •Turn lever inside operates deadbolt •No outside operation 4-1⁄8''4-7⁄8'' 1-1⁄4'' 1-1⁄8'' 4-1⁄8''4-7⁄8'' 1-1⁄4'' 23 4-1⁄8''4-7⁄8'' 1-1⁄4'' 1-1⁄8'' 4-1⁄8''4-7⁄8'' 1-1⁄4'' 2-1⁄2''3-1⁄2'' 2-13⁄16''1-13⁄32'' 1-1⁄8'' 3-7⁄8'' 2-3⁄4'' ANSI A115.5 Standard 7730 Strike7710 Strike 480 Strike 4874 Deadlock 4875 Deadlock 4876 Deadlock 4877 Classroom 4878 Public Toilet 4879 Exit Lock 4870 Series Deadlock 4-1⁄8''4-7⁄8'' 1-1⁄4'' 1-1⁄8'' 4-1⁄8''4-7⁄8'' 1-1⁄4'' 2-1⁄2''3-1⁄2'' 2-13⁄16''1-13⁄32'' 1-1⁄8'' 3-7⁄8'' 2-3⁄4'' *** For use only on rooms with more than one exit ****** Specify Note Example Prefixes 10- 10- Series & Function 4875 10-4875 Finish 04 10-4875 x 04 How To Order LEVENBETTS 508 W 26 ST 317 NEW YORK NEW YORK 10001 T 212 242 1414 WEB WWW.LEVENBETTS.COM SUBMITTAL COVER Project Name: Cornell University, East Sibley Hall, Third Floor Owner: Cornell University To: The Pike Company Attn: Norm Rockefeller Address : One Circle Street Rochester, NY 14607 Contractors Submittal # 084130-001 Date of Submittal: 03/28/2014 Date of Response: 04/03/2014 Type of Submittal Product Data Color Selection O&M Manual Shop Drawings Sample Record Document Substitution Yes No Product Identification Contract Dwg. No.: Product Name: Part/Paragraph: Manufacturer: Comments (Architect Use Only) Reviewed Revise and Resubmit Rejected Furnish as Noted Corrections or comments made on submittals and/or shop drawings during this review do not relieve the contractor from compliance with requirements of the drawings and specifications. This check is only for review of general conformance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. The contractor is responsible for confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions; selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction; coordinating his work with that of all other trades; and performing his work in a safe and satisfactory manner. By: Andrew Feuerstein, LEVENBETTS Date: 04/03/14 Architect Comments 1. Contractor to see attached for comments. 2. Contractor to submit samples for review & color selection. The PIKE Company SUBMITTAL COVER BY THIS SUBMITTAL HAS BEEN REVIEWED ARCHITECT'S STAMP WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE PIKE COMPANY AS COMPLYING BY: _____________________ DATE: RECEIVED STAMPS 3/28/2014 PIKE JOB NO:13897 PROJECT NO: 3/28/2014DATE:Pike Submittal No: 084130-001 General Contracting The Pike Company, Inc. Construction Management One Circle Street, Rochester, NY 14607 Phone: (585) 271-5256 / 800 264 PIKE / Fax: (585) 271-3101Specialty Contracting Facility Service E-mail: pike@pikeco.com / Online: www.pikeco.com Program Management DESCRIPTION OF SUBMITTAL: REFERENCES:Spec. Section:Review Cycle No.:084130 Remarks: Revised Shop Drawings Interior Glazed Fire Rated DoorsSUBMITTAL NAME: Drawings:Supplier: Albany - Phone: (518) 371-5900 Pike Branch Offices: Hartford, CT - Phone: (860) 251-8000 TYPE OF SUBMITTAL:Shop Drawing 002 Sterling Glass, Inc. PROJECT NAME:Sibley Hall OWNER: ARCHITECT:The Pike Company, Inc. Norm Rockefeller ®Expedition form sb_20b DATEJOB NO.5233632/24/14REVISIONR13/24/14--TITLE--2108 B Street N.W., Suite 110Auburn, WA 98001 USATEL: 888 - 803 - 9533 FAX: 253 - 333 - 5166www.vetrotechusa.comSHEET NO.----CHECKED BYC. HINZDATE2/24/14DRAWN BYB. LISTONCOVERSHEETT1COVER SHEETT1PROJECT ELEVATIONSA0FRAME ELEVATIONS SMK-1A1PROJECT DETAILSD1-D13GL-1PROJECT SYNOPSISDRAWING INDEXAPPROVALS:GENERAL NOTESFRAMING SYSTEM1. THE DRAWINGS CONTAINED HEREIN ARE STRICTLY THE SOLE PROPERTY OF VETROTECHAND MAY NOT BE UTILIZED AND / OR DUPLICATED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OFVETROTECH. ERRORS BY OTHER TRADES MADE THROUGH THE USE OF THESE DRAWINGARE NOT VETROTECHS RESPONSIBILITY AND ASSUMES NO LIABILITY FOR MISTAKES.2. PRIOR TO MATERIAL FABRICATION, ALL SHOPS DRAWINGS, DIMENSIONS, NOTATIONS ANDDETAILS MUST BE APPROVED BY PURCHASING PARTY OF PRODUCT. VETROTECH DOESNOT EXCEPT PRELIMINARY APPROVAL FROM ARCHITECT AND / OR GENERAL CONTRACTORAS "APPROVED" DRAWINGS. UNTIL ALL APPROVAL CRITERIA IS SATISFIED, FABRICATION OFMATERIAL WILL NOT PROCEED. ANY LIABILITY AND / OR BURDEN INCURRED DUE TO DELAYOF PROJECT SCHEDULE IS NOT VETROTECHS RESPONSIBILITY.3. SHOP DRAWINGS ITEMS MARKED AS "BY OTHERS" AND "N.B. VET" ARE NOT SUPPLIED BYVETROTECH. ITEMS UNDER THESE DESIGNATIONS ARE SHOWN PRIMARILY FORCOORDINATION PURPOSES.4. THE INSTALLER IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL PERIMETER ANCHORS, SHIMS, INTUMESCENTCAULKING AND FINISH SEALANT AT PERIMETER.5. IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE ARCHITECT AND INSTALLER TO SELECT ANDINSTALL APPROPRIATE PERIMETER MATERIALS INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PERIMETERANCHORS, INTUMESCENT CAULKING, PERIMETER SEALANTS AND FLASHING ETC.VETROTECH WILL NOT ACCEPT RESPONSIBILITY FOR THESE MATERIALS AND ASSUMES NOLIABILITY FOR POTENTIAL FAILURE.6. MATERIALS ADJACENT TO THOSE SUPPLIED BY VETROTECH'S SHALL PROVIDE SUFFICIENTSTRUCTURAL STRENGTH TO SUPPORT ALL IMPOSED LOADS, REACTIONS AND SECURING OFSYSTEM UNDER MAXIMUM DESIGN LOADS. IT SHALL BE THE GENERAL CONTRACTORRESPONSIBILITY TO COORDINATE THE LOCATION AND EXTENT OF SUCH MATERIALS ASNECESSARY.REQUIRED SIGNATURE:REVISE AND RESUBMITSHOP DRAWINGSFULL APPROVAL OF SHOPDRAWINGS AND RELEASEFOR FABRICATIONDATE: ____________________________________________________SIGNATURE: ______________________________________________TITLE:____________________________________________________COMPANY:________________________________________________SHEET DESCRIPTIONSHEET NO.GLAZING TYPESSEALANT NOTES1. THE SELECTION OF CAULKING AND/OR SEALANTS IS NOT VETROTECHS RESPONSIBILITY. ITSHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE ARCHITECT, INSTALLER AND MANUFACTURER OFSEALANT TO DETERMINE THE SELECTION OF SEALANT.2. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED IN INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS, ALL SEALANTS AND CAULKINGBY OTHERS.3. PERIMETER CAULKING SHALL BE APPLIED PER SEALANT MANUFACTURERS SPECIFICATION.ALL PERIMETER CAULKING AND/OR SEALANTS SHOWN IN SHOP DRAWINGS ISREPRESENTATIONAL ONLY AND ASSUMES NO LIABILITY FOR THE TYPE, LOCATION ANDEXTENT OF SEALANTS AND/OR CAULKING TO BE UTILIZED.The shops drawings contained herein shall be deemed correct and anaccurate depiction of scope of work for Vetrotech when authorizedpurchasing party issues them as "approved". Approval of these drawingsshall provide authorization to proceed with fabrication of materialsidentified herein.Vetrotech will manufacture its materials as indicated on the approvedshop drawings. Any alteration and/or change after approval date must besubmitted in writing and will be subject to cost and scheduling deviationsand approval by Vetrotech.FINISHPROJECT CONTACTSGLAZING CONTRACTOR:ADDRESS:PHONE:FAX:CONTACT:ARCHITECT:ADDRESS:PHONE:FAX:CONTACT:LOCAL REP:ADDRESS:PHONE:FAX:CONTACT:DOOR SYSTEMBY VETROTECH(BALANCE OF HARDWARE BY OTHERS)DOOR HARDWAREBY OTHERS(PROVIDE HARDWARE TEMPLATES)SHERWIN WILLIAMS POLANE ENAMEL:COLOR:CARDINAL STANDARD POWDER COAT:COLOR:VDS DOOR(60/90 MIN. RATED TEMP RISE DOOR)VDS LITE DOOR( 20-90 MIN. RATED NON TEMP RISE DOOR)VDS LITE(20-90 MIN. RATED NON TEMP RISE WALL)HOLLOW METAL DOOR(20-90 MIN. RATED NON TEMP RISE DOOR)VDS - 60(60 MIN. RATED TEMP RISE WALL)VDS - 120(120 MIN. RATED TEMP RISE WALL)VDS - CURTAIN WALL(60/120 MIN. RATED TEMP RISE WALL)HOLLOW METAL DOOR(60/90 MIN. RATED TEMP RISE DOOR)MJD ASSOCIATES6674 HAMMERSMITH DR P.O. BOX 216EAST SYRACUSE, NY 13057315-432-8401315-432-1723MARC DONAHUELEVENBETTS508 W 26 ST #317NEW YORK, NY 10001212-242-1414----TBDTBDSIBLEY HALLCONTRAFLAM 90 - 1-7/16" (37mm)CONTRAFLAM 120 - 1-9/16" (39mm)GL-2STERLING GLASS1415 NIAGARA STBUFFALO, NY 14213716-853-5800716-853-5805MIKE CURRYCONTRAFLAM STRUCTURE 120 - 2-1/16" (52mm)GL-3FRAME ELEVATIONS SMK-2A2 SMK1VDS TEMP RISE 90 MIN. SINGLEDOOR & 120 MIN. WALL ELEVATION(1) THUS - DOOR #301SMK2VDS TEMP RISE 90 MIN. SINGLEDOOR & 120 MIN. WALL ELEVATION(1) THUS - DOOR #317REFERENCE ELEVATION SHEET - A1REFERENCE ELEVATION SHEET - A2FRAMEWIDTH9212"93116"FRAMEHEIGHT 14"14"93"R.O.V.I.F.93916"R.O.V.I.F.14"14"FRAMEWIDTH125"10134"FRAME HEIGHT 14"14"12512"R.O.V.I.F.10214"R.O.V.I.F.14"14"DATEJOB NO.5233632/24/14REVISIONR13/24/14--TITLE--2108 B Street N.W., Suite 110Auburn, WA 98001 USATEL: 888 - 803 - 9533 FAX: 253 - 333 - 5166www.vetrotechusa.comSHEET NO.----CHECKED BYC. HINZDATE2/24/14DRAWN BYB. LISTONREFERENCE ELEVATIONSA0 DOOROPENINGFRAMEWIDTH36"9212"C/L PER TEMPLATE 3916"TYP.10"3916"TYP.93116"FRAMEHEIGHTGL-1GL-2GL-2BD3BD2AD3AD21014"D.L.O.234"234"3514"D.L.O.234"234"DOOR OPENING 84"87916"D.L.O.234"234"DD138"UNDERCUTVERIFYPANIC SIDE(PUSH SIDE)LOCKABLESIDE(PULL SIDE)SMK1VDS TEMP RISE 90 MIN. SINGLEDOOR & 120 MIN. WALL ELEVATION(1) THUS - DOOR #301291116"D.L.O.70716"D.L.O.14"14"CD1CD1AD193"R.O.V.I.F.93916"R.O.V.I.F.14"MEZZANINE 340SIDESTUDIO 340SIDECLIP JOINTSEE DETAIL A-D7SIM.OPP.SIM.SIM.CLIP JOINTSEE DETAIL A-D7FFL @ DOMEENTRANCEV.I.F.4"CLIP JOINTSEE DETAIL A-D7CLIP JOINTSEE DETAIL A-D714"T/ OPENINGV.I.F.851516"FRAMEHEIGHT @ DOOR 8512"V.I.F.334"334"FACE OF STL.FACE OF STL.312"T/ SIDELITE FRAMET/ DOOR FRAME1D82D92D1085916"V.I.F.SIM.SIM.ALIGNNOTE:CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATEALIGNMENT BTW OUTSIDE FACE OFDOOR FRAME AND INSIDE FACE OFENTRANCE STAIR GUARDRAIL, SEEDRAWING 01/A505 FOR DETAILSDATEJOB NO.5233632/24/14REVISIONR13/24/14--SIBLEY HALL -- STERLING GLASS MIKE CURRYTITLE--2108 B Street N.W., Suite 110Auburn, WA 98001 USATEL: 888 - 803 - 9533 FAX: 253 - 333 - 5166www.vetrotechusa.comSHEET NO.----CHECKED BYC. HINZDATE2/24/14DRAWN BYB. LISTONSMK-1INTERIORA1VDS - 120 SYSTEMGL-1SHERWIN WILLIAMS POLANE ENAMEL:COLOR: TBDVDS - 90 DOORAPPROX. FRAME & GLASS WEIGHT CALC'S:FRAME WEIGHT:375.0 LBS.GLASS WEIGHT:630.7 LBS.TOTAL:1005.7 LBS.(INITIAL EACH BOX)FRAME PROPERTIESFRAMING SYSTEMGLASS TYPE(INITIAL EACH BOX)FINISHREVISE AND RESUBMITSHOP DRAWINGSFULL APPROVAL OF SHOPDRAWINGS AND RELEASEFOR FABRICATIONDATE: ____________________________________________________SIGNATURE: ______________________________________________TITLE:____________________________________________________COMPANY:________________________________________________The shops drawings contained herein shall be deemed correct and an accuratedepiction of scope of work for Vetrotech when authorized purchasing party issuesthem as "approved". Approval of these drawings shall provide authorization toproceed with fabrication of materials identified herein.Vetrotech will manufacture its materials as indicated on the approved shop drawings.Any alteration and/or change after approval date must be submitted in writing and willbe subject to cost and scheduling deviations and approval by Vetrotech.DOOR TYPE(INITIAL EACH BOX)DOOR HANDINGDOOR HARDWARE(INITIAL EACH BOX)(INITIAL EACH BOX)(INITIAL BOX)APPROVALSREQUIRED SIGNATURE:HARDWARE SET #VDS-L S-1VDS LITE SINGLE DOORDEVICEQTYMANUFACTURERSERIES/TYPEFINISH EIXT(1)SARGENT8504 NARROW DESIGN RIM--EXIT DEVICE 12-55-56-8504 x ETLCLOSER(1)SARGENT351 SERIES--HINGES(2) PAIRVDS917644DOOR FINISHGASKET(1) SETVDS905307BLACKEPT(1)SECURITRONEL-EPTL--POSITION SWITCH(1)SENTROL1078--AUTO DOOR(1)PEMKO420 APKLMILLBOTTOMBALANCE OF HARDWARE BY OTHERSCONTRAFLAM 90 - 1-7/16" (37mm)CONTRAFLAM 120 - 1-9/16" (39mm)GL-2NOTE:CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ALLDIMENSIONS IN FIELD & W/ NEWSTRUCTURAL STEEL @ MASONRYOPENINGS PRIOR TO FABRICATION. DOOROPENINGFRAMEWIDTH36"125"C/L PER TEMPLATE 3916"TYP.10"3916"TYP.10134"FRAMEHEIGHT GL-1GL-3GL-3BD6BD5AD56212"D.L.O.234"234"1512"D.L.O.234"234"DOOR OPENING 931316"9614"D.L.O.234"234"CD4DD438"UNDERCUTVERIFYSMK2VDS TEMP RISE 90 MIN. SINGLEDOOR & 120 MIN. WALL ELEVATION(1) THUS - DOOR #317PANIC SIDE(PUSH SIDE)LOCKABLESIDE(PULL SIDE)291116"D.L.O.AD414"14"12512"R.O.V.I.F.8014"D.L.O.10214"R.O.V.I.F.14"CLIP JOINTSEE DETAIL A-D7CLIP JOINTSEE DETAIL A-D73916"TYP.STUDIO 360SIDESTAIR 300SDSIDESIM.SIM.SIM.AD6FFL @ DOMEENTRANCEV.I.F.CLIP JOINTSEE DETAIL A-D7CLIP JOINTSEE DETAIL A-D7119"V.I.F.314"FACE OF STL.314"FACE OF STL.T/ OPENINGV.I.F.T/ SIDELITE FRAMET/ DOOR FRAME18"MIN.9534"V.I.F.5D127D13SIM.SIM.6D13ALIGNNOTE:CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATEALIGNMENT BTW OUTSIDE FACE OFDOOR FRAME AND INSIDE FACE OFENTRANCE STAIR GUARDRAIL, SEEDRAWING 01/A505 FOR DETAILSFD4DATEJOB NO.5233632/24/14REVISIONR13/24/14--SIBLEY HALL -- STERLING GLASS MIKE CURRYTITLE--2108 B Street N.W., Suite 110Auburn, WA 98001 USATEL: 888 - 803 - 9533 FAX: 253 - 333 - 5166www.vetrotechusa.comSHEET NO.----CHECKED BYC. HINZDATE2/24/14DRAWN BYB. LISTONSMK-2INTERIORA2VDS - 120 SYSTEMGL-1SHERWIN WILLIAMS POLANE ENAMEL:COLOR: TBDVDS - 90 DOORAPPROX. FRAME & GLASS WEIGHT CALC'S:FRAME WEIGHT:436.7 LBS.GLASS WEIGHT:1374.1 LBS.TOTAL:1810.8 LBS.(INITIAL EACH BOX)FRAME PROPERTIESFRAMING SYSTEMGLASS TYPE(INITIAL EACH BOX)FINISHREVISE AND RESUBMITSHOP DRAWINGSFULL APPROVAL OF SHOPDRAWINGS AND RELEASEFOR FABRICATIONDATE: ____________________________________________________SIGNATURE: ______________________________________________TITLE:____________________________________________________COMPANY:________________________________________________The shops drawings contained herein shall be deemed correct and an accuratedepiction of scope of work for Vetrotech when authorized purchasing party issuesthem as "approved". Approval of these drawings shall provide authorization toproceed with fabrication of materials identified herein.Vetrotech will manufacture its materials as indicated on the approved shop drawings.Any alteration and/or change after approval date must be submitted in writing and willbe subject to cost and scheduling deviations and approval by Vetrotech.DOOR TYPE(INITIAL EACH BOX)DOOR HANDINGDOOR HARDWARE(INITIAL EACH BOX)(INITIAL EACH BOX)(INITIAL BOX)APPROVALSREQUIRED SIGNATURE:CONTRAFLAM 90 - 1-7/16" (37mm)CONTRAFLAM STRUCTURE 120 - 2-1/16" (52mm)GL-3HARDWARE SET #VDS-L S-1VDS LITE SINGLE DOORDEVICEQTYMANUFACTURERSERIES/TYPEFINISH EIXT(1)SARGENT8504 NARROW DESIGN RIM--EXIT DEVICE 12-55-56-8504 x ETLCLOSER(1)SARGENT351 SERIES--HINGES(2) PAIRVDS917644DOOR FINISHGASKET(1) SETVDS905307BLACKEPT(1)SECURITRONEL-EPTL--POSITION SWITCH(1)SENTROL1078--AUTO DOOR(1)PEMKO420 APKLMILLBOTTOMBALANCE OF HARDWARE BY OTHERSNOTE:CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ALLDIMENSIONS IN FIELD & W/ NEWSTRUCTURAL STEEL @ MASONRYOPENINGS PRIOR TO FABRICATION.NOTE:CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATEALIGNMENT BTW OUTSIDE FACE OFDOOR FRAME AND INSIDE FACE OFENTRANCE STAIR GUARDRAIL, SEEDRAWING 01/A505 FOR DETAILS 1916" [39mm]4516" [110mm]11516" [50mm]234" [70mm](FD) FRAME DIMENSION(RO) ROUGHOPENING38" [10mm](DLO)1316" [20mm]9213457861916" [39mm]4516" [110mm]11516" [50mm]234" [70mm](FD) FRAME DIMENSION(RO) ROUGHOPENING 38" [10mm](DLO)1316" [20mm]923457863916" [90mm](DLO)(DLO)(FD) FRAME DIMENSION(RO) ROUGH OPENING 2131916" [39mm]4516" [110mm]81916" [39mm]4516" [110mm]3916" [90mm](DLO)(FD) FRAME DIMENSION(RO) ROUGH OPENING(DLO)2839*NOTE: DUE TO GLASS TOLERANCE,SEALANT MAY BE NEEDED TO HOLD ONVINYL GLAZING GASKET (PROVIDEDAND INSTALLED BY OTHERS)NOTES:1. SETTING BLOCK (SILL ONLY)ALTERNATES BY OTHERS:A. HARDWOODB. CALCIUM SILICATEC. NEOPRENE (90 DURO)2. CONTINUOUS INTUMESCENT TAPEFURNISHED W/VDS FRAMEINSTALLED BY OTHERS3. *GLAZING GASKET (BOTH SIDES) FURNISHED W/VDS FRAME INSTALLED BY OTHERS4. FIRE RATED SEAL IN SHIM SPACE PROVIDEBY OTHERS. ACCEPTABLEALTERNATIVES: WELL PACKEDROCKWOOL, CONTINUOUS INTUMESCENTCAULKING, OR CONTINUOUSINTUMESCENT TAPE.5. SHIMS PROVIDED BY OTHERS.ACCEPTABLE ALTERNATES: HARDWOOD,CALCIUM SILICATE, OR CEDAR SHINGLES.6. FINISH SEALANT BY OTHERS7. ANCHOR SCREWS BY OTHERS. PLACE 20"O.C. MAX. HEAD DIA. 3/8"; MAX. SHANK DIA.1/4".8.FIRE RATED FRAME BY VETROTECH.9.STEEL GLAZING BEAD BY VETROTECH.INSTALL OVER GLAZING BEAD SCREW.234" [70mm]38" [10mm](DLO)(FD) FRAME DIMENSION(RO) ROUGHOPENING54671916" [39mm]4516" [110mm]12328911516" [50mm]1316" [20mm]AHEAD DETAIL6"=1'-0"BHORIZ. MULLION6"=1'-0"CJAMB DETAIL6"=1'-0"DSILL DETAIL6"=1'-0"EVERT. MULLION6"=1'-0"FNOT USED6"=1'-0"DATEJOB NO.5233632/24/14REVISIONR13/24/14--SIBLEY HALL -- STERLING GLASS MIKE CURRYTITLE--2108 B Street N.W., Suite 110Auburn, WA 98001 USATEL: 888 - 803 - 9533 FAX: 253 - 333 - 5166www.vetrotechusa.comSHEET NO.----CHECKED BYC. HINZDATE2/24/14DRAWN BYB. LISTONVDS 120DETAILSD1 518" [130mm]4578611516" [50mm](FD) FRAME DIMENSION(RO) ROUGH OPENING 38" [10mm](DLO)38" [10mm]234" [70mm]2916" [65mm]11516" [50mm]1316" [20mm]9210"2916"[65mm]PANIC SIDE(PUSH SIDE)LOCKABLESIDE(PULL SIDE)10338"UNDERCUT(DLO)PANIC SIDE(PUSH SIDE)LOCKABLESIDE(PULL SIDE)921031ADOOR HEADER DETAILSCALE: 6"= 1'-0"B10" DOOR SILL DETAILSCALE: 6"= 1'-0"1716" [37mm]1716" [37mm](FD) FRAME DIMENSION (RO) ROUGH OPENING 12*NOTE: DUE TO GLASS TOLERANCE,SEALANT MAY BE NEEDED TO HOLD ONVINYL GLAZING GASKET (PROVIDED ANDINSTALLED BY OTHERS)NOTES:1. SETTING BLOCK (SILL ONLY)ALTERNATES BY OTHERS:A. HARDWOODB. CALCIUM SILICATEC. NEOPRENE (90 DURO)2. CONTINUOUS INTUMESCENT TAPEFURNISHED W/VDS FRAMEINSTALLED BY OTHERS3. *GLAZING GASKET (BOTH SIDES)FURNISHED W/VDS FRAME INSTALLED BY OTHERS4. FIRE RATED SEAL IN SHIM SPACEPROVIDE BY OTHERS. ACCEPTABLEALTERNATIVES: WELL PACKEDROCKWOOL, CONTINUOUSINTUMESCENT CAULKING, ORCONTINUOUS INTUMESCENT TAPE.5. SHIMS PROVIDED BY OTHERS.ACCEPTABLE ALTERNATES:HARDWOOD, CALCIUM SILICATE, ORCEDAR SHINGLES.6. FINISH SEALANT BY OTHERS7. ANCHOR SCREWS BY OTHERS. PLACE20" O.C. MAX. HEAD DIA. 3/8"; MAX.SHANK DIA. 1/4".8.FIRE RATED FRAMING BY VETROTECH.9.STEEL GLAZING BEAD BY VETROTECH.INSTALL OVER GLAZING BEAD SCREW.10. FIRE RATED GLAZING BY VETROTECH.11. HINGE PER HARDWARE SCHEDULE.12. SMOKE SEAL PER HARDWARESCHEDULE.DATEJOB NO.5233632/24/14REVISIONR13/24/14--SIBLEY HALL -- STERLING GLASS MIKE CURRYTITLE--2108 B Street N.W., Suite 110Auburn, WA 98001 USATEL: 888 - 803 - 9533 FAX: 253 - 333 - 5166www.vetrotechusa.comSHEET NO.----CHECKED BYC. HINZDATE2/24/14DRAWN BYB. LISTONVDS 90DOOR DETAILSD2NOTE:CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ALLDIMENSIONS IN FIELD PRIOR TOFABRICATION. 578"[150mm]8234" [70mm](DLO)38" [10mm]234"[70mm]11516" [50mm]1316" [20mm]351516"[150mm]234" [70mm](DLO)38" [9mm]234" [70mm]11516" [50mm]1316" [20mm]PANIC SIDE(PUSH SIDE)LOCKABLESIDE(PULL SIDE)PANIC SIDE(PUSH SIDE)LOCKABLESIDE(PULL SIDE)(DLO)(DLO)(FD) FRAME DIMENSION(RO) ROUGH OPENING(FD) FRAME DIMENSION(RO) ROUGH OPENINGADOOR JAMB DETAIL SCALE: 6"= 1'-0"BDOOR JAMB DETAIL SCALE: 6"= 1'-0"112916" [65mm]1716" [37mm]4516" [110mm]2916" [65mm]1716" [37mm]4516" [110mm]8928921039231081916" [39mm]DATEJOB NO.5233632/24/14REVISIONR13/24/14--SIBLEY HALL -- STERLING GLASS MIKE CURRYTITLE--2108 B Street N.W., Suite 110Auburn, WA 98001 USATEL: 888 - 803 - 9533 FAX: 253 - 333 - 5166www.vetrotechusa.comSHEET NO.----CHECKED BYC. HINZDATE2/24/14DRAWN BYB. LISTONVDS 90DOOR DETAILSD3SEE SHEET D2 FORCALLOUTSNOTE:CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ALLDIMENSIONS IN FIELD PRIOR TOFABRICATION. 4516" [110mm]11516" [50mm]234" [70mm](FD) FRAME DIMENSION(RO) ROUGHOPENING38" [10mm](DLO)1316" [20mm]9213457864516" [110mm]11516" [50mm]234" [70mm](FD) FRAME DIMENSION(RO) ROUGHOPENING 38" [10mm](DLO)1316" [20mm]92345786*NOTE: DUE TO GLASS TOLERANCE,SEALANT MAY BE NEEDED TO HOLD ONVINYL GLAZING GASKET (PROVIDEDAND INSTALLED BY OTHERS)NOTES:1. SETTING BLOCK (SILL ONLY)ALTERNATES BY OTHERS:A. HARDWOODB. CALCIUM SILICATEC. NEOPRENE (90 DURO)2. CONTINUOUS INTUMESCENT TAPEFURNISHED W/VDS FRAMEINSTALLED BY OTHERS3. *GLAZING GASKET (BOTH SIDES) FURNISHED W/VDS FRAME INSTALLED BY OTHERS4. FIRE RATED SEAL IN SHIM SPACE PROVIDEBY OTHERS. ACCEPTABLEALTERNATIVES: WELL PACKEDROCKWOOL, CONTINUOUS INTUMESCENTCAULKING, OR CONTINUOUSINTUMESCENT TAPE.5. SHIMS PROVIDED BY OTHERS.ACCEPTABLE ALTERNATES: HARDWOOD,CALCIUM SILICATE, OR CEDAR SHINGLES.6. FINISH SEALANT BY OTHERS7. ANCHOR SCREWS BY OTHERS. PLACE 20"O.C. MAX. HEAD DIA. 3/8"; MAX. SHANK DIA.1/4".8.FIRE RATED FRAME BY VETROTECH.9.STEEL GLAZING BEAD BY VETROTECH.INSTALL IN FIELD WITH SCREW FURNISHEDBY VETROTECH.234" [70mm]38" [10mm](DLO)(FD) FRAME DIMENSION(RO) ROUGHOPENING54674516" [110mm]32811516" [50mm]1316" [20mm]AHEAD DETAIL6"=1'-0"BNOT USED6"=1'-0"CJAMB DETAIL6"=1'-0"DSILL DETAIL6"=1'-0"ENOT USED6"=1'-0"FCF STRUCT. JOINT6"=1'-0"2116" [52mm]2116" [52mm]2116" [53mm]9Intumescent InterlayerJoint Sealant Silicone DowCorning DC 895,provided by VetrotechSpacer4x Kerafix FXL 200 provided by VetrotechSafetyGlass2116" [52 MM]118" [29 MM]12" [13 MM]18" [3 MM]Polysulfide SealantDATEJOB NO.5233632/24/14REVISIONR13/24/14--SIBLEY HALL -- STERLING GLASS MIKE CURRYTITLE--2108 B Street N.W., Suite 110Auburn, WA 98001 USATEL: 888 - 803 - 9533 FAX: 253 - 333 - 5166www.vetrotechusa.comSHEET NO.----CHECKED BYC. HINZDATE2/24/14DRAWN BYB. LISTONVDS 120DETAILSD4 10"2916"[65mm]38"UNDERCUT(DLO)PANIC SIDE(PUSH SIDE)LOCKABLESIDE(PULL SIDE)921031B10" DOOR SILL DETAILSCALE: 6"= 1'-0"1716" [37mm]518" [130mm]11516" [50mm](DLO)318" [80mm]11516" [50mm]1316" [20mm]92PANIC SIDE(PUSH SIDE)LOCKABLESIDE(PULL SIDE)103ADOOR HEADER DETAILSCALE: 6"= 1'-0"2916" [65mm]1716" [37mm]4516" [110mm](FD) FRAME DIMENSION (RO) ROUGH OPENING (FD) FRAME DIMENSION 1238" [10mm]4578638" [10mm](RO) ROUGH OPENING *NOTE: DUE TO GLASS TOLERANCE,SEALANT MAY BE NEEDED TO HOLD ONVINYL GLAZING GASKET (PROVIDED ANDINSTALLED BY OTHERS)NOTES:1. SETTING BLOCK (SILL ONLY) BY OTHERSALTERNATES BY OTHERS:A. HARDWOODB. CALCIUM SILICATEC. NEOPRENE (90 DURO)2. CONTINUOUS INTUMESCENT TAPEFURNISHED W/VDS FRAMEINSTALLED BY OTHERS3. *GLAZING GASKET (BOTH SIDES)FURNISHED W/VDS FRAME INSTALLED BY OTHERS4. FIRE RATED SEAL IN SHIM SPACEPROVIDE BY OTHERS. ACCEPTABLEALTERNATIVES: WELL PACKEDROCKWOOL, CONTINUOUSINTUMESCENT CAULKING, ORCONTINUOUS INTUMESCENT TAPE.5. SHIMS PROVIDED BY OTHERS.ACCEPTABLE ALTERNATES:HARDWOOD, CALCIUM SILICATE, ORCEDAR SHINGLES.6. FINISH SEALANT BY OTHERS7. ANCHOR SCREWS BY OTHERS. PLACE 20"O.C. MAX. HEAD DIA. 3/8"; MAX. SHANKDIA. 1/4".8.FIRE RATED FRAMING BY VETROTECH.9.STEEL GLAZING BEAD BY VETROTECH.INSTALL OVER GLAZING BEAD SCREW.10. FIRE RATED GLAZING BY VETROTECH.11. HINGE PER HARDWARE SCHEDULE.12. SMOKE SEAL PER HARDWARESCHEDULE.DATEJOB NO.5233632/24/14REVISIONR13/24/14--SIBLEY HALL -- STERLING GLASS MIKE CURRYTITLE--2108 B Street N.W., Suite 110Auburn, WA 98001 USATEL: 888 - 803 - 9533 FAX: 253 - 333 - 5166www.vetrotechusa.comSHEET NO.----CHECKED BYC. HINZDATE2/24/14DRAWN BYB. LISTONVDS 90DOOR DETAILSD5NOTE:CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ALLDIMENSIONS IN FIELD PRIOR TOFABRICATION. AJAMB DETAIL @ HINGESCALE: 6"= 1'-0"83PANIC SIDE(PUSH SIDE)LOCKABLESIDE(PULL SIDE)BDOOR JAMB DETAIL SCALE: 6"= 1'-0"2916" [65mm]1716" [37mm]4516" [110mm]892892103234" [70mm](DLO)234" [70mm](FD) FRAME DIMENSION(RO) ROUGH OPENING38" [10mm](DLO)832916" [65mm]1716" [37mm]4516" [110mm]234" [70mm](DLO)234" [70mm](FD) FRAME DIMENSION(RO) ROUGH OPENING38" [10mm](DLO)PANIC SIDE(PUSH SIDE)LOCKABLESIDE(PULL SIDE)892892103DATEJOB NO.5233632/24/14REVISIONR13/24/14--SIBLEY HALL -- STERLING GLASS MIKE CURRYTITLE--2108 B Street N.W., Suite 110Auburn, WA 98001 USATEL: 888 - 803 - 9533 FAX: 253 - 333 - 5166www.vetrotechusa.comSHEET NO.----CHECKED BYC. HINZDATE2/24/14DRAWN BYB. LISTONVDS 90DOOR DETAILSD6SEE SHEETD5 FOR CALLOUTSNOTE:CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ALLDIMENSIONS IN FIELD PRIOR TOFABRICATION. 2A) WIPE DOWN AREASTO BE SEALED WITHDENATURED ALCOHOL2B) APPLY SEAM SEALAT EACH CLIP AND INSIDEFRAME TUBES.2C) CONNECT THE 2 FRAMEPARTS AND SECURE WITHPROVIDED SCREWS(6) AT CLIPSACLIP JOINT DETAILSCALE: N.T.S.DATEJOB NO.5233632/24/14REVISIONR13/24/14--SIBLEY HALL -- STERLING GLASS MIKE CURRYTITLE--2108 B Street N.W., Suite 110Auburn, WA 98001 USATEL: 888 - 803 - 9533 FAX: 253 - 333 - 5166www.vetrotechusa.comSHEET NO.----CHECKED BYC. HINZDATE2/24/14DRAWN BYB. LISTONVDS 120CLIP JOINT DETAILD7NOTE:CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ALLDIMENSIONS IN FIELD PRIOR TOFABRICATION. DATEJOB NO.5233632/24/14REVISIONR13/24/14--SIBLEY HALL -- STERLING GLASS MIKE CURRYTITLE--2108 B Street N.W., Suite 110Auburn, WA 98001 USATEL: 888 - 803 - 9533 FAX: 253 - 333 - 5166www.vetrotechusa.comSHEET NO.----CHECKED BYC. HINZDATE2/24/14DRAWN BYB. LISTOND8 PERIMETERDETAILS DATEJOB NO.5233632/24/14REVISIONR13/24/14--SIBLEY HALL -- STERLING GLASS MIKE CURRYTITLE--2108 B Street N.W., Suite 110Auburn, WA 98001 USATEL: 888 - 803 - 9533 FAX: 253 - 333 - 5166www.vetrotechusa.comSHEET NO.----CHECKED BYC. HINZDATE2/24/14DRAWN BYB. LISTOND9 PERIMETERDETAILS DATEJOB NO.5233632/24/14REVISIONR13/24/14--SIBLEY HALL -- STERLING GLASS MIKE CURRYTITLE--2108 B Street N.W., Suite 110Auburn, WA 98001 USATEL: 888 - 803 - 9533 FAX: 253 - 333 - 5166www.vetrotechusa.comSHEET NO.----CHECKED BYC. HINZDATE2/24/14DRAWN BYB. LISTOND10 PERIMETERDETAILS DATEJOB NO.5233632/24/14REVISIONR13/24/14--SIBLEY HALL -- STERLING GLASS MIKE CURRYTITLE--2108 B Street N.W., Suite 110Auburn, WA 98001 USATEL: 888 - 803 - 9533 FAX: 253 - 333 - 5166www.vetrotechusa.comSHEET NO.----CHECKED BYC. HINZDATE2/24/14DRAWN BYB. LISTOND11 PERIMETERDETAILS DATEJOB NO.5233632/24/14REVISIONR13/24/14--SIBLEY HALL -- STERLING GLASS MIKE CURRYTITLE--2108 B Street N.W., Suite 110Auburn, WA 98001 USATEL: 888 - 803 - 9533 FAX: 253 - 333 - 5166www.vetrotechusa.comSHEET NO.----CHECKED BYC. HINZDATE2/24/14DRAWN BYB. LISTOND12 PERIMETERDETAILS DATEJOB NO.5233632/24/14REVISIONR13/24/14--SIBLEY HALL -- STERLING GLASS MIKE CURRYTITLE--2108 B Street N.W., Suite 110Auburn, WA 98001 USATEL: 888 - 803 - 9533 FAX: 253 - 333 - 5166www.vetrotechusa.comSHEET NO.----CHECKED BYC. HINZDATE2/24/14DRAWN BYB. LISTOND13 PERIMETERDETAILS SGG CONTRAFLAM®90 SGG CONTRAFLAM 90 for interior application ≤ 1500x3000 5mm TSG ≤ 1800x3210 6mm TSG 1: ≤ 2200x3210 8mm TSG ≤ 1200x2400 3mm HSG ≤ 1500x2500 4mm TSG 2: ≥ 1500x2500 see above 1: Technical Data Fire resistance classification EI 90 Element thickness ≥ 36 mm (nominal thickness for smallest pane sizes) Minimum production size 190 x 350mm Maximum production size 2200 x 3210mm (oversizes upon request ) Max. tested size Varying subject to make-up, frame system, element type and national approval certificates. For details please contact our sales office. Width tolerance +3 / -2 mm Length tolerance +2/ -2 mm Weight ≥ 72kg / m2 Light transmission (EN 410) 80 % Sound reduction rw (EN 140-3) 44dB UG value (EN 673) 3.7 W/m2K UV stable As per EN ISO 12543-4 Pt.6 Temperature range +45°C / -10°C Specific data for DGU make-ups on request. Fire Resistant Safety Glass Data Sheet ©2005; Subject to technical modifications; realized: Oct. 2005 / Version: 1 Vetrotech Saint-Gobain International AG – Stauffacherstrasse 128 – CH-3000 Bern 22, Switzerland – www.vetrotech.com Tempered safety glass 1 Intumescent interlayer Spacer TPS Sealing polysulphide Tempered safety glass 2 www.vetrotechUSA.com DATA SHEET CLASSIFICATION PRODUCT FEATURES Rating Application Max Exposed Area of Glass (Sq In.) Max Width of Exposed Glass1 Max Height of Exposed Glass Min Depth of Groove Groove Width Design Number TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS AUTHORIZED DIMENSIONS Tempered safety glass Intumescent interlayers CONTRAFLAM®STRUCTURE 120 Fire Rated Clear Tempered Safety Glass for Interior Wall Application 120 Minutes Tested in accordance with ASTM E 119, UL 263 CAN/ULC- S101 CPSC 16C PART 1201 (CATEGORIES I & II) 2-1/16” (52 mm) + 1/8” to - 1/16” (+3 mm to -1.5 mm) 0.62 46 46 22.5 ≈ 80% 2 hr.WindowTransomSidelite 4536 TBD 1 126”7/8”2-5/16”U543, U555, U556 Joint seal per specs Fire Resistive US Testing / Compliant CAN Testing / Compliant Impact Safety Rating Nominal Thickness Thickness Tolerance U value (BTU/hr*sqft/°F) STC Rating Weight (lbs/sq.ft.) Visible Light Transmission Shown installed in VDS 120 1 When CONTRAFLAM®Structure 120 is used, the exposed height of the glass is not to exceed 126" but the overall width can be greater than 126" due to the joint feature incorporated into the CONTRAFLAM®Structure product. www.vetrotechUSA.com PRODUCT TERMS AND CONDITIONS 120 Minutes Tested in accordance with ASTM E 119, UL 263 CAN/ULC- S101 CPSC 16C PART 1201 (CATEGORIES I & II) 2-1/16” (52 mm) + 1/8” to - 1/16” (+3 mm to -1.5 mm) 0.62 46 46 22.5 ≈ 80% CONTRAFLAM® / SWISSFLAM® / CONTRAFLAM® STRUCTURE / KERALITE®-ULTRA 1. General: This document applies to CONTRAFLAM®, SWISSFLAM®, CONTRAFLAM® STRUCTURE, KERALITE®-ULTRA of all types and fire ratings including their combination in insulated glass units. When fire-resistant glass is used, it is assumed that the buyer will incorporate abovementioned glass into glazing systems approved by a valid and independent institution, e.g. UL/Underwriters Laboratories. Copies of authorized listing and specifications, as well as instructions for handling and installation are available online at vetrotechusa.com, or by calling 1-888-803-9533. 2. Limited 5 Year Warranty: Vetrotech Saint-Gobain warrants that its CONTRAFLAM®, SWISSFLAM®, CONTRAFLAM® STRUCTURE, KERALITE®-ULTRA fire rated glazing to be free of substantial obstruction of vision from dust or other foreign substances due to defective materials or workmanship for a period of five years from the date of shipment. When assembled to an Insulated Glass Unit (IGU), Vetrotech warrants only that its CONTRAFLAM®-IGU, SWISSFLAM®-IGU, CONTRAFLAM® STRUCTURE-IGU, KERALITE®-ULTRA-IGU will be free of substantial obstruction of vision from dust, film formation or moisture accumulation between glass lites resulting from seal failure due to defective materials or workmanship for a period of ten years from the date of shipment. CONTRAFLAM®, SWISSFLAM®, CONTRAFLAM® STRUCTURE, KERALITE®-ULTRA is an engineered specialty fire resistant glazing material. Certain optical and visual faults are inherent to the production process. These characteristics may be evaluated according to the manufacturer’s quality standards, but do not impair the transparency or affect the performance of the glass in case of fire, and shall not be considered cause for rejection. This warranty shall not apply if the failure is caused by acts of God, intervening cause, mishandling, misuse, abuse, improper installation, installation by unqualified glaziers or by any other cause whatsoever not within our exclusive control, and shall not apply unless the failure occurs within five or ten years after the date of shipment. The obligation of this warranty is to replace the defective glass, F.O.B. manufacturer’s warehouse, but in no event shall Vetrotech Saint-Gobain be responsible to cover any cost of removal, installation or reinstallation, loss of use, incidentals or any consequential cost associated with defective product. Any glass replaced under this warranty is limited to the original warranty period and shall not be extended beyond the original five or ten years. Vetrotech Saint-Gobain makes no warranty of merchantability nor that the product is fit for any particular purpose for use and no other warranty than the abovementioned warranty of any kind, expressed or implied. 3. Transportation and Storage Conditions: Transport and storage of CONTRAFLAM®, SWISSFLAM®, CONTRAFLAM® STRUCTURE, KERALITE®-ULTRA products must be in a vertical and dry state and at temperatures above 14˚F (-10˚C) and below 113˚F (45˚C). Extreme climatic conditions and exposure to direct sunlight or other heat sources must be avoided. When glass is installed in a not temperature controlled building, above storage conditions apply likewise. 4. Handling and Installation Requirements: The product warranty is subject to CONTRAFLAM®, SWISSFLAM®, CONTRAFLAM® STRUCTURE, KERALITE®-ULTRA glass having been handled and installed in accordance with published instructions. It is essential that glazing contractors or other handlers or installers be familiar with such instructions. All subsequent product processing, additions or alterations not authorized and monitored by Vetrotech Saint-Gobain are specifically prohibited. If the products are used in fire-rated applications not covered by Vetrotech Saint-Gobain product specifications, all warranty is null and void. All notes and instructions on labels must be respected. If adhesives or sealing materials are applied during installation, compatibility must be verified and confirmed with Vetrotech Saint-Gobain beforehand or all warranty is null and void. 5. Product Use: CONTRAFLAM®, SWISSFLAM®, CONTRAFLAM® STRUCTURE, KERALITE®-ULTRA products must be used in temperature controlled environments ensuring a maximum glass temperature range between 14˚F (-10˚C) and 113˚F (45˚C). All circumstances resulting into heat build-up of the glass caused by window blinds, curtains, etc. must be avoided. 1 When CONTRAFLAM®Structure 120 is used, the exposed height of the glass is not to exceed 126" but the overall width can be greater than 126" due to the joint feature incorporated into the CONTRAFLAM®Structure product. LEVENBETTS ! 508 W 26 ST 317 NEW YORK NEW YORK 10001 T 212 242 1414 WEB WWW.LEVENBETTS.COM ! SUBMITTAL COVER Project Name: Cornell University, East Sibley Hall, Third Floor Owner: Cornell University To: The Pike Company Attn: Norm Rockefeller Address : One Circle Street Rochester, NY 14607 ! Contractors Submittal # 081113-001 Cycle 2! Date of Submittal: 01/30/2014! Date of Response: 02/02/2014! ! ! ! ! ! Type of Submittal Product Data Color Selection O&M Manual Shop Drawings Sample Record Document Substitution Yes No Product Identification Contract Dwg. No.: Product Name: Part/Paragraph: Manufacturer: Comments ! ! ! ! (Architect Use Only) Reviewed Revise and Resubmit Rejected Furnish as Noted Corrections or comments made on submittals and/or shop drawings during this review do not relieve the contractor from compliance with requirements of the drawings and specifications. This check is only for review of general conformance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. The contractor is responsible for confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions; selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction; coordinating his work with that of all other trades; and performing his work in a safe and satisfactory manner. By: Andrew Feuerstein, LEVENBETTS Date: 02/02/14! !! Architect Comments 1. Revise D oor 401 & 402 handing as noted. 2. Contractor to coordinate Door 313 frame height w/ metal mesh ceiling height. ! The PIKE Company SUBMITTAL COVER BY THIS SUBMITTAL HAS BEEN REVIEWED ARCHITECT'S STAMP WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE PIKE COMPANY AS COMPLYING BY: _____________________ DATE: RECEIVED STAMPS 1/30/2014 PIKE JOB NO:13897 PROJECT NO: 1/30/2014DATE:Pike Submittal No: 081113-001 General Contracting The Pike Company, Inc. Construction Management One Circle Street, Rochester, NY 14607 Phone: (585) 271-5256 / 800 264 PIKE / Fax: (585) 271-3101Specialty Contracting Facility Service E-mail: pike@pikeco.com / Online: www.pikeco.com Program Management DESCRIPTION OF SUBMITTAL: REFERENCES:Spec. Section:Review Cycle No.:081113 Remarks: Hollow Metal Frames and Doors Steel Doors and FramesSUBMITTAL NAME: Drawings:Supplier: Albany - Phone: (518) 371-5900 Pike Branch Offices: Hartford, CT - Phone: (860) 251-8000 TYPE OF SUBMITTAL:Product Data & Shop Drawing 002 Kelley Brothers LLC PROJECT NAME:Sibley Hall OWNER: ARCHITECT:The Pike Company, Inc. Norm Rockefeller ®Expedition form sb_20b FRAME AND DOOR SCHEDULE Project Manager : Project :HOLLOW METAL FRAMES AND DOORS : WOOD DOORS :Architect : Contractor :Submittals : Distributor : Detailer : CU SIBLEY HALL 508 WEST 26TH NEW YORK, NY LEVENBETTS Rochester, NY 14607 One Circle Drive Ph (585) 271-5256 Fax (585) 271-3101 The Pike Co. Fran Dotts Fran Dotts Elmira, NY 14902 P.O. Box 878 Ph (607) 734-8884 Fax (607) 734-4518 Kelley Bros. 2014-01-02-REVIEW 2014-01-22-REVISED CurriesManufactured by : 08113Architectural Specification Section # Architectural Specification Section # Manufactured by : 1/23/2014 JobID: 7-13-181 CU SIBLEY HALL DOOR #DOOR #DOOR #DOOR #LOCATIONLOCATIONLOCATIONLOCATION TYPETYPETYPETYPE HAND HAND HAND HAND SERIESSERIESSERIESSERIES J.D.J.D.J.D.J.D. ELEVELEVELEVELEVSIZESIZESIZESIZE NOTESNOTESNOTESNOTES SERIESSERIESSERIESSERIES NOTESNOTESNOTESNOTES HDWEHDWEHDWEHDWEELEVELEVELEVELEVQTYQTYQTYQTY FRAME DOOR HEADHEADHEADHEAD ANCHORANCHORANCHORANCHORULULULUL OPENING M SW16 PROFILE CONSTRUCTIONGAUGE M C/CM STANDARD PROFILES SPECIAL PROFILES DEM/DEC DOUBLE EGRESS MK/CK INTEGRATED CURISEALWM/WC CASED OPEN-NO STOP TB SOUND RATED QM/QC THERMAL BREAK 18 16 14 STANDARD GALVANIZED GALVANIZE CRS A60 G90 STAINLESS STEEL 18A60 16A60 14A60 12G90 18G90 16G90 14G90 12SS 18SS 16SS 14SS 12A6012 CONSTRUCTION GAUGESJ.D J.D 1/2" 1/2" * * * 7/16" ON 5-3/4" J.D. M AND G PROFILE FRAMES ONLY, 1/2" EVERY OTHER CASE. GJ.D * * THE INFORMATION ON THIS PAGE IS MEANT TO DESCRIBE THE FRAME NOMENCLATURE USED IN THIS SCHEDULE. IT IS NOT AN INDICATION OF THE ACTUAL PRODUCTS USED ON THIS PROJECT. KD KNOCK DOWN FOR FIELD ASSEMBLY SW SEAM WELDED FW FULLY WELDED ME/CE/CME EQUAL RABBETS HM FRAME SERIES TABLE KELLEY Bros. PAGE #1A 1/23/2014 707 S18 CORE EDGEGAUGE S N T EDGE CONSTRUCTION VISIBLE (STANDARD) (Vertical joint seams at the hinge and lock edges) WELDED 6" ON CENTER AND EPOXY FILLED - SEAMLESS WELDED CONTINUOUSLY AND GROUND SMOOTH - SEAMLESS 20 18 16 14 GAUGES STANDARD GALVANIZED GALVANIZE CRS A60 G90 STAINLESS STEEL 20A60 18A60 16A60 14A60 20G90 18G90 16G90 14G90 20SS 18SS 16SS 14SS CONSTRUCTION 707 727 737 747 757 777 POLYSTYRENE STANDARD (OPTIONAL CORES AS NOTED) 250 DEGREE TEMPERATURE RISE RATE BULLET RESISTANT VERTICALLY STEEL STIFFENED SOUND RATED (STC38 - STC54) EMBOSSED 6 PANEL MODEL 847 857 SECURITY GRADE 1 3/4" THK. MAX. SECURITY GRADE 2" THK. 607 POLYSTYRENE DOOR #DOOR #DOOR #DOOR #LOCATIONLOCATIONLOCATIONLOCATION TYPETYPETYPETYPE HAND HAND HAND HAND J.D.J.D.J.D.J.D. ELEVELEVELEVELEVSIZESIZESIZESIZE NOTESNOTESNOTESNOTESSERIESSERIESSERIESSERIES NOTESNOTESNOTESNOTES HDWEHDWEHDWEHDWEELEVELEVELEVELEVQTYQTYQTYQTY FRAME DOOR HEADHEADHEADHEAD ANCHORANCHORANCHORANCHORULULULUL OPENING SERIESSERIESSERIESSERIES THE INFORMATION ON THIS PAGE IS MEANT TO DESCRIBE THE DOOR NOMENCLATURE USED IN THIS SCHEDULE. IT IS NOT AN INDICATION OF THE ACTUAL PRODUCTS USED ON THIS PROJECT. 707E6 TRIO E PAGE #HM DOOR SERIES TABLE 1BKELLEY Bros.1/23/2014 K KK K = KEY / SECURE SIDE RULE # 1 THE DOOR HAND ( SWING ) IS DESCRIBED BY STANDING ON THE KEYSIDE ( SECURE SIDE / EXTERIOR SIDE ) AND FACING THE DOOR RULE # 2 IF THE DOOR SWINGS " IN " ( AWAY FROM YOU ) - THE HAND IS " LEFT HAND " L OR " RIGHT HAND "R RULE # 3 IF THE DOOR SWINGS " OUT " ( TOWARD YOU ) - THE HAND IS " LEFT HAND REVERSE BEVEL "LR RROR " RIGHT HAND REVERSE BEVEL " EXCEPTIONS : ----- Prison doors, using specialized prison hardware, have a very unique system to describe the door and hardware handing. ----- Roof doors can have "KEY SIDE / SECURE SIDE" on the inside of the building, to prevent unauthorized acces to the roof. L RRLR SINGLE DOOR HAND SYMBOLS : R............................ L............................. LR.......................... RR.......................... DAL........................ DAR....................... RIGHT HAND LEFT HAND RIGHT HAND REVERSE BEVEL LEFT HAND REVERSE BEVEL DOUBLE ACTING RIGHT HAND DOUBLE ACTING LEFT HAND PAIR DOORS HAND SYMBOLS : SUFFIX " A " BELOW ARE SYMBOLS UNIQUE TO PAIR DOORS DER....................... DEL........................ BOTH ACTIVE REGULAR HAND DOUBLE EGRESS RIGHT DOUBLE EGRESS LEFT BA.......................... BRA.........................BOTH ACTIVE REVERSE BEVEL HAND R K ----- Hotel communicating doors ( i.e. two doors on one frame to connect two suites ) the hand is described from the space between the doors. ----- Hotel communicating doors, one single door to connect two suites, the hand is always described from the push side. AFTER SINGLE DOOR SYMBOL , e.g. : LA, RRA DOOR #LOCATION TYPE HAND SERIES J.D. ELEVSIZE NOTES SERIES NOTES HDWEELEVQTY FRAME DOOR HEAD ANCHORUL OPENING HANDING TABLE KELLEY Bros. PAGE #1C 1/23/2014 1. MATERIALS SHOWN ON THESE DRAWINGS WILL BE MANUFACTURED PER # ANSI - SDI 100 STANDARDS FOR STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES. 2. DOOR AND FRAMES WILL BE REINFORCED FOR SURFACE MOUNTED HARDWARE AS REQUIRED. DRILLING AND TAPPING FOR SURFACE MOUNTED HARDWARE BY OTHERS. DOORS AND FRAMES WILL BE PREPARED AND REINFORCED FOR MORTISE HARDWARE. HOLES FOR THIS M0RTISE HARDWARE WILL BE DRILLED AT THE FACTORY EXCEPT FOR TRIM MOUNTING HOLES AND THRU BOLT HOLES. 3. ALL DOORS AND FRAMES WILL BE PHOSPHATIZED AND RECEIVE ONE COAT OF BAKED ON GRAY PRIMER. 4. ALL FRAMES WILL BE SUPPLIED WITH JAMB AND BASE ANCHORS AS SHOWN. 5. FRAMES WILL BE PREPARED FOR " PUSH IN SILENCERS " WHEN SILENCERS ARE SUPPLIED BY HARDWARE. ( 3 PCS. ON SINGLE AND 2 PCS ON PAIR ) 6. GLASS, GLAZING AND INSTALLATION BY OTHERS. 7. ALL DOORS WILL HAVE 5/8 " UNDERCUT , UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 8. ALL DOORS AND FRAMES WILL BE MARKED WITH THE ARCHITECT'S NUMBER UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE. 9. THE HARDWARE CUT OUT LOCATIONS SHOWN ON THESE DRAWINGS ARE THIS MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD LOCATIONS FOR STD.HARDWARE AND IS NOT INTENDED TO BE USED BY ANY OUTSIDE VENDOR OR TRADE. UPON REQUEST REGISTERED HDWE. LOCATIONS WILL BE MAILED. 10. STORE DOORS AND FRAMES TO PREVENT RUST AND DAMAGE. AVOID USE OF NON-VENTED PLASTIC SHELTERS , WHICH CREATE A HUMIDITY CHAMBER. IF THE DOOR WRAPPER BECOMES WET , REMOVE IT IMMEDIATLY AND PROVIDE 1/4" SPACE BETWEEN DOORS TO PROMOTE AIR CIRCULATION. 11. WHEN ANTI-FREEZE ADDITIVES ARE USED IN THE MORTAR , THE INSIDE OF THE FRAMES MUST BE COATED WITH BITUMINOUS ASPHALT MATERIAL TO PREVENT RUST AND WILL BE DONE IN THE FIELD BY THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR. 12. ANY MEASUREMENTS OF EXISTING CONDITIONS AND HARDWARE LOCATION CUT OUTS WILL BE FURNISHED BY THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR. HOLLOW METAL FRAMES AND DOORS STANDARDS : 1/23/2014 JobID: 7-13-181 CU SIBLEY HALL Wood Doors : Hollow Metal : KELLEY Bros. GENERAL NOTES : Please review all hollow metal for accuracy or omissions. Some notes need to be addressed prior to the ordering of any material. SPECIAL NOTE: ALL APPLIED CLADDING IS TO BE PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY OTHERS. 1/23/2014 JobID: 7-13-181 CU SIBLEY HALL ( See Door Schedule "NOTES" columns )KELLEY Bros. SPECIAL FRAME AND DOOR NOTES : Door Frame F1 = FRAME CHANGED TO DOUBLE RABBETED BY ARCHITECTS REVIEW. GC PLEASE VERIFY FACE OF FRAMES TO BE 1 3/4" OR STANDARD 2". ALSO IS FRAME TO BE KNOCK DOWN OR WELDED? VERIFY WALL TYPE 4 REQUIRING 5 7/8" JD AS SCHEDULED IS AS REQUIRED OR ADVISE OTHERWISE. D1 = DRAWING A801 INTERIOR DOOR SCHEDULE SHOWS OPERATION ( hand ) THAT PUTS THE KEY CYLINDER ON PULL SIDE OF DOOR. PLEASE VERIFY THIS IS THE INTENT. D2 = DOOR BY OTHERS D3 = CLADDING BY OTHERS. KELLEY BROS. TO PROVIDE 1 3/4" DOOR ONLY AS SCHEDULED. 1/23/2014 JobID: 7-13-181 CU SIBLEY HALL ELECTRIC CLOSET313 UNPR 1 9'-9 1/2" x 10'-9" x 1-3/4"---LRA CG-16-FW 4 3/4"3F3 6.00D2AL6/WSC1 3/4" WATER CLOSET 300TC 314 SNGL 1 3'-0" x 8'-0" x 1-3/4"---LR CG-16-FW 4 3/4"3F 3.00D3F747-18-T6/WSC1 3/4" JANITOR CLOSET 300JC 315 SNGL 1 3'-0" x 8'-0" x 1-3/4"---RR CG-16-FW 4 3/4"3F 5.00D3F747-18-T6/WSC1 3/4" WATER CLOSET 300TB 316 SNGL 1 2'-6" x 8'-0" x 1-3/4"---RR CG-16-FW 5 7/8"3F4 4.00D3F747-18-T6/WSC1 3/4" ATTIC ACCESS401 SNGL 1 4'-6 5/8" x 4'-2 5/8" x 1-3/4" ---LR CG-16-FW 4 3/4"3F1 7.00D1;D3F747-18-T6/WSC1 3/4" ATTIC ACCESS402 SNGL 1 4'-6 5/8" x 4'-2 5/8" x 1-3/4" ---RR CG-16-FW 4 3/4"3F1 7.00D1;D3F747-18-T6/WSC1 3/4" MECHANICAL ROOM B- 41 B41 SNGL 1 3'-0" x 7'-0" x 1-3/4"B60 L CM-16-FW 5 7/8"3F2 2.00F747-18-TF16/WSC1 3/4" NEW STORAGE ROOM B- 47 B47 SNGL 1 3'-0" x 7'-0" x 1-3/4"B60 R CM-16-FW 5 7/8"3F2 2.00F747-18-TF16/WSC1 3/4" HdweNotesElevSeriesNotesAnchorHeadElevJ.D.SeriesHandUL DOORFRAME HdweElevSeriesNotesElevSeriesHandLabelQtySizeTypeLocationNotesAnchorHeadElevJ.D.Series OPENING Door # ---Bldg/Phase: 1/23/2014 JobID: 7-13-181 CU SIBLEY HALL 3'3 1/2"8'1 3/4"1 3/4"3'1 3/4"8'1 3/4"A A A Elevation: 3F 2 3/8"1/2"1/2"1 3/4"4 3/4"3/8"3/8"1 15/16"2 13/16"5/8"A Kelley Bros - [Frame Elevations]CU SIBLEY HALLJob Number: 7-13-181 Page 1 of 5 3'3 1/2"8'1 3/4"1 3/4"3'1 3/4"8'1 3/4"A A A Elevation: 3F 2 3/8"1/2"1/2"1 3/4"4 3/4"3/8"3/8"1 15/16"2 13/16"5/8"A Kelley Bros - [Frame Elevations] CU SIBLEY HALLJob Number: 7-13-181 Page 1 of 51/23/2014 JobID: 7-13-181 CU SIBLEY HALL 4'10 1/8"4'4 3/8"1 3/4"4'6 5/8"1 3/4"4'2 5/8"1 3/4"AA A Elevation: 3F1 2 3/8"1/2"1/2"1 3/4"4 3/4"3/8"3/8"1 15/16"2 13/16"5/8"A Kelley Bros - [Frame Elevations]CU SIBLEY HALLJob Number: 7-13-181 Page 2 of 5 4'10 1/8"4'4 3/8"1 3/4"4'6 5/8"1 3/4"4'2 5/8"1 3/4"AA A Elevation: 3F1 2 3/8"1/2"1/2"1 3/4"4 3/4"3/8"3/8"1 15/16"2 13/16"5/8"A Kelley Bros - [Frame Elevations] CU SIBLEY HALLJob Number: 7-13-181 Page 2 of 51/23/2014 JobID: 7-13-181 CU SIBLEY HALL 3'4"7'2"2"3'2"7'2"AA A Elevation: 3F2 VERIFY 2" FACE FRAME AS DETAILED IS AS REQUIRED.3/8"1/2"2"1 15/16"5/8"2 3/8"1 9/16"2"5/8"1/2"3/8"5 7/8" A Kelley Bros - [Frame Elevations]CU SIBLEY HALLJob Number: 7-13-181 Page 3 of 5 3'4"7'2"2"3'2"7'2"AA A Elevation: 3F2 VERIFY 2" FACE FRAME AS DETAILED IS AS REQUIRED.3/8"1/2"2"1 15/16"5/8"2 3/8"1 9/16"2"5/8"1/2"3/8"5 7/8" A Kelley Bros - [Frame Elevations] CU SIBLEY HALLJob Number: 7-13-181 Page 3 of 51/23/2014 JobID: 7-13-181 CU SIBLEY HALL 10'1"10'10 3/4"1 3/4"9'9 1/2"1 3/4"10'9"1 3/4"AA A Elevation: 3F3 2 3/8"1/2"1/2"1 3/4"4 3/4"3/8"3/8"2 1/4"2 1/2"5/8"A Kelley Bros - [Frame Elevations]CU SIBLEY HALLJob Number: 7-13-181 Page 4 of 5 10'1"10'10 3/4"1 3/4"9'9 1/2"1 3/4"10'9"1 3/4"AA A Elevation: 3F3 2 3/8"1/2"1/2"1 3/4"4 3/4"3/8"3/8"2 1/4"2 1/2"5/8"A Kelley Bros - [Frame Elevations] CU SIBLEY HALLJob Number: 7-13-181 Page 4 of 51/23/2014 JobID: 7-13-181 CU SIBLEY HALL 2'9 1/2"8'1 3/4"1 3/4"2'6"1 3/4"8'1 3/4"AA B Elevation: 3F4 2 3/8"1 1/8"1/2"1 3/4"5 7/8"3/8"3/8"1 15/16"3 15/16"5/8"A 2 3/8"1/2"1/2"1 3/4"5 7/8"3/8"3/8"1 15/16"3 15/16"5/8"B Kelley Bros - [Frame Elevations]CU SIBLEY HALLJob Number: 7-13-181 Page 5 of 5 2'9 1/2"8'1 3/4"1 3/4"2'6"1 3/4"8'1 3/4"AA B Elevation: 3F4 2 3/8"1 1/8"1/2"1 3/4"5 7/8"3/8"3/8"1 15/16"3 15/16"5/8"A 2 3/8"1/2"1/2"1 3/4"5 7/8"3/8"3/8"1 15/16"3 15/16"5/8"B Kelley Bros - [Frame Elevations] CU SIBLEY HALLJob Number: 7-13-181 Page 5 of 51/23/2014 JobID: 7-13-181 CU SIBLEY HALL LEVENBETTS 508 W 26 ST 317 NEW YORK NEW YORK 10001 T 212 242 1414 WEB WWW.LEVENBETTS.COM SUBMITTAL COVER Project Name: Cornell University, East Sibley Hall, Third Floor Owner: Cornell University To: The Pike Company Attn: Norm Rockefeller Address : One Circle Street Rochester, NY 14607 Contractors Submittal # 078413-002 Date of Submittal: 05/15/2014 Date of Response: 05/21/2014 Type of Submittal Product Data Color Selection O&M Manual Shop Drawings Sample Record Document Substitution Yes No Product Identification Contract Dwg. No.: Product Name: Part/Paragraph: Manufacturer: Comments (Architect Use Only) Reviewed Revise and Resubmit Rejected Furnish as Noted Corrections or comments made on submittals and/or shop drawings during this review do not relieve the contractor from compliance with requirements of the drawings and specifications. This check is only for review of general conformance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. The contractor is responsible for confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions; selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction; coordinating his work with that of all other trades; and performing his work in a safe and satisfactory manner. By: Andrew Feuerstein, LEVENBETTS Date: 05/21/14 Architect Comments The PIKE Company SUBMITTAL COVER BY THIS SUBMITTAL HAS BEEN REVIEWED ARCHITECT'S STAMP WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE PIKE COMPANY AS COMPLYING BY: _____________________ DATE: RECEIVED STAMPS 5/15/2014 PIKE JOB NO:13897 PROJECT NO: 5/15/2014DATE:Pike Submittal No: 078413-002 General Contracting The Pike Company, Inc. Construction Management One Circle Street, Rochester, NY 14607 Phone: (585) 271-5256 / 800 264 PIKE / Fax: (585) 271-3101Specialty Contracting Facility Service E-mail: pike@pikeco.com / Online: www.pikeco.com Program Management DESCRIPTION OF SUBMITTAL: REFERENCES:Spec. Section:Review Cycle No.:078413 Remarks: Typical Firestop / Smoke Seal Details Firestops and SmokesealsSUBMITTAL NAME: Drawings:Supplier: Albany - Phone: (518) 371-5900 Pike Branch Offices: Hartford, CT - Phone: (860) 251-8000 TYPE OF SUBMITTAL:Product Data & Cut Sheet 001 The Pike Company, Inc. PROJECT NAME:Sibley Hall OWNER: ARCHITECT:The Pike Company, Inc. Norm Rockefeller ®Expedition form sb_20b LEVENBETTS 508 W 26 ST 317 NEW YORK NEW YORK 10001 T 212 242 1414 WEB WWW.LEVENBETTS.COM SUBMITTAL COVER Project Name: Cornell University, East Sibley Hall, Third Floor Owner: Cornell University To: The Pike Company Attn: Norm Rockefeller Address : One Circle Street Rochester, NY 14607 Contractors Submittal # 077100-002 Date of Submittal: 02/19/2014 Date of Response: 03/13/2014 Type of Submittal Product Data Color Selection O&M Manual Shop Drawings Sample Record Document Substitution Yes No Product Identification Contract Dwg. No.: Product Name: Part/Paragraph: Manufacturer: Comments (Architect Use Only) Reviewed Revise and Resubmit Rejected Furnish as Noted Corrections or comments made on submittals and/or shop drawings during this review do not relieve the contractor from compliance with requirements of the drawings and specifications. This check is only for review of general conformance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. The contractor is responsible for confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions; selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction; coordinating his work with that of all other trades; and performing his work in a safe and satisfactory manner. By: Andrew Feuerstein, LEVENBETTS Date: 03/13/14 Architect Comments 1. Contractor to provide CB-18 Anchor System, see attached SK-A10 for details. 2. Contractor to maintain clearance from skylight curbs as required. SECTION DETAIL @ ROOF ANCHORS Scale: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"01 NEW 3'-0" LONG C12 x 20.7 NEW L7 x 4 x 3/8" BOLTED TO CHANNEL W/ (3) 5/8" BOLTS STAINLESS STEEL POST NEW ROOF DECKING. CORE TO PERMIT INSTALLATION OF ANCHORS NEW CABLE SYSTEM COMPONENTS (TERMINAL HOLDS, TENSIONERS, INTERMEDIATES, CABLE AND SLIDERS) TO BE INSTALLED BY CERTIFIED INSTALLER NEW 3/8" x 12" x 12" BASE PLATE PRE-MOUNTED TO POST. BOLT TO NEW CHANNEL W/ (6) 1/2" BOLTS @ PRE-DRILLED LOCATIONS EXISTING RAFTER NEW (4) 3/8" LAG SCREWS NEW SISTER MEMBER, (2) LOCATIONS PER ANCHOR 3"3-TAB ASPHALT SHINGLES (2) LAYERS SELF-ADHERING ROOFING UNDERLAYMENT SELF-ADHERING WATERPROOF MEMBRANE @ AROUND ROOF PENETRATION 6" SPRAY FOAM ROOF INSULATION 1'-6"LEVENBETTS | East Sibley Hall, Third Floor | Roof Anchor Detail | Scale: As Noted | 3.10.14 | SK-A10 The PIKE Company SUBMITTAL COVER BY THIS SUBMITTAL HAS BEEN REVIEWED ARCHITECT'S STAMP WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE PIKE COMPANY AS COMPLYING BY: _____________________ DATE: RECEIVED STAMPS 2/19/2014 PIKE JOB NO:13897 PROJECT NO: 2/19/2014DATE:Pike Submittal No: 077100-002 General Contracting The Pike Company, Inc. Construction Management One Circle Street, Rochester, NY 14607 Phone: (585) 271-5256 / 800 264 PIKE / Fax: (585) 271-3101Specialty Contracting Facility Service E-mail: pike@pikeco.com / Online: www.pikeco.com Program Management DESCRIPTION OF SUBMITTAL: REFERENCES:Spec. Section:Review Cycle No.:077100 Remarks: Fall Protection System Package Roof Specialties and AccessoriesSUBMITTAL NAME: Drawings:Supplier: Albany - Phone: (518) 371-5900 Pike Branch Offices: Hartford, CT - Phone: (860) 251-8000 TYPE OF SUBMITTAL:Product Data & Shop Drawing 001 Empire Protection & Safety LLC PROJECT NAME:Sibley Hall OWNER: ARCHITECT:The Pike Company, Inc. Norm Rockefeller ®Expedition form sb_20b GUARDIAN FALL PROTECTION 6305 231st St Kent WA 98032ŏTel (800) 466-6385ŏFax (800) 670-7892 www.guardianfall.com SUBMITTAL REVIEW FORM To: Date: Sent By: ESG Project #: Subject: Attached Materials Prelim. Shop Drawings Stamped Shop Drawings Change Order O&M Manual Calculations Warranty Information Specifications Technical Data Sheet Notes: Verification Needed – Review/Comments Required Maximum Insulation/Roof Build Up Maximum Depth From Top of Completed Roof to Bottom of Deck Obstruction to Layout Review of Structural Notes Verification of Roof Type Specifications Consideration of Waterproofing Requirements Review of Exclusions Reviewed By/Date: ✔✔✔✔ ✔✔✔✔ GUARDIAN CB-36 ANCHOR GUARDIAN SYSTEM LEGEND CABLE AND ABSORBINATOR SYSTEM 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 F F F F F F PROJECT NO: SHEET NO: ESG02178 CLIENT: LOCATION: DRAWING NO:ALABAMA ROOFING & SHEET METAL NEW YORK, NY PREPARED BY:ALM ORIGINAL (REV. 0) ISSUE DATE: --/--/-- REVISION 1 DATE:--/--/-- 12/31/13 REVISION 2 DATE:NOTE: SCALED FOR 11x17 PAPER 1 OF 3 CUSH-01 WORKER EQUIPMENT NOTES: 1. ANCHOR LAYOUT DOES NOT PROVIDE FULL ROOF FALL PROTECTION COVERAGE. 2.ANCHORS SHALL BE RIGGED SUCH THAT THE USER CAN NEITHER FREE FALL MORE THAN 6 FEET, NOR CONTACT ANY LOWER LEVEL. (OSHA 1926.502(D)(14)) 3.USE OF ANSI Z359.13-2012 APPROVED PERSONAL FALL PROTECTION EQUIPMENT THAT IS RATED TO 1,800 LBS MAXIMUM ARRESTING FORCE (HUMAN BODY) IS REQUIRED. 4.USE OF AN ANSI Z359.1-2007 APPROVED FULL BODY HARNESS IS REQUIRED. STRUCTURAL NOTES: 1.HORIZONTAL LIFELINE ANCHOR LOADS ARE LIMITED TO A MAXIMUM FORCE OF 2,500 LBS WITH USE OF THE GUARDIAN SHOCK ABSORBER. 2.FALL PROTECTION ANCHORS ARE DESIGNED FOR AN ULTIMATE LOAD OF 5,000 LBS. 3.THE ABILITY OF THE BUILDING STRUCTURE TO SUPPORT THE LOADS TRANSFERRED FROM THE ANCHORS ATTACHMENT SURFACE SHALL BE ENSURED BY OTHERS. ANCHOR PLACEMENT GENERAL NOTES: 1.FINAL ANCHOR LOCATIONS TO BE DETERMINED IN FIELD. 2.ANCHORS SHALL NOT BE CLOSER THAN 6FT TO THE LEADING EDGE 3.ANCHOR U-BAR TO BE INSTALLED WITH THE ORIENTATION SHOW IN PLANS. 4.CONTRACTOR TO ENSURE NO OBSTRUCTIONS EXIST BETWEEN ANCHOR POINTS THAT MAY INTERFERE WITH INSTALLATION OF HORIZONTAL LIFELINES. ABSORBINATOR HORIZONTAL LIFELINE GENERAL NOTES: 1.EACH SINGLE POINT ANCHOR IS DESIGNED FOR USE BY ONE INDIVIDUAL AS A PERSONAL FALL ARREST OR RESTRAINT SYSTEM. 2.EACH HORIZONTAL LIFELINE IS DESIGNED FOR UP TO TWO USERS IN FALL ARREST OR FOUR USERS IN FALL RESTRAINT. 3.25 FEET OF VERTICAL CLEARANCE IS REQUIRED FOR SYSTEMS TO BE USED IN FALL ARREST. 4.THE SYSTEMS SHALL BE USED WITH SELF RETRACTING LIFELINE IF THE MINIMUM VERTICAL CLEARANCE IS NOT MET. 5.THE FALL PROTECTION ANCHORS AND LIFELINES SHALL NOT BE USED TO HOIST MATERIALS OR EQUIPMENT. 6.A COMPETENT PERSON INDEPENDENT OF THE USER SHALL INSPECT THESE SYSTEMS ON A BI-ANNUAL BASIS. 7.A QUALIFIED PERSON TRAINED IN THE OPERATION OF HORIZONTAL LIFELINES SHALL INSPECT THESE SYSTEMS ON AN ANNUAL BASIS. 8.ALL WORKERS USING THESE SYSTEMS SHALL BE TRAINED ON THE PROPER USE OF HORIZONTAL LIFELINES. 9.RETIREMENT OF THESE SYSTEMS SHALL RESULT IN TERMINATION OF ALL COMPONENTS RENDERING THEM USELESS FOR ANY OTHER FALL PROTECTION SYSTEM. 10.NO SUBSTITUTIONS TO MATERIALS OR MANUFACTURER'S EQUIPMENT IS PERMITTED. 11.INITIAL CABLE SAG FROM HORIZONTAL PLANE AT MID-SPAN TO BE WITHIN TWO AND SIX INCHES. 12.SYSTEM SHALL BE INSTALLED IN STRAIGHT RUNS AND THERE SHALL NOT BE ABRUPT TURNS IN THE CABLE. 13.REFER TO THE SYSTEMS USER GUIDE FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. N BUILDING PLAN VIEW SCALE:1/20" = 1'-0" CORNELL UNIVERSITY SIBLEY HALL ABSORBINATOR SYSTEM PLANS DRAWINGS CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE CB-18 ANCHOR SYSTEM, SEE ATTACHED SK-A10 FOR DETAILS CONTRACTOR TO MAINTAIN CLEARANCE FROM SKYLIGHT CURBS AS REQUIRED PROJECT NO: SHEET NO: ESG02178 CLIENT: LOCATION: DRAWING NO:ALABAMA ROOFING & SHEET METAL NEW YORK, NY PREPARED BY:ALM ORIGINAL (REV. 0) ISSUE DATE: --/--/-- REVISION 1 DATE:--/--/-- 12/31/13 REVISION 2 DATE:NOTE: SCALED FOR 11x17 PAPER 2 OF 3 CUSH-02 DETAIL 1: ABSORBINATOR LIFELINE INSTALLATION SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" DETAIL 2: CB-36 ANCHOR INSTALLATION ON CHANNEL STEEL SCALE: 1" = 1'-0" CORNELL UNIVERSITY SIBLEY HALL ABSORBINATOR SYSTEM INSTALLATION DETAILS LIFELINE NOTES: 1.SEE CUSH-01 FOR HORIZONTAL LIFELINE GENERAL NOTES, WORKER EQUIPMENT NOTES, AND STRUCTURAL NOTES. 2.ABSORBINATOR DELUXE KITS WITH TWO SHOCK ABSORBERS SHALL BE USED FOR SPANS OVER 60 FEET. 3.INITIAL CABLE SAG FROM HORIZONTAL PLANE AT MID-SPAN TO BE WITHIN TWO AND SIX INCHES. 4.CLAMPS TO BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH SPECIFICATIONS PROVIDED IN USER'S MANUAL. 5.REFER TO SYSTEM USER GUIDE FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. STRUCTURAL NOTES: 1.HORIZONTAL LIFELINE ANCHOR LOADS ARE LIMITED TO A MAXIMUM FORCE OF 2,500 LBS WITH USE OF THE GUARDIAN SHOCK ABSORBER. 2.FALL PROTECTION ANCHORS ARE DESIGNED FOR AN ULTIMATE LOAD OF 5,000 LBS. 3.THE ABILITY OF THE BUILDING STRUCTURE TO SUPPORT THE LOADS TRANSFERRED FROM THE ANCHORS ATTACHMENT SURFACE SHALL BE ENSURED BY OTHERS. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE CB-18 ANCHOR SYSTEM, SEE ATTACHED SK-A10 FOR DETAILS PROJECT NO: SHEET NO: ESG02178 CLIENT: LOCATION: DRAWING NO:ALABAMA ROOFING & SHEET METAL NEW YORK, NY PREPARED BY:ALM ORIGINAL (REV. 0) ISSUE DATE: --/--/-- REVISION 1 DATE:--/--/-- 12/31/13 REVISION 2 DATE:NOTE: SCALED FOR 11x17 PAPER 3 OF 3 CUSH-03 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SIBLEY HALL ABSORBINATOR SYSTEM MATERIALS 1 CB-36 ANCHOR SCALE: 1" = 1'-0" MATERIALS LIST ITEM QTY DESCRIPTION DIMENSION MATERIAL PART NUMBER 1 GUARDIAN PART 1613#01 167 L.F.WIRE ROPE - 3/8" DIA - 7x19 SEE PLANS GUARDIAN PART #01400SS 11 S.S. 304CB-36 ANCHOR SEE DETAIL 3 2 2 GUARDIAN PART #15044SSABSORBINATOR KIT LESS THEN 60'-- 2 GUARDIAN PART #15045SSABSORBINATOR KIT LESS THEN 100'-- S.S. 3044 S.S. 304 S.S. 304 WELDING NOTES (PIPE TO PLATE): 1.ALL WELDING SHALL BE PERFORMED BY AN AWS CERTIFIED WELDER USING E-70XX ROD OR WIRE FEED. 2.PREP GALVANIZED AREAS PER AWS D19.0 PRIOR TO WELDING. 3.TOUCH-UP GALVANIZED AREA AFTER WELDING PER ASTM A780. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE CB-18 ANCHOR SYSTEM, SEE ATTACHED SK-A10 FOR DETAILS Product Name: Absorbinator Instruction Manual Part #: 15021; 15044; 15045; 15070; 15071; 15072; 15073; 15074; 15075 Do not throw away these instructions! Read and understand these instructions before using equipment! Table of Contents Introduction 1-2 Applicable Safety Standards 2 Worker Classifications 2 Safety Information 3-4 Product Specific Applications 6 Limitations 7-10 Components and Specifications 11 Maintenance, Cleaning, and Storage 5 Inspection 5 Installation and Use 12-16 Inspection Log 18 Notes 18 Introduction Thank you for purchasing a Guardian Fall Protection Absorbinator. This manual must be read and understood in its entirety, and used as part of an employee training program as required by OSHA or any applicable state agency. This and any other included instructions must be made available to the user of the equipment. The user must understand how to safely and effectively use the Absorbinator, and all fall safety equipment used in combination with the Absorbinator. Labels 17 Guardian Fall Protection 6305 S. 231st St., Kent, WA 98032 phone: (800) 466-6385 fax: (800) 670-7892 www.guardianfall.com1 User Information Date of First Use: Serial #: Trainer: User: Applicable Safety Standards When used according to instruction specifications, this product meets or exceeds all applicable OSHA 1926 Subpart M, OSHA 1910, ANSI Z359.1-2007, and ANSI A10.32-2012 standards for fall protection. Applicable standards and regulations depend on the type of work being done, and also might include state-specific regulations. Consult regulatory agencies for more information on personal fall arrest systems and associated components. Worker Classifications !CAUTION Understand the following definitions of those who work near or who may be exposed to fall hazards. Qualified Person: A person with an accredited degree or certification, and with extensive experience or sufficient professional standing, who is considered proficient in planning and reviewing the conformity of fall protection and rescue systems. Competent Person: A highly trained and experienced person who is ASSIGNED BY THE EMPLOYER to be responsible for all elements of a fall safety program, including, but not limited to, its regulation, management, and application. A person who is proficient in identifying existing and predictable fall hazards, and who has the authority to stop work in order to eliminate hazards. Authorized Person: A person who is assigned by their employer to work around or be subject to potential or existing fall hazards. It is the responsibility of a Qualified or Competent person to supervise the job site and ensure all applicable safety regulations are complied with. Guardian Fall Protection 6305 S. 231st St., Kent, WA 98032 phone: (800) 466-6385 fax: (800) 670-7892 www.guardianfall.com2 Safety Information Do not alter equipment. Do not misuse equipment. Workplace conditions, including, but not limited to, flame, corrosive chemicals, electrical shock, sharp objects, machinery, abrasive substances, weather conditions, and uneven surfaces, must be assessed by a Competent Person before fall protection equipment is selected. The analysis of the workplace must anticipate where workers will be performing their duties, the routes they will take to reach their work, and the potential and existing fall hazards they may be exposed to. Fall protection equipment must be chosen by a Competent Person. Selections must account for all potential hazardous workplace conditions. All fall protection equipment should be purchased new and in an unused condition. Fall protection systems must be selected and installed under the supervision of a Competent Person, and used in a compliant manner. Fall protection systems must be designed in a manner compliant with all federal, state, and safety regulations. Unless explicitly stated otherwise, the maximum allowable free fall distance for lanyards must not exceed 6’. No free fall allowed for non-LE SRLs. SRLs must arrest falls within 54”. Forces applied to anchors must be calculated by a Competent Person. Harnesses and connectors selected must be compliant with manufacturer’s instructions, and must be of compatible size and configuration. A pre-planned rescue procedure in the case of a fall is required. The rescue plan must be project- specific. The rescue plan must allow for employees to rescue themselves, or provide an alternative means for their prompt rescue. Store rescue equipment in an easily accessible and clearly marked area. Training of Authorized Persons to correctly erect, disassemble, inspect, maintain, store, and use equipment must be provided by a Competent Person. Training must include the ability to recognize fall hazards, minimize the likelihood of fall hazards, and the correct use of personal fall arrest systems. Failure to understand and comply with safety regulations may result in serious injury or death. Regulations included herein are not all-inclusive, are for reference only, and are not intended to replace a Competent Person’s judgment or knowledge of federal or state standards. !WARNING Guardian Fall Protection 6305 S. 231st St., Kent, WA 98032 phone: (800) 466-6385 fax: (800) 670-7892 www.guardianfall.com3 Guardian Fall Protection 6305 S. 231st St., Kent, WA 98032 phone: (800) 466-6385 fax: (800) 670-7892 www.guardianfall.com4 NEVER use fall protection equipment of any kind to hang, lift, support, or hoist tools or equipment, unless explicitly certified for such use. Maintenance of equipment must be done according to manufacturer’s instructions. Equipment instructions must be retained for reference. Prior to EACH use, all equipment in a fall protection system must be inspected for any potential or existing deficiencies that may result in its failure or reduced functionality. IMMEDIATELY remove equipment from service if any deficiencies are found. Equipment must be inspected by a Competent Person at least every six months. These inspections must be documented in equipment instruction manual and on equipment inspection grid label. Equipment must be inspected for defects, including, but not limited to, the absence of required labels or markings, improper form/fit/function, evidence of cracks, sharp edges, deformation, corrosion, excessive heating, alteration, excessive wear, fraying, knotting, abrasion, and absence of parts. Equipment that fails inspection in any way must immediately be removed from use, or repaired by an entity approved by the manufacturer. No on-site repair of equipment unless explicitly permitted by Guardian Fall Protection. Equipment subjected to forces of fall arrest must immediately be removed from use. Snap hooks, carabiners, and other connectors must be selected and applied in a compatible fashion. All risk of disengagement must be eliminated. All snap hooks and carabiners must be self-locking and self-closing, and must never be connected to each other. Age, fitness, and health conditions can seriously affect the worker should a fall occur. Consult a doctor if there is any reason to doubt a user’s ability to withstand and safely absorb fall arrest forces or perform set-up of equipment. Pregnant women and minors must not use this equipment. Physical harm may still occur even if fall safety equipment functions correctly. Sustained post-fall suspension may result in serious injury or death. Use trauma relief straps to reduce the effects of suspension trauma. Allowable individual worker weight limit (including all equipment), unless explicitly stated otherwise, is 130-310 lbs. Maintenance, Cleaning, and Storage Repairs to Absorbinators can only be made by a Guardian Fall Protection representative or an entity authorized by Guardian. Contact Guardian for all maintenance and repair needs at: 1-800-466-6385. If a Absorbinator fails inspection in any way, immediately remove it from service, and contact Guardian to inquire about its return or repair. Cleaning after use is important for maintaining the safety and longevity of Absorbinators. Remove all dirt, corrosives, and contaminants from Absorbinators before and after each use. If Absorbinator cannot be cleaned with plain water, use mild soap and water, then rinse and wipe dry. NEVER clean Absorbinators with corrosive substances. When not in use, store equipment where it will not be affected by heat, light, excessive moisture, chemicals, or other degrading elements. KEEP INSTRUCTIONS AVAILABLE FOR REFERENCE. Record Date of First Use. Prior to EACH use, inspect Absorbinator for deficiencies, including, but not limited to, corrosion, deformation, pits, burrs, rough surfaces, sharp edges, cracking, rust, paint buildup, excessive heating, alteration, broken stitching, fraying, bird-caging, and missing or illegible labels. IMMEDIATELY remove Absorbinator from service if defects or damage are found, or if exposed to forces of fall arrest. Measure length of Absorbinator; length must not be greater than 10”. Ensure that applicable work area is free of all damage, including, but not limited to, debris, rot, rust, decay, cracking, and hazardous materials. Ensure that selected work area will support the application-specific minimum loads set forth in this instruction manual. Work area MUST be stable. At least every 6 months, a Competent Person other than the user must inspect Absorbinators. Competent Person inspections MUST be recorded in inspection log in instruction manual. The Competent Person must sign their initials in the box corresponding to the month and year the inspection took place. During inspection, consider all applications and hazards Absorbinators have been subjected to. Inspection Guardian Fall Protection 6305 S. 231st St., Kent, WA 98032 phone: (800) 466-6385 fax: (800) 670-7892 www.guardianfall.com5 Product Specific Applications Personal Fall Arrest: Absorbinators may be used as a component in a Horizontal Lifeline (HLL) system in Personal Fall Arrest (PFAS) applications. Maximum 2 PFAS per entire Absorbinator HLL system. Structure must withstand loads applied in the directions permitted by the system of at least 5,000 lbs. per PFAS in system. Maximum free fall is 6‘, or up to 12’ if used in combination with equipment explicitly certified for such use. Applicable D-ring: Dorsal. Restraint: Absorbinators may be used as a component in a HLL system in Restraint applications. Maximum 4 PFAS per entire Absorbinator HLL system. Restraint systems prevent workers from reaching the leading edge of a fall hazard. Always account for fully deployed length of lanyard/SRL. Structure must withstand loads applied in the directions permitted by the system of at least 1,000 lbs. per PFAS in system. No free fall is permitted. Restraint systems may only be used on surfaces with slopes up to 4/12 (vertical/horizontal). Applicable D-rings: Dorsal, Chest, Side, Shoulder. !WARNING Use of equipment in unintended applications may result in serious injury or death. Maximum 1 attachment per connection point. For all applications: worker weight capacity range (including all clothing, tools, and equipment) is 130-310 lbs., or up to 420 lbs. if used in combination with equipment explicitly certified for such use. Guardian Fall Protection 6305 S. 231st St., Kent, WA 98032 phone: (800) 466-6385 fax: (800) 670-7892 www.guardianfall.com6 Not for simultaneous use in Fall Arrest and Restraint. Guardian Fall Protection 6305 S. 231st St., Kent, WA 98032 phone: (800) 466-6385 fax: (800) 670-7892 www.guardianfall.com7 FALL CLEARANCE CALCULATION Lanyard length (6’ total) Safety factor (3’ total) Deceleration distance (4’ total) Height of harness dorsal D-ring from worker’s feet (6’ total) Required distance from anchorage (19’ total) Limitations Fall Clearance: There must be sufficient clearance below the anchorage connector to arrest a fall before the user strikes the ground or an obstruction. When calculating fall clearance, account for a MINIMUM 3’ safety factor, deceleration distance, user height, length of lanyard/SRL, and all other applicable factors. Diagram shown is an example fall clearance calculation ONLY. Swing Falls: Prior to installation or use, make considerations for eliminating or minimizing all swing fall hazards. Swing falls occur when the anchor is not directly above the location where a fall occurs. Always work as close to in line with the anchor point as possible. Swing falls significantly increase the likelihood of serious injury or death in the event of a fall. Fall Clearance for Absorbinator HLL System: 70-80 18' 7' 80-90 19' 8" 90-100 20' 10" *Clearance Table Using a Self-Retracting Lifeline (SRL) Span (FT) Required Distance 0-10 10' 11" 10-20 12' 0" 20-30 13' 1" 30-40 14' 2" 40-50 15' 4" 50-60 16' 5" 60-70 17' 6" *This table only applies when SRL and HLL are located above harness dorsal D-ring. 60-65 26' 1" 27' 1" 28' 1" 29' 1" 65-70 26' 8" 27' 8" 28' 8" 29' 8" 70-75 27' 5" 28' 5" 29' 5" 30' 5" 75-80 28' 0" 29' 0" 30' 0" 31' 0" 80-85 28 8" 29' 8" 30' 8" 31' 8" 85-90 29' 4" 30' 4" 31' 4" 32' 4" 90-95 30' 0" 31' 0" 32' 0" 33' 0" 95-100 30' 7" 31' 7" 32' 7" 33' 7" Clearance Table Using Energy Absorbing Lanyards Span Length (FT) 3 FT Lanyard 4 FT Lanyard 5 FT Lanyard 6 FT Lanyard 0-10 18' 10" 19' 11" 20' 11" 21' 11' 10-15 19' 7" 20' 7" 21' 7" 22' 7" 15-20 20' 2" 21' 2" 22' 2' 23' 2" 20-25 20' 11" 21' 11" 22' 11" 23' 11" 25-30 21' 6" 22' 6" 23' 6" 24' 6" 30-35 22' 2" 23' 2" 24' 2" 25' 2" 35-40 22' 10" 23' 10" 24' 10" 26' 10" 40-45 23' 6" 24' 6" 25' 6" 27' 6" 45-50 24' 1" 25' 1" 26' 1" 28' 1" 50-55 24' 10" 25' 10" 26' 10" 28' 1-" 55-60 25' 5" 26' 5" 27' 5" 29' 5" Guardian Fall Protection 6305 S. 231st St., Kent, WA 98032 phone: (800) 466-6385 fax: (800) 670-7892 www.guardianfall.com8 As shown below, there are potential danger zones for swing falls when using a single HLL span. To eliminate this threat, a different approach using 4 HLL spans is required. SAFE ATTACHMENT ZONE DANGER ZONE - WORK IN THIS AREA NOT ALLOWED Horizontal Lifeline 100’ 120’ 60’ SAFE ATTACHMENT ZONE EXTENDS FOR ENTIRE BUILDING ROOF PERIMETER Horizontal Lifeline 120’ PLACE HLL 6’-10’ BACK FROM LEADING EDGE 60’ Compatibility: When making connections with Absorbinator HLL system, eliminate all possibility of roll-out. Roll-out occurs when interference between a hook and the attachment point causes the hook gate to unintentionally open and release. All connections must be selected and deemed compatible with Absorbinator HLL system by a Competent Person. All connector gates must be self-closing and self-locking, and withstand minimum loads of 3,600 lbs. See the following for examples of compatible/incompatible connections: Connector closed and locked to D-ring. OK. Two or more snap hooks or carabiners connected to each other. NO. Two connectors to same D-ring. NO. Connector directly to horizontal lifeline. NO. Connector to integral lanyard. NO. Connector directly to webbing. NO. Application that places load on gate. NO. Incompatible or irregular application, which may increase risk of roll-out. NO. Guardian Fall Protection 6305 S. 231st St., Kent, WA 98032 phone: (800) 466-6385 fax: (800) 670-7892 www.guardianfall.com9 Correct Anchorage Positioning: This chart details allowable working zones required to reduce risk of swing falls and improper side loading. ALWAYS adhere to information specified by chart. Anchor Distance From Leading Edge (Y) Working Distance Along Roof Edge (Either Direction) (X) Working Angle From Perpendicular (Ø) 6’ 10’ 15’ 20’ 25’ 30’ 35’ 40’ 45’ 50’ 55’ 60’ 8’ 9’ - 9” 11’ - 7” 13’ - 3” 14’ - 6” 16’ 17’ - 2” 18’ - 3” 19’ - 4” 19’ - 10” 21’ - 4” 22’ - 3” 53° 45° 38° 33° 30° 28° 26° 24° 23° 21° 21° 21° For example, if the anchorage connector is 6’ from the leading edge (Y), the working distance (X) is 8’ in each direction from the perpendicular, which translates to a 53° working angle. Key: X: Working Distance Along Roof Edge Y: Distance From Leading Edge Ø: Total Working Angle Y X Ø Guardian Fall Protection 6305 S. 231st St., Kent, WA 98032 phone: (800) 466-6385 fax: (800) 670-7892 www.guardianfall.com10 Components and Specifications Guardian Fall Protection 6305 S. 231st St., Kent, WA 98032 phone: (800) 466-6385 fax: (800) 670-7892 www.guardianfall.com11 Absorbinator Steel Shackle Thimble Turnbuckle Fist grip 6’ Premium Cross Arm Strap Components made from some or all of the following: stainless steel, powder-coated steel, aluminum, and polyester. CB-1-B CB-1-W Part #Description 15021 15075 15074 15073 15072 15071 15070 15045 15044 1 Absorbinator & 2 steel shackles 1 Absorbinator, 2 steel shackles, 2 thimbles, 6 fist grips, & (2) 6’ premium cross arm straps 2 Absorbinators, 3 steel shackles, 2 thimbles, 1 turnbuckle, 6 fist grips, & 2 CB-1-Ws 2 Absorbinators, 3 steel shackles, 2 thimbles, 1 turnbuckle, 6 fist grips, & 2 CB-1-Bs 2 Absorbinators, 2 steel shackles, 2 thimbles, 1 turnbuckle, 6 fist grips, & (2) premium cross arm straps 1 Absorbinator, 2 steel shackles, 2 thimbles, 6 fist grips, & 2 CB-1-Ws 1 Absorbinator, 2 steel shackles, 2 thimbles, 6 fist grips, & 2 CB-1-Bs 2 Absorbinators, 3 steel shackles, 1 turnbuckle, 2 thimbles, & 6 fist grips 1 Absorbinator, 2 steel shackles, 2 thimbles, 1 turnbuckle, & 6 fist grips * 3/8” HLL cable (#01400) not included. When ordering cable, add 4’ to total span length to account for system tensioning and required slack. Installation and Use Prior to installation, plan your system: 1. Ensure selected installation location(s) for Absorbinator HLL system(s) will withstand minimum loads as specified by this instruction manual. 2. ALWAYS make considerations to eliminate or reduce swing fall hazards. 3. Fall clearance for each installation location MUST be calculated by a Qualified Person, and MUST be considered in the selection of PFAS equipment (refer to pg. 7). 4. Ensure all components of PFAS are selected and deemed compatible with Absorbinator HLL system by a Competent Person. 5. Ensure entire HLL system design and installation is done under supervision of Qualified Person. NEVER judge HLL tension by eye; ALWAYS measure line sag and keep in concordance with sag requirements specified by this instruction manual. NEVER over-tighten cable. Proper sag in cable reduces forces of fall arrest. 6. If performing installation at heights over 6’, ALWAYS use a complete and independent PFAS until Absorbinator HLL System is fully installed and able to withstand forces of Fall Arrest as specified by this instruction manual. Always maintain 100% tie-off. Guardian recommends using 3/8” diameter cable. DO NOT use vinyl/plastic coated cable. MINIMUM 1 Absorbinator required for systems up to 60’. MINIMUM 2 Absorbinators required for systems longer than 60’. Entire HLL system MUST NOT span more than 100’. Guardian recommends a maximum 20’ between intermediates. * When Absorbinator is used in combination with a Guardian Stingray Anchor HLL system, maximum system length is 300’, and maximum distance between Stingray Anchors is 60’. * NOT for use in VLL system. Installation: Tools needed for installation: - 5/16” (24mm) wrench - 3/4” (19mm) wrench - 19/32” (15mm) wrench - Adjustable wrench - Torque wrench (that measures foot pounds) 1. Select locations for all anchor points in HLL system. Ensure anchor points meet stated strength requirements. Ensure proper fall clearance exists for entire system. 2. Lay out as much of HLL system as possible prior to attaching it to anchorage connectors. Guardian Fall Protection 6305 S. 231st St., Kent, WA 98032 phone: (800) 466-6385 fax: (800) 670-7892 www.guardianfall.com12 Guardian Fall Protection 6305 S. 231st St., Kent, WA 98032 phone: (800) 466-6385 fax: (800) 670-7892 www.guardianfall.com13 *In the event that a 90° corner is needed, two HLL systems may be attached to a single anchor point as shown. 4. Make any other necessary attachments to anchorage connectors. CLOSED EXTENDED 3. Attach Absorbinator to anchor point using provided steel shackle. If system is more than 60’, attach second Absorbinator to anchor point at other end of system. Tighten shackle until at least 1 full thread is visible. 6. Attach one end of turnbuckle to Absorbinator at one end of system, and tighten until at least 1 full thread is visible. 5. Adjust turnbuckle(s) to extended position (see below). Guardian Fall Protection 6305 S. 231st St., Kent, WA 98032 phone: (800) 466-6385 fax: (800) 670-7892 www.guardianfall.com14 7. Place wire rope thimble on other end of turnbuckle. Tighten bolt until at least 1 full thread is visible. Attach second steel shackle and thimble to anchor point or Absorbinator at opposite end of system (second turnbuckle is not used). Tightening bolts on the Absorbinator system YES NO 8. Install O-rings on HLL cable. Then, take one end of 3/8” cable and create a loop around the thimble. See Appendix A (pgs. 15-16) for fist grip installation instructions. Repeat on opposite end of system. 9. Tighten turnbuckle evenly on both ends so there is between 2” - 6” of slack measured vertically at midpoint of span. Qualified Person must make final determination regarding sufficient cable slack. Slack: 2” - 6” Guardian Fall Protection 6305 S. 231st St., Kent, WA 98032 phone: (800) 466-6385 fax: (800) 670-7892 www.guardianfall.com15 Appendix A: Fist Grip: compatible with cable diameters from 3/16” - 5/8”. Efficiency ratings for wire rope end terminations are based upon the catalog breaking strength of wire rope. The efficiency rating of a properly prepared loop or thimble-eye termination for clip sizes 1/8” through 7/8” is 80%, and for 1” through 3--1/2” is 90%. !WARNING Prepare wire rope end termination only as instructed. DO NOT use vinyl/plastic coated wire rope. Apply first load to test the assembly. This load should be of equal or greater weight than loads expected in use. The number of clips shown (see Table 1) is based upon using RRL or RLL wire rope, 6 x 19 or 6 x 37 Class FC or IWRC, IPS or XIP, or XXIP. If Seale construction or similar large outer wire type construction in the 6 x 19 Class is to be used for sizes 1” or larger, add one additional clip. If a pulley (sheave) is used for turning back the wire rope, add one additional clip. The number of clips shown also applies to rotation-resistant RRL wire rope, 8 x 19 Class IPS, XIP, or XXIP sizes 1--1/2” and smaller; and to rotation-resistant RRL wire rope, 19 x 7 Class IPS, XIP, or XXIP sizes 1--1/2” and smaller. For other classes of wire rope not mentioned above, we recommend contacting Crosby Engineering to ensure the desired efficiency rating. The style of wire rope termination used for any application is the obligation of the user. 1. Refer to Table 1 in following these instructions. Turn back specified amount of rope from thimble or loop. Apply first clip one base width from dead end of rope. Use torque wrench to evenly tighten clip, alternating from one nut to the other until reaching the recommended torque. 2. When two clips are required, apply the second clip as near the loop or thimble as possible. Use torque wrench to evenly tighten clip, alternating until reaching the recommended torque. When more than two clips are required, apply the second clip as near the loop or thimble as possible, turn nuts on second clip firmly, but do not tighten. FIGURE 1 FIGURE 2 Guardian Fall Protection 6305 S. 231st St., Kent, WA 98032 phone: (800) 466-6385 fax: (800) 670-7892 www.guardianfall.com16 3. When three or more clips are used, space additional clips equally between first two. Take up rope slack, use torque wrench to tighten on each clip evenly, alternating from one nut to the other until reaching recommended torque. 4. IMPORTANT: Apply first load to test the assembly. This load should be of equal or greater weight than loads expected in use. Next, check and use torque wrench to re-tighten to recommended torque. In accordance with good rigging and maintenance practices, the wire rope end termination should be inspected periodically for wear, abuse, and general adequacy. FIGURE 3 Live End Dead End 5. O-rings and sliders: Guardian provides (2) 2--1/2” O-rings that should be applied to the cable lifeline to allow compatible attachment of snap hooks and other connecting devices. O-rings and sliders must be attached to the lifeline before the system is complete. For systems with multiple intermediate anchor points or for any other questions, contact Guardian Fall Protection. Table 1 Clip Size (in.) Rope Size (in.) Minimum # of Clips Amount of Rope to Turn Back (in.) Torque (ft. lbs.) 3/16 1/4 5/16 3/8 7/16 1/2 9/16 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1--1/8 1--1/4 1--3/8 1--1/2 3/16 1/4 5/16 3/8 7/16 1/2 9/16 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1--1/8 1--1/4 1--3/8 1--1/2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 5 5 6 6 7 4 4 5 5--1/4 6--1/2 11 12--3/4 13--1/2 16 26 37 41 55 62 78 30 30 30 45 65 65 130 130 225 225 225 360 360 500 500 If greater number of clips than shown are used, amount of turn-back should be increased proportionately. Torque values shown are based upon the threads being clean, dry, and free of lubrication. Labels SPECIFICATIONS Material: Peak Dynamic Pullout Load: Average Dynamic Pullout Load: Maximum Elongation: Ultimate Strength: (800) 466.6385 phone (800) 670.7892 fax www.guardianfall.com Model #15021 Made in USA Energy Absorber for Horizontal Lifeline Systems THIS HLL ENERGY ABSORBER IS TO ONLY BE USED AS PART OF A COMPLETE FALL ARREST SYSTEM. AT NO POINT IS THIS TO BE USED AS A PERSONAL ENERGY ABSORBER. THE ABSORBINATOR MUST BE USED WITH AN APPROVED HORIZONTAL LIFELINE OR INSTALLED AND DESIGNED UNDER THE SUPERVISION OF A QUALIFIED PERSON WITH A SAFETY FACTOR OF AT LEAST TWO. READ AND FULLY UNDERSTAND THE MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS SUPPLIED WITH THIS EQUIPMENT. FAILING TO DO SO MAY RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH! Guardian Fall Protection 6305 S. 231st St., Kent, WA 98032 phone: (800) 466-6385 fax: (800) 670-7892 www.guardianfall.com17 Inspection Log Notes If equipment fails inspection IMMEDIATELY REMOVE FROM SERVICE. User must inspect prior to EACH use. Competent Person other than user must complete formal inspection at least every 6 months. Competent Person to inspect and initial. Date of First Use: __________________. Product lifetime is indefinite, as long as it passes pre-use and Competent Person inspections. This inspection log must be specific to one Absorbinator. Separate inspection logs must be used for each Absorbinator. All inspection records must be made visible and available to all users at all times. Guardian Fall Protection 6305 S. 231st St., Kent, WA 98032 phone: (800) 466-6385 fax: (800) 670-7892 www.guardianfall.com18 85150 (Rev. B) 26609 79th Ave S Kent, WA 98032 www.guardianesg.com | (800) 466.6385 – Office | (800) 670.7892 - Fax WARRANTY STATEMENT ESG, in relation to Guardian Fall Protection, expressly warrants to the end-user customer that all supplied fall protection systems are free from defect in material and workmanship at the time of material delivery. Guardian Fall Protection’s obligation under this warranty is limited to product replacement and related labor for a period of 12 months from substantial completion. This warranty is not transferable. Please review Guardian’s Warranty Limitations and Policies for a comprehensive detail of exclusions of coverage, proper procedure and notification of warranty related matters. Limitations of WarrantyP No other person or firm is authorized to assume or assign for Guardian Fall Protection any other liability in connection with the sale or use of Guardian products. Furthermore, this warranty is void as a result (i) improper maintenance or neglect (ii) unauthorized modification (iii) use of the product outside of the product’s specifications (iv) abuse or non-fall related incident. All installed systems are intended for use only by owner authorized personnel in the General Industry. Guardian requires that each system be tagged out for non-use until substantial completion of the project and the building/system has been turned over to the owner. If the installed system is intended to be used, with consent of the building owner, by Construction Industry related personnel, the associated company is fully responsible for properly training its employees in proper use of the fall protection system as well as any damage sustained to the fall protection system during its use. Please review the attached Authorized User Release Form documenting construction industry related use. Policies & ProceduresP In the event that the installed fall protection system’s integrity has been, or is suspected to be, compromised in any way, the system should be immediately tagged out for non-use and a Guardian representative be contacted. FALL RELATED INCIDENT If a fall has occurred on the system the following documentation must be provided, with no exceptions, to Guardian in the event of any claim covered by this warranty; Bi-Annual Inspection Log – All fall protection systems are required by ANSI to be inspected on a minimum basis of every six (6) months by a designated Competent Person in Fall Protection. This inspection is designed to be a visual inspection of all components of the system and is encouraged to be done on a more frequent basis than required. These inspections are not in supplement to the inspection of personal fall protection equipment by the authorized user prior to each use. A log must be kept documenting the following but not limited to; the assigned Competent Person, date in which the system was inspected, and scope and findings of the inspection. (ANSI Z359.2-2007 3.2.4) OSHA 300, 301 Incident Report – A copy of the OSHA 300 and 301 report, documenting the incident must be supplied to Guardian for review and record keeping. As a recordable incident, a fall must be entered on the OSHA 300 Log and 301 Incident Report within seven (7) calendar days of receiving information that a fall has occurred. (OSHA 1904.29) http://www.osha.gov/recordkeeping/new-osha300form1-1-04.pdf 26609 79th Ave S Kent, WA 98032 www.guardianesg.com | (800) 466.6385 – Office | (800) 670.7892 - Fax Upon all required documentation being accounted for and supplied to Guardian within (30) thirty calendar days of the date of incident as shown on the OSHA Incident Report 300/301, Guardian will supply at no cost to the client; replacement parts and all labor in order to take corrective action and certify the system safe for use. If proper documentation is not able to be supplied within the requirements specified herein, the system will be declared to be out of warranty. At this time a quote will promptly be supplied for all necessary replacement parts and associated labor costs. NON FALL RELATED INCIDENT Guardian does not warrant any components of its supplied fall protections systems against any incident other than a documented fall. All damage to the system caused by any action other than a fall is assumed to be the result of (i) improper maintenance or neglect (ii) unauthorized modification (iii) use of the product outside of the product’s specifications (iv) abuse or non-fall related incident. A quote will promptly be supplied for all necessary replacement parts and associated labor costs. Please contact Guardian Fall Protection’s Engineered Services Group for all warranty related inquiries. LEVENBETTS 508 W 26 ST 317 NEW YORK NEW YORK 10001 T 212 242 1414 WEB WWW.LEVENBETTS.COM SUBMITTAL COVER Project Name: Cornell University, East Sibley Hall, Third Floor Owner: Cornell University To: The Pike Company Attn: Norm Rockefeller Address : One Circle Street Rochester, NY 14607 Contractors Submittal # 077100-001 Date of Submittal: 01/29/2014 Date of Response: 02/03/2014 Type of Submittal Product Data Color Selection O&M Manual Shop Drawings Sample Record Document Substitution Yes No Product Identification Contract Dwg. No.: Product Name: Part/Paragraph: Manufacturer: Comments (Architect Use Only) Reviewed Revise and Resubmit Rejected Furnish as Noted Corrections or comments made on submittals and/or shop drawings during this review do not relieve the contractor from compliance with requirements of the drawings and specifications. This check is only for review of general conformance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. The contractor is responsible for confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions; selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction; coordinating his work with that of all other trades; and performing his work in a safe and satisfactory manner. By: Andrew Feuerstein, LEVENBETTS Date: 02/03/14 Architect Comments 1. Remove SRGC Safety Railings 2. Remove SGB Safety Grab Bar The PIKE Company SUBMITTAL COVER BY THIS SUBMITTAL HAS BEEN REVIEWED ARCHITECT'S STAMP WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE PIKE COMPANY AS COMPLYING BY: _____________________ DATE: RECEIVED STAMPS 1/29/2014 PIKE JOB NO:13897 PROJECT NO: 1/29/2014DATE:Pike Submittal No: 077100-001 General Contracting The Pike Company, Inc. Construction Management One Circle Street, Rochester, NY 14607 Phone: (585) 271-5256 / 800 264 PIKE / Fax: (585) 271-3101Specialty Contracting Facility Service E-mail: pike@pikeco.com / Online: www.pikeco.com Program Management DESCRIPTION OF SUBMITTAL: REFERENCES:Spec. Section:Review Cycle No.:077100 Remarks: Nystrom Roof Hatch, Rails and Post Roof Specialties and AccessoriesSUBMITTAL NAME: Drawings:Supplier: Albany - Phone: (518) 371-5900 Pike Branch Offices: Hartford, CT - Phone: (860) 251-8000 TYPE OF SUBMITTAL:Product Data & Shop Drawing 001 Weathermaster Roofing Co., Inc. PROJECT NAME:Sibley Hall OWNER: ARCHITECT:The Pike Company, Inc. Norm Rockefeller ®Expedition form sb_20b LEVENBETTS 508 W 26 ST 317 NEW YORK NEW YORK 10001 T 212 242 1414 WEB WWW.LEVENBETTS.COM SUBMITTAL COVER Project Name: Cornell University, East Sibley Hall, Third Floor Owner: Cornell University To: The Pike Company Attn: Norm Rockefeller Address: One Circle Street Rochester, NY 14607 Contractors Submittal # 073113-002 Date of Submittal: 01/28/2014 Date of Response: 02/07/2014 Type of Submittal Product Data Color Selection O&M Manual Shop Drawings Sample Record Document Substitution Yes No Product Identification Contract Dwg. No.: Product Name: Part/Paragraph: Manufacturer: Comments (Architect Use Only) Reviewed Revise and Resubmit Rejected Furnish as Noted Corrections or comments made on submittals and/or shop drawings during this review do not relieve the contractor from compliance with requirements of the drawings and specifications. This check is only for review of general conformance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. The contractor is responsible for confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions; selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction; coordinating his work with that of all other trades; and performing his work in a safe and satisfactory manner. By: Andrew Feuerstein, LEVENBETTS Date: 02/07/14 Architect Comments 1. Contractor to provide XT30 – English Shingles 2. Contractor to provide full range of color samples for Architects review and approval. 3. No ridge vent required. See detail 04/A506 for ridge detail. The PIKE Company SUBMITTAL COVER BY THIS SUBMITTAL HAS BEEN REVIEWED ARCHITECT'S STAMP WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE PIKE COMPANY AS COMPLYING BY: _____________________ DATE: RECEIVED STAMPS 1/28/2014 PIKE JOB NO:13897 PROJECT NO: 1/28/2014DATE:Pike Submittal No: 073113-002 General Contracting The Pike Company, Inc. Construction Management One Circle Street, Rochester, NY 14607 Phone: (585) 271-5256 / 800 264 PIKE / Fax: (585) 271-3101Specialty Contracting Facility Service E-mail: pike@pikeco.com / Online: www.pikeco.com Program Management DESCRIPTION OF SUBMITTAL: REFERENCES:Spec. Section:Review Cycle No.:073113 Remarks: CetainTeed Shingle and Ridge Vent Asphalt ShinglesSUBMITTAL NAME: Drawings:Supplier: Albany - Phone: (518) 371-5900 Pike Branch Offices: Hartford, CT - Phone: (860) 251-8000 TYPE OF SUBMITTAL:Product Data & Shop Drawing 001 Weathermaster Roofing Co., Inc. PROJECT NAME:Sibley Hall OWNER: ARCHITECT:The Pike Company, Inc. Norm Rockefeller ®Expedition form sb_20b LEVENBETTS 508 W 26 ST 317 NEW YORK NEW YORK 10001 T 212 242 1414 WEB WWW.LEVENBETTS.COM SUBMITTAL COVER Project Name: Cornell University, East Sibley Hall, Third Floor Owner: Cornell University To: The Pike Company Attn: Norm Rockefeller Address : One Circle Street Rochester, NY 14607 Contractors Submittal # 073113-001 Date of Submittal: 01/29/2014 Date of Response: 02/02/2014 Type of Submittal Product Data Color Selection O&M Manual Shop Drawings Sample Record Document Substitution Yes No Product Identification Contract Dwg. No.: Product Name: Part/Paragraph: Manufacturer: Comments (Architect Use Only) Reviewed Revise and Resubmit Rejected Furnish as Noted Corrections or comments made on submittals and/or shop drawings during this review do not relieve the contractor from compliance with requirements of the drawings and specifications. This check is only for review of general conformance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. The contractor is responsible for confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions; selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction; coordinating his work with that of all other trades; and performing his work in a safe and satisfactory manner. By: Andrew Feuerstein, LEVENBETTS Date: 02/02/14 Architect Comments The PIKE Company SUBMITTAL COVER BY THIS SUBMITTAL HAS BEEN REVIEWED ARCHITECT'S STAMP WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE PIKE COMPANY AS COMPLYING BY: _____________________ DATE: RECEIVED STAMPS 1/29/2014 PIKE JOB NO:13897 PROJECT NO: 1/29/2014DATE:Pike Submittal No: 073113-001 General Contracting The Pike Company, Inc. Construction Management One Circle Street, Rochester, NY 14607 Phone: (585) 271-5256 / 800 264 PIKE / Fax: (585) 271-3101Specialty Contracting Facility Service E-mail: pike@pikeco.com / Online: www.pikeco.com Program Management DESCRIPTION OF SUBMITTAL: REFERENCES:Spec. Section:Review Cycle No.:073113 Remarks: WR Grace Ice and Water Shield Asphalt ShinglesSUBMITTAL NAME: Drawings:Supplier: Albany - Phone: (518) 371-5900 Pike Branch Offices: Hartford, CT - Phone: (860) 251-8000 TYPE OF SUBMITTAL:Product Data 001 Weathermaster Roofing Co., Inc. PROJECT NAME:Sibley Hall OWNER: ARCHITECT:The Pike Company, Inc. Norm Rockefeller ®Expedition form sb_20b LEVENBETTS 508 W 26 ST 317 NEW YORK NEW YORK 10001 T 212 242 1414 WEB WWW.LEVENBETTS.COM SUBMITTAL COVER Project Name: Cornell University, East Sibley Hall, Third Floor Owner: Cornell University To: The Pike Company Attn: Norm Rockefeller Address : One Circle Street Rochester, NY 14607 Contractors Submittal # 072100-001 Date of Submittal: 01/30/2014 Date of Response: 02/04/2014 Type of Submittal Product Data Color Selection O&M Manual Shop Drawings Sample Record Document Substitution Yes No Product Identification Contract Dwg. No.: Product Name: Part/Paragraph: Manufacturer: Comments (Architect Use Only) Reviewed Revise and Resubmit Rejected Furnish as Noted Corrections or comments made on submittals and/or shop drawings during this review do not relieve the contractor from compliance with requirements of the drawings and specifications. This check is only for review of general conformance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. The contractor is responsible for confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions; selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction; coordinating his work with that of all other trades; and performing his work in a safe and satisfactory manner. By: Andrew Feuerstein, LEVENBETTS Date: 02/04/14 Architect Comments The PIKE Company SUBMITTAL COVER BY THIS SUBMITTAL HAS BEEN REVIEWED ARCHITECT'S STAMP WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE PIKE COMPANY AS COMPLYING BY: _____________________ DATE: RECEIVED STAMPS 1/30/2014 PIKE JOB NO:13897 PROJECT NO: 1/30/2014DATE:Pike Submittal No: 072100-001 General Contracting The Pike Company, Inc. Construction Management One Circle Street, Rochester, NY 14607 Phone: (585) 271-5256 / 800 264 PIKE / Fax: (585) 271-3101Specialty Contracting Facility Service E-mail: pike@pikeco.com / Online: www.pikeco.com Program Management DESCRIPTION OF SUBMITTAL: REFERENCES:Spec. Section:Review Cycle No.:072100 Remarks: JM Corbond MCS Thermal InsulationSUBMITTAL NAME: Drawings:Supplier: Albany - Phone: (518) 371-5900 Pike Branch Offices: Hartford, CT - Phone: (860) 251-8000 TYPE OF SUBMITTAL:Product Data 001 Upstate Spray & Foam PROJECT NAME:Sibley Hall OWNER: ARCHITECT:The Pike Company, Inc. Norm Rockefeller ®Expedition form sb_20b Performance advantages • Unique Climate Isolation System – creates a thermal, air and moisture barrier. • Retrofit applications – examples of retrofit applications include basements, new additions, attics and commercial buildings. • Flexible hybrid system – JM Spider® Custom Insulation System can be applied over JM Corbond MCS in exposed attic spaces for increased R-value. • Air impermeable – when tested in accordance with ASTM E283, JM Corbond MCS is air impermeable when installed at a thickness of 1½ inches or more. • Energy efficient – reaches R-19 when installed at a thickness of three inches, and up to R-38 when installed at six inches. • Superior moisture performance – resists mold growth and meets all current vapor retarder codes. When tested in accordance with ASTM E96, JM Corbond MCS has a vapor permeance of less than one perm at 1-½ inches thick. • Covers completely – integrally attaches to cavity spaces, will not shrink or settle. • Application temperature range – can be applied to substrates at temperatures between 45°F and 90°F. • High-quality raw materials – create a consistent, easy-to-spray product without an offensive odor and no ozone-depleting chemicals. • Meets incombustible exterior commercial wall requirements in accordance with NFPA 285. InsULate WItH tHe cLImate IsoLatIon sYstem® Johns Manville Corbond Multi-Climate Solution (MCS) is the ultimate insulation solution. It acts as a barrier to keep the indoors from the outside climate, creating thermal, air and moisture isolation. Because it will not shrink or settle, its incredible thermal and acoustical performance lasts the life of a structure. JM Corbond MCS and its unique Lavender® color have become a symbol of uncompromising quality and standards and a mark of environmental commitment. ProdUct descrIPtIon JM Corbond MCS is a premium spray polyurethane foam building insulation. The product is generated on site by combining an isocyanate and a polymeric resin through a dual-component proportioner. Fast, easy and adaptable, it can achieve an R-value of 19 in 2x4 construction. JM Corbond MCS is well suited for residential, commercial and industrial applications. As one of the most advanced insulation solutions, it offers climate isolation between indoor and outside environments. aPPLIcatIons This system is a sprayable, rigid, closed-cell polyurethane cellular plastic foam insulation designed to insulate buildings. The sprayed product, properly installed, results in a seamless, monolithic and durable insulation fully adhered to the substrate, which is Lavender in color. • Walls – JM Corbond MCS may be applied to the exterior or interior of walls in residential or commercial buildings to the desired thickness and R-value. Suitable substrates include but are not limited to plywood, oriented strand board (OSB), any foam sheathing with or without foil facers, rock, brick, concrete masonry units (CMU), and painted or primed steel. JM Corbond MCS may be applied to these substrates with or without studs. • JM Corbond MCS may be used as nonstructural thermal insulating material in Types I, II, III, IV, and V construction. • Cathedral roofs – JM Corbond MCS may be applied directly to the underside of roof sheathing between the rafters to the desired thickness. Traditional venting is not necessary and should be avoided (section 806.4 of the 2006 IRC). • Hybrid solutions – Combine JM Corbond MCS with certified JM Formaldehyde-free™ building insulation to create a custom insulation solution. The JM Corbond MCS spray systems are technologically advanced, sophisticated materials and should be applied only by trained, qualified, experienced polyurethane spray applicators. InstaLLatIon This spray system may be applied in passes of uniform thickness from a minimum of a half inch to a maximum of two inches. For maximum yield and productivity, the product may be applied in a single pass to the specified thickness or up to a maximum of two inches per pass. (Exceptions may exist when sheet metal or gypsum wallboard substrates are encountered. Refer to Application Guide.) recommended storage and transPort shelf Life and storage of raw materials All materials should be stored in their original containers and away from heat and moisture, especially after the seals have been broken and the containers have been opened. Shelf life is six months when stored indoors at a temperature between 60°F and 70°F. Storage below 60°F may result in compound stratification of the B and/or crystalline formation in the A component. Temperatures above 75°F may decrease the shelf life. Containers should be opened carefully to allow any pressure buildup to be vented safely. Extensive venting of the B component may result in loss of blowing agent, higher-density foam and reduced yield. Temperatures below 65°F will increase the viscosity of the components making them difficult to pump. Both components are adversely affected by water and humidity. • Freight class 55 (A or B) • Resin compounds item 46030 • NO1BN non-hazardous sPecIfIcatIon comPLIance See following page for a complete list of test results. JM Corbond MCS™ closed-cell spray Polyurethane foam Icc-esr 3159 JM Corbond MCS™ closed-cell spray Polyurethane foam Visit our website at specJM.com Or call: (800) 654-3103 tYPIcaL PHYsIcaL ProPertIes astm method Jm corbond mcs Nominal Density D-1622 2.0 lb/cu ft Compressive Strength (1")D-1621 18 psi Compressive Strength (3")D-1621 20 psi Closed-cell Content D-1940 >90% K-factor C-518 (initial)0.15 C-1029-07 (180-day aged)*0.16 R-value C-518 (initial)6.6 C-1029-07 (180-day aged)*6.3 at 1 inch, 25.3 at 4 inches Water Absorption D-2842 0.020 (gm/cc) Water Vapor Transmission E-96 0.7 perms @ 1.5" Air Infiltration E-283-04 75 Pa 0.006 L/S/m2 (1.57 psf) (<0.006 cfm/ft2) 300 Pa 0.006 L/S/m2 (6.24 psf) (<0.006 cfm/ft2) Air Permeance E-2178-03 75 Pa 0.000055 L/S.m2.Pa 0.000117 ft3/min.m2.Pa 300 Pa 0.000024 L/S.m2.Pa 0.000051 ft3/min.m2.Pa Recycled Content of Side B 13% (pre- and post-consumer) *Aged 180 days per Federal Trade Commission 16CFR Part 460. FIRE TEST RESULTS: NFPA 286 – Compliant with Chapter 2603.9 of the IBC and AC377, appendix X for use in attics and crawl spaces – PASS NFPA 285 – Compliant with IBC Chapter 2603.5, exterior walls of Type I, II, III and IV buildings – PASS NFPA 286 – Compliant with IBC Chapter 803.1.2, Interior Finish without a 15-minute thermal barrier when covered with 22 wet mils of International Fireproof Technology, Inc. DC coating – PASS NOTES: 1. This information is intended only as a guide for design purposes. The values shown are the average values obtained from sprayed laboratory samples. The test methods were performed per the ASTM Standards. 2. Thermal performance (K-factor and R-value) varies depending on age and use conditions. The information herein is to assist customers in determining whether our products are suitable for their applications. We request that customers inspect and test our products before use and satisfy themselves as to content and suitability. Our products are intended for sale to industrial and commercial customers for processing. We warrant that our products will meet our written specifications. Nothing herein shall constitute any other warranty express or implied, including any warranty of merchantability or fitness, nor is protection from any law or patent to be inferred. The exclusive remedy for all proven claims is replacement of raw materials and in no event shall we be liable for special, incidental or consequential damages. Properties and Processing characteristics Liquid component Properties viscosity Component A (cps) 190 Component B (cps) 1100 cps @ 72°F Specific Gravity @ 70°F 1.2 Mixing Ratio Component A and B 1:1 flammability characteristics surface Burning characteristics: ASTM E84 flame spread: <25 smoke: <450 note: This numerical flame spread and all other data presented are not intended to reflect the hazards presented by this or any other material in actual fire situations. The use of polyurethane foam in interior applications on walls or ceilings presents a fire risk unless protected by an approved thermal barrier. One building code definition of an approved thermal barrier is a material equal to half-inch gypsum wallboard. Consultation with building code officials before application is recommended. caution: Polyurethane foam produced from these materials is a fire hazard if exposed to fire or excessive heat (e.g., cutting torches, soldering torches, etc.). Each firm, person or corporation engaged in the use, manufacture, production or application of the polyurethane foams produced from these resins should carefully examine construction sequencing and end-use to determine any potential fire hazard associated with such product and to utilize appropriate precautionary and safety measures during construction. equipment Proportioning equipment shall be manufactured by Graco/Gusmer or Glasscraft and shall be capable of metering each component within ±2% of the metering ratio previously noted. The gun should be of the internal mix type, which provides thorough blending of the two components. The equipment shall be of the heated airless type capable of maintaining 125°F at the gun by use of both primary heaters and heated hoses. Hose thermal sensor in B side. The use of 2:1 feeder pumps is recommended for supplying the liquid components to proportioner, especially during winter operations. Processing characteristics and recommendations Preheater Hose Component A 90–120°F 110–125°F Component B 110–125°F Gun Pressure at Tip (static) min 1100 psi These temperatures are typical of those required to produce mixed product using conventional Graco/Gusmer equipment under various conditions. Environmental conditions may dictate the use of other temperature ranges. However, under no circumstances should a temperature of 130°F be exceeded. It is the responsibility of the applicator to determine the specific temperature settings to match the environmental conditions, his own equipment and these materials. machine mix at recommended temperatures Rise/Tack-Free Time 4–5.5 sec. Cure Time 4 hours characteristics Reaction times are affected by ambient temperature and the temperature of the substrate. Sprayed through Gusmer Model H-II proportioner, Gap Pro Gun with 01 chamber at recommended processing temperatures and pressures. recommended substrate temperatures at time of application Minimum 45°F Maximum 90°F spraying This spray system may be applied in passes of uniform thickness from a minimum of a half inch to a maximum of two inches. For maximum yield and productivity, the product may be applied in a single pass to the specified thickness or up to a two- inch maximum pass. (Exceptions may exist when sheet metal or gypsum wallboard substrates are encountered. Consult Application Guide on page 4.) “Flash” passes or a thin pass of less than one inch on cold surfaces is to be avoided and may result in loss of adhesion of subsequent passes and yield. Thicknesses over two inches require multiple passes. Allow product curing and cooling between each pass; over pass cure time minimum 10 minutes per inch, two-inch pass requires minimum 20 minutes. (Hot substrates may require more time, see Application Guide on page 4. JM Corbond MCS must not be applied in a thickness exceeding two inches in a single pass. If this thickness is exceeded, it will seriously affect the quality and physical properties of the finished product and the internal temperature building up within the foam may cause charring inside the foam bun and bread loafing. (Under certain conditions, applications exceeding this thickness may cause spontaneous combustion of the foam to occur, even hours after product was applied.) cleanup Liquids Nonflammable solvents should be used for cleanup. Consult your solvent manufacturer MSDS for handling precautions. Protective equipment Spraying of polyurethane foam results in the atomizing of the components to a fine mist. Inhalation and exposure to the atomized particles must be avoided. The following protective equipment is recommended: a. Full-face mask or hood with fresh air source b. Fabric coveralls c. Fabric or rubber gloves empty drum storage Store empty drums on their sides with bungs in to avoid moisture entering. “Empty” is defined as product residue at the bottom of the drum no deeper than a half inch and eight inches or less across. Recyclers require drums to be “drip-dried” before accepting them. description This system is sprayable, rigid, closed-cell polyurethane cellular plastic foam insulation designed to insulate buildings. The sprayed product, properly installed, results in a seamless, monolithic and durable insulation fully adhered to the substrate. JM Corbond MCS spray systems are technologically advanced, sophisticated materials and should be applied only by trained, qualified, experienced polyurethane spray applicators. Walls JM Corbond MCS may be applied to the exterior or interior of walls in residential or commercial buildings to the desired thickness and R-value. Suitable substrates include but are not limited to plywood, OSB, any foam sheathing with or without foil facers, rock, brick, CMU, concrete, and painted or primed steel. JM Corbond MCS may be applied to these substrates with or without studs. cathedral roofs JM Corbond MCS may be applied directly to the underside of roof sheathing between the rafters to the desired thickness. Traditional venting is not necessary and should be avoided (section 806.4 of the 2006 IRC). vapor retarders Typically, no additional vapor retarder need be installed over a cavity wherein JM Corbond MCS has been installed at two inches or greater. Because of JM Corbond MCS’s low water-vapor permeance and excellent sealing characteristics, it functions as its own vapor retarder. (See Physical Properties.) The elimination of a second vapor sheet will avoid the creation of what is commonly known as a water vapor “trap.” The use of JM Corbond MCS in conjunction with other insulation products or in special environments such as freezers, swimming pools or other special environments may require specific technical attention to vapor retarders. Please consult JM technical personnel. clearances to Heat sources A minimum of three inches of clearance is required between JM Corbond MCS and combustion appliance flues, fireplace flues, recessed can lights, including IC-rated fixtures, heat lamps and other heat-producing sources. combustion air to combustion appliances Modern construction techniques of house tightening require that outside air inlets be provided to deliver combustion air to natural gas, propane or oil-fired appliances such as furnaces, boilers, water heaters, space heaters, etc., including gas or wood-burning fireplaces. Backdraft dampers or positive pressure venting may be needed on combustion appliance vents to prevent negative air pressures developed by bath or kitchen vent fans from backdrafting combustion effluent into the building interior. Warning: Polyurethane foams Will Burn When exposed to fire The use of polyurethane foam in interior applications on walls or ceilings presents a fire risk unless protected by an approved fire-resistant thermal barrier with a finish rating of not less than 15 minutes. Polyurethane foam produced from these materials may present a fire hazard if exposed to fire or excessive heat (e.g., cutting torch or soldering torch, construction heater). Each firm, person or corporation engaged in the use, manufacture, production, processing or application of the polyurethane foam produced from these resins should carefully examine the end-use and construction sequencing to determine any potential fire hazard associated with such product and utilize appropriate design and safety measures. substrate Preparation For optimum results, surfaces receiving JM Corbond MCS should be clean and dry, free of dirt, oil, solvent, grease, loose particulate, peeling coating or other foreign matter. Untreated wood, plywood and OSB typically do not need primer. JM Corbond MCS also adheres well without primer to expanded polystyrene, extruded polystyrene, foil-faced insulation boards, CMU and cured concrete. Ferrometallic substrates (especially mild steel) should be sand-blasted in accordance with SSPC-SP6. Sand-blasted surfaces should be immediately primed with an epoxymide primer as recommended by the primer manufacturer. Galvanized and stainless steel, and aluminum substrates should be treated with an appropriate wash primer or adhesive prior to application of JM Corbond MCS. Consult your primer manufacturer and JM for a specific recommendation. Acid wash or other pre-wash may also be needed. drywall substrates Drywall substrates to which JM Corbond MCS is to be applied in thicknesses over 1½ inches require a first pass thickness at and not to exceed 1½ inches with an appropriate cure time before full thickness pass is applied. Lift thicknesses exceeding 1½ inches to drywall may deform the drywall. Similar precautions may apply to pre-engineered metal buildings. Drywall requires no priming. substrate temperature and moisture This spray system is provided in different reactivity profiles to meet varying substrate temperatures as noted in Processing. Substrates over 90°F, such as decks of cathedral roofs with sunshine above, require longer than minimum cooling time between passes. Flash passes at cold substrate are to be avoided. JM technical personnel should be consulted in all cases where application conditions are marginal. Moisture in the form of rain, dew, frost or other sources can seriously affect the adhesion of urethane foam to the substrate or to itself. Water reacts with the mixed foam components, seriously affecting the foam’s physical properties. Indoor application Precautions All personnel in the spray area must be equipped with a fresh-air-supplied face mask or hood. Additional precautions include: a. Post warning signs at all work area entrances. (Available from JM at no charge.) b. No welding, smoking or open flame. c. Seal off the work area from adjacent rooms and ventilation ducts. d. Mask areas required to prevent overspray such as windows, doors, tubs and showers, etc. e. Restrict access of nonapplication personnel. f. Provide ventilation as needed. g. Provide breathing and eye protection to both workers and spectators. outdoor application Precautions The area surrounding the spray operation should be protected from overspray and exposure of individuals not involved in the spray operations as follows: a. Post warning signs a minimum of 100 feet from all work areas. b. No welding, smoking or open flame. c. Close all air-intake vents on air-handling equipment on the building. d. Provide breathing and eye protection for spectators. e. Move vehicles out of area. f. Do not apply when the wind velocity is greater than 10 mph to avoid overspraying of perimeter areas. climatic conditions Cold temperatures and high wind speeds retard the exothermic reaction of foam and can lead to poor adhesion, increased density and loss of yield, as well as thermal shock. Avoid moisture in the form of rain, dew, frost or other sources, which can seriously affect the adhesion of JM Corbond MCS to the substrate or to itself. Water reacts with the mixed foam components, seriously affecting the foam’s physical properties. aPPLIcatIon gUIde Process safetY, HeaLtH and toxIcItY InformatIon Technical specifications as shown in this literature are intended to be used as general guidelines only. The physical and chemical properties of JM Corbond MCS listed herein represent typical, average values obtained in accordance with accepted test methods and are subject to normal manufacturing variations. They are supplied as a technical service and are subject to change without notice. Any references to numerical flame spread or smoke developed ratings are not intended to reflect hazards presented by these or any other materials under actual fire conditions. Check with the sales office nearest you for current information. All Johns Manville products are sold subject to Johns Manville’s Limited Warranty and Limitation of Remedy. For a copy of the Johns Manville Limited Warranty and Limitation of Remedy or for information on other Johns Manville thermal and acoustical insulation and systems, call or write to the 800 number or address listed. Material Safety Data Sheets on product components and the finished product are available from JM. Installers of this product should read and understand the MSDS before use. Protective equipment Spraying of polyurethane foam results in the atomizing of the components to a fine mist. Inhalation and exposure to the atomized droplets must be avoided. The following protective equipment is recommended: a. Full-face mask or hood with fresh air source b. Fabric coveralls c. Fabric gloves d. Rubber gloves when handling new materials and cleaning solvents. WARNING: Exposure may occur even when no noticeable odor is encountered. Physical examinations of Personnel All personnel to be employed in the spraying of these materials should have a complete physical examination prior to starting spray operations. Periodic checkups are recommended if the personnel continue to spray these materials. Personnel with the following conditions should avoid the spraying of these components: a. Asthma or chronic bronchitis b. Chronic respiratory disorders c. Sensitization to chemical substances including polymeric isocyanates dermal exposure If a major splash or spill of the raw material isocyanate (A) component comes in contact with the skin, the affected area should immediately be washed with generous amounts of water from a safety shower or other water source. Contaminated clothing should be removed and the skin wiped with a clean dry cloth to remove residual isocyanate. The affected area should then be wiped with a 70% solution of rubbing alcohol (isopropyl) followed by repeated washing with soap and water. If a rash develops, a physician should be consulted immediately. eye exposure Splashes of either component into the eyes should be flushed immediately with generous amounts of water for at least 15 minutes. consULt traIned medIcaL PersonneL ImmedIateLY. Inhalation Symptoms of vapor inhalation are characterized by coughing, tightness in the chest and shortness of breath. Excessive exposure can produce serious, possibly irreversible lung damage. Smoking in the area of application increases the risk of pulmonary injury and must be prohibited. High concentrations of isocyanate may cause symptoms and problems to appear immediately. However, chronic exposure may also lead to the same symptoms and problems. If BreatHIng Has stoPPed, artIfIcIaL resPIratIon mUst Be PromPtLY aPPLIed. If breathing is short, oxygen (if available) should be administered by trained medical personnel. oBtaIn medIcaL attentIon ImmedIateLY. applicators See the A&B component MSDS for more complete raw material handling information. cleanup Nonflammable solvents should be used for cleanup. Consult your solvent manufacturer for handling precautions. Incompatible materials The isocyanate component (A) is incompatible with strong bases, tertiary amines or water. These materials may cause rapid, spontaneous polymerization with subsequent generation of heat and gas. decontamination of spills In the event of a major isocyanate (A) spill, the area should be immediately evacuated. Only personnel equipped with appropriate respiratory and eye protection equipment should remain. If the spill occurs indoors, the area should be ventilated and leaking containers should be taken outdoors and the remaining isocyanate transferred to other containers. The spill should be covered with sawdust, ekoperl, vermiculite, fuller’s earth or other oil-absorbing material and should then be treated with a dilute solution of ammonium hydroxide/detergent. The neutralized material should be swept up and placed in a suitable container. The material should then be disposed of by a standard method consistent with good industrial practice and in accordance with environmental protection regulations in your area. Where permissible, sanitary landfill disposal is recommended. a a aaDistributed by:JMSPF110070Johns manville Insulation systems 717 17th Street Denver, CO 80202 (800) 654-3103 specJM.com BID-0112 10/11 (Replaces 08/11) © 2011 Johns Manville. Printed in USA. Material Name: JM Corbond (A) ISO Safety Data Sheet ID: 1078 ____________________________________________________________ Page 1 of 5 Issue Date: 11/13/2009 Revision: 1.0000 Section 1 - Product and Company Identification Hazard Label WARNING Company Information Johns Manville Telephone: 303-978-2000 8:00AM-5:00PM M-F Insulation Systems Internet Address: http://www.jm.com P.O. Box 5108 Emergency: 800-424-9300 (Chemtrec, In English) Denver, CO 80127 USA Trade Names: JM Spray Foam A ISO; JM Corbond III A ISO Use: Part A of a two-component indoor spray foam insulation used to insulate homes, buildings, equipment, etc Section 2 - Hazards Identification Emergency Overview Breathing vapors from this product may cause irritation of the upper respiratory tract, fatigue, weakness, drowsiness, and headache. Allergic or asthma-type reactions may occur following sensitization to isocyanates. HMIS Ratings: Health = 2* Fire = 1 Reactivity = 1 *= Chronic Health Hazard Inhalation Inhalation at levels above the occupational exposure limit could cause respiratory sensitization and risk of serious damage to the respiratory system. The onset of respiratory symptoms may be delayed for several hours after exposure. Skin This product is irritating to the skin and may cause sensitization. Ingestion This product is not intended to be ingested or eaten under normal conditions of use. If ingested, seek medical attention. Eyes This product is irritating to the eyes and may cause sensitization. Primary Routes of Entry (Exposure) Inhalation, skin, and eye contact. Target Organs Skin, eye, lungs, central nervous system (CNS), respiratory system, kidney, liver. Medical Conditions Aggravated by Exposure Pre-existing respiratory diseases or conditions, especially asthma or chemically-induced asthma. Prior exposure and sensitization to isocyanate, or other chemical sensitizers may cause asthmatic, or allergic reactions. Section 3 - Composition/Information on Ingredients CAS # Component Percent 101-68-8 Methylene bis(phenylisocyanate) (MBI or MDI) 30-60 9016-87-9 Polymethylene polyphenylene isocyanate 30-60 Component Information JM Corbond III A ISO product contains a red dye <0.001% General Product Description Brown liquid or brownish-red liquid with slightly musty odor Section 4 - First Aid Measures First Aid: Inhalation If the affected person is having difficulty breathing, administer oxygen or apply artificial respiration and immediately contact a medical professional. First Aid: Skin Remove contaminated clothing. Wash exposed areas with soap and water. If irritation develops or persists, seek medical attention. Launder contaminated clothing before reuse. First Aid: Ingestion Product is not intended to be ingested or eaten. If this product is ingested, do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention immediately. Material Name: JM Corbond (A) ISO Safety Data Sheet ID: 1078 ____________________________________________________________ Page 2 of 5 Issue Date: 11/13/2009 Revision: 1.0000 First Aid: Eyes Flush eyes with large amounts of water until irritation subsides. If irritation persists, seek medical attention. First Aid: Notes to Physician Treatment for inhalation, skin contact, or ingestion should be symptomatic. Inhalation of high concentrations of this material, as could occur in enclosed spaces or during deliberate abuse, may be associated with cardiac arrhythmias. Section 5 - Fire Fighting Measures Flash Point: 446°F/230°C Method Used: Open Cup Upper Flammable Limit (UFL): Lower Flammable Limit (LFL): Auto Ignition: >600°C Flammability Classification: Rate of Burning: General Fire Hazards MDI vapor and other gases may be generated by thermal decomposition. At temperatures greater than 160°C/320°F, MDI can polymerize and decompose, causing pressure build-up in closed containers. Temperatures over 49°C/120°F accelerate the reaction of MDI with water, which releases carbon dioxide and makes explosive rupture of closed containers possible. Hazardous Combustion Products Carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide, halogenated hydrocarbons, nitrogen oxides, and various hydrocarbons. Extinguishing Media Carbon dioxide (CO2), dry chemical. Fire Fighting Equipment/Instructions Use NIOSH-approved self-contained breathing apparatus operating in the pressure demand mode and full fire fighting protective clothing. Avoid inhalation of vapors. Section 6 - Accidental Release Measures Containment Procedures Remove all sources of ignition. Evacuate and ventilate spill area. Dam spill area with sand, earth, or other suitable absorbent. Prevent entry of material into sewers, other water sources, or land areas. Wear full protective clothing and respiratory protection during clean-up as required to maintain exposures below the applicable exposure limit. Shovel absorbed material into containers in well-ventilated area. MDI in contaminated areas can be neutralized with an ammonia/water solution (80% water, plus 20% non-ionic surfactant, or 90% water, 3-8% ammonia, plus 2% detergent. Use 10 parts neutralizer per one part isocyanate.) Allow containers of neutralized solution to stand, uncovered, for 48 hours to allow carbon dioxide (CO2) to escape. Small spills should be allowed to stand at least 15 minutes. Clean-Up Procedures Place in closable container for disposal. Section 7 - Handling and Storage Handling Procedures Use protective equipment as described in Section 8 of this safety data sheet when handling uncontained material. Handle in accordance with good industrial hygiene and safety practices. Storage Procedures Warehouse storage should be in accordance with package directions, if any. Product should be kept in a cool and dry area in original packaging. Do not freeze. Section 8 - Exposure Controls / Personal Protection Exposure Guidelines A: General Product Information Protective equipment should be provided as necessary to prevent inhalation of vapors, prolonged skin contact, and to keep exposure levels below the applicable exposure limits. B: Component Exposure Limits Methylene bis(phenylisocyanate) (MBI or MDI) (101-68-8) OSHA: 0.02 ppm Ceiling; 0.2 mg/m3 Ceiling ACGIH: 0.005 ppm TWA Material Name: JM Corbond (A) ISO Safety Data Sheet ID: 1078 ____________________________________________________________ Page 3 of 5 Issue Date: 11/13/2009 Revision: 1.0000 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT Personal Protective Equipment: Eyes/Face Safety glasses with side shields or chemical goggles are recommended. Personal Protective Equipment: Skin Impervious gloves such as nitrile rubber should be used to help prevent excessive skin contact. Personal Protective Equipment: Respiratory A NIOSH approved respirator must be used if vapor concentrations exceed exposure limits. Ventilation Local exhaust or general dilution ventilation may be required to maintain exposures below the applicable exposure limits. The need for ventilation systems should be evaluated by a professional industrial hygienist, while the design of specific ventilation systems should be conducted by a professional engineer. Personal Protective Equipment: General Protective equipment should be provided as necessary to prevent irritation of the throat, eyes, and skin, and to keep exposures below the applicable exposure limits identified in Section 8. Section 9 - Physical & Chemical Properties Appearance: brown or brownish-red color Odor: slightly musty Physical State: liquid pH: Not Applicable Vapor Pressure: Not Available Vapor Density: 8.5 Boiling Point: >300°C decomposes Melting Point: Not Available Solubility (H2O): Reacts with water Section 10 - Stability & Reactivity Information Stability MDI vapor and other gases may be generated by thermal decomposition. At temperatures greater than 160°C/320°F, MDI can polymerize and decompose, causing pressure build-up in closed containers. Temperatures over 49°C/120°F accelerate the reaction of MDI with water, which releases carbon dioxide. Explosive rupture of closed containers is possible. Stability: Conditions to Avoid Keep away from ignition sources. Do not freeze. Do not thin. Incompatibility Strong acids, alkalis, and oxidizing agents Hazardous Polymerization May occur at elevated temperatures in the presence of alkalis, tertiary amines, and metal compounds. Section 11 - Toxicological Information Acute Toxicity A: General Product Information MDI is an allergic sensitizing agent that may produce wheezing, coughing, shortness of breath, runny nose, sore throat, coughing, and reduced lung function. Effects may be delayed. Eye contact may cause irritation with tearing (watery eyes), reddening, and swelling. Ingestion may produce irritation, and corrosive effects on the digestive system. B: Component Analysis - LD50/LC50 Methylene bis(phenylisocyanate) (MBI or MDI) (101-68-8) Oral LD50 Rat: 9200 mg/kg Polymethylene polyphenylene isocyanate (9016-87-9) Inhalation LC50 Rat: 490 mg/m3/4H; Oral LD50 Rat:49 g/kg; Dermal LD50 Rabbit:>9400 mg/kg Component Carcinogenicity Methylene bis(phenylisocyanate) (MBI or MDI) (101-68-8) IARC: Group 3 - Not Classifiable (IARC Monograph 71 [1999], Supplement 7 [1987], Monograph 19 [1979]) Polymethylene polyphenylene isocyanate (9016-87-9) IARC: Group 3 - Not Classifiable (IARC Supplement 7 [1987], Monograph 19 [1979]) Material Name: JM Corbond (A) ISO Safety Data Sheet ID: 1078 ____________________________________________________________ Page 4 of 5 Issue Date: 11/13/2009 Revision: 1.0000 Chronic Toxicity If the material is heated isocyanates, mainly diisopropylphenyl isocyanate may be released. Repeated or prolonged exposure to isocyanates in general may result in isocyanate sensitization (chemical asthma) in some individuals, causing them to react to isocyanate exposure at concentrations below the established exposure limits. Symptoms include chest tightness, wheezing, coughing, and shortness of breath. Effects can be delayed. Overexposure can cause lung damage, including decreased lung function. Prolonged or repeated skin contact may cause irritation leading to dermatitis. Skin sensitization may also occur. Teratogenicity MDI: In laboratory animals, MDI/polymeric and MDI did not produce birth defects; other fetal effects occurred only at high doses which were toxic to the mother. Section 12 - Ecological Information Ecotoxicity A: General Product Information No data available for this product. B: Component Analysis - Ecotoxicity - Aquatic Toxicity No ecotoxicity data are available for this product's components. Section 13 - Disposal Considerations US EPA Waste Number & Descriptions A: General Product Information This product is not expected to be a hazardous waste when it is disposed of according to the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) under Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA) regulations. Product characterization after use is recommended to ensure proper disposal under federal and/or state requirements. B: Component Waste Numbers No EPA Waste Numbers are applicable for this product's components. Disposal Instructions Dispose of waste material according to Local, State, Federal, and Provincial Environmental Regulations. Section 14 - Transport Information International Transport Regulations These products are not classified as dangerous goods according to international transport regulations. Section 15 - Regulatory Information US Federal Regulations A: General Product Information SARA 311 Status. The following SARA 311 designations apply to this product: Immediate (acute) health hazard. Delayed (chronic) health hazard. B: Component Analysis This material contains one or more of the following chemicals required to be identified under SARA Section 302 (40 CFR 355 Appendix A), SARA Section 313 (40 CFR 372.65) and/or CERCLA (40 CFR 302.4). Methylene bis(phenylisocyanate) (MBI or MDI) (101-68-8) SARA 313: 1.0 % de minimis concentration (listed under Chemical Category N120, Diisocyanates) CERCLA: 5000 lb final RQ; 2270 kg final RQ Polymethylene polyphenylene isocyanate (9016-87-9) SARA 313: 1.0 % de minimis concentration (listed under Chemical Category N120, Diisocyanates) State Regulations A: General Product Information Other state regulations may apply. Check individual state requirements. B: Component Analysis - State The following components appear on one or more of the following state hazardous substances lists: Component CAS # CA FL MA MN NJ PA Methylene bis(phenylisocyanate) (MBI or MDI) 101-68-8 Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Polymethylene polyphenylene isocyanate 9016-87-9 No No No No Yes No A: TSCA Status This product and its components are listed on the TSCA 8(b) inventory. Material Name: JM Corbond (A) ISO Safety Data Sheet ID: 1078 ____________________________________________________________ Page 5 of 5 Issue Date: 11/13/2009 Revision: 1.0000 Component CAS # TSCA DSL EINECS Methylene bis(phenylisocyanate) (MBI or MDI) 101-68-8 Yes Yes Yes Polymethylene polyphenylene isocyanate 9016-87-9 Yes Yes No International Regulations A: General Product Information The following components listed in this product are listed on the TSCA Export Notification 12(b) list. Chlorobenzene CAS# 108-90-7 B: Component Analysis - WHMIS IDL The following components are identified under the Canadian Hazardous Products Act Ingredient Disclosure List: Component CAS # Minimum Concentration Methylene bis(phenylisocyanate) (MBI or MDI) 101-68-8 0.1 % WHMIS Classification Controlled Product Classification: D1A, D2A, D2B This product has been classified in accordance with the hazard criteria of the Controlled Products Regulations. This SDS contains all the information required by the Controlled Products Regulations. Section 16 - Other Information Other Information Prepared for: Johns Manville Insulation Systems P. O. Box 5108 Denver, CO USA 80217-5108 Prepared by: Johns Manville Technical Center P.O. Box 625005 Littleton, CO USA 80162-5005 The information herein is presented in good faith and believed to be accurate as of the effective date given. However, no warranty, expressed or implied, is given. It is the buyer's responsibility to ensure that its activities comply with Federal, State or provincial, and local laws. Date MSDS # Reason 11/13/09 1078-1.0000 New JM MSDS End of Sheet 1078 Material Name: JM Corbond (B) Resin Safety Data Sheet ID: 1079 ____________________________________________________________ Page 1 of 6 Issue Date: 03/01/2011 Revision: 1.0000 Section 1 - Product and Company Identification Hazard Label CAUTION Company Information Johns Manville Telephone: 303-978-2000 8:00AM-5:00PM M-F Insulation Systems Internet Address: http://www.jm.com P.O. Box 5108 Emergency: 800-424-9300 (Chemtrec, In English) Denver, CO 80127 USA Trade Names: JM cc SPF JM Corbond III; JM Corbond III-2.8; JM Corbond MCS; Use: Part B of a two-part closed cell polyurethane spray foam Section 2 - Hazards Identification Inhalation Inhalation at levels above the occupational exposure limit could cause respiratory sensitization and risk of serious damage to the respiratory system. The onset of respiratory symptoms may be delayed for several hours after exposure. Skin This product is irritating to the skin and may cause sensitization. Ingestion This product is not intended to be ingested or eaten under normal conditions of use. If ingested, seek medical attention. Eyes Irritation, redness, and burning in eyes may occur. Primary Routes of Entry (Exposure) Inhalation, skin, and eye contact. Target Organs Skin, eye, lungs, central nervous system (CNS), respiratory system, kidney, liver. Medical Conditions Aggravated by Exposure Pre-existing eye, skin, respiratory, central nervous system (CNS), liver and kidney diseases or conditions. May cause cardiac arrhythmia Section 3 - Composition/Information on Ingredients CAS # Component Percent Not Available Polyol Blend 13-60 460-73-1 1,1,1,3,3-Pentafluoropropane (HFC-245fa) 6-12 68441-62-3 2-Butyne-1,4-diol, polymer with (chloromethyl)oxirane, brominated, dehydrochlorinated, methoxylated (present in Corbond III products only) 3-7 78-40-0 Triethyl phosphate (Present in Corbond III products only) 3-7 13674-84-5 2-Propanol, 1-chloro-, phosphate (3:1) 3-7 Proprietary Proprietary Additive 0-4 68479-98-1 Diethyltoluenediamine (Present in Corbond III products only) 1-3 107-21-1 Ethylene glycol <1 9016-45-9 Ethylene oxide-Nonylphenol polymer (Present in Corbond III products only) 0-1 Not Available Amine Blend 0-1 Component Information All products contain a non-hazardous violet dye except JM cc SPF. General Product Description Blue colored liquid with amine odor Section 4 - First Aid Measures First Aid: Inhalation If the affected person is having difficulty breathing, administer oxygen or apply artificial respiration and immediately contact a medical professional. Material Name: JM Corbond (B) Resin Safety Data Sheet ID: 1079 ____________________________________________________________ Page 2 of 6 Issue Date: 03/01/2011 Revision: 1.0000 First Aid: Skin Remove contaminated clothing. Wash exposed areas with soap and water. If irritation develops or persists, seek medical attention. Launder contaminated clothing before reuse. First Aid: Ingestion Product is not intended to be ingested or eaten. If this product is ingested, do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention immediately. First Aid: Eyes Flush eyes with large amounts of water until irritation subsides. If irritation persists, seek medical attention. First Aid: Notes to Physician Treatment for inhalation, skin contact, or ingestion should be symptomatic. Inhalation of high concentrations of this material, as could occur in enclosed spaces or during deliberate abuse, may be associated with cardiac arrhythmias. Section 5 - Fire Fighting Measures Flash Point: Not Determined Method Used: Not available Upper Flammable Limit (UFL): Not available Lower Flammable Limit (LFL): Not available Auto Ignition: Not available Flammability Classification: Not available Rate of Burning: Not available Hazardous Combustion Products Carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide, halogenated hydrocarbons, nitrogen oxides, and various hydrocarbons. Extinguishing Media Carbon dioxide (CO2), water, water fog, dry chemical. Fire Fighting Equipment/Instructions Use NIOSH-approved self-contained breathing apparatus operating in the pressure demand mode and full fire fighting protective clothing. Avoid inhalation of vapors. Section 6 - Accidental Release Measures Containment Procedures Remove all sources of ignition. Evacuate and ventilate spill area. Dam spill area with sand, earth, or other suitable absorbent. Prevent entry of material into sewers, other water sources, or land areas. Wear full protective clothing and respiratory protection during clean-up as required to maintain exposures below the applicable exposure limit. Shovel absorbed material into containers in well-ventilated area. Clean-Up Procedures Place in closable container for disposal. Section 7 - Handling and Storage Handling Procedures Use protective equipment as described in Section 8 of this safety data sheet when handling uncontained material. Handle in accordance with good industrial hygiene and safety practices. Storage Procedures Warehouse storage should be in accordance with package directions, if any. Product should be kept in a cool and dry area in original packaging. Do not freeze. Section 8 - Exposure Controls / Personal Protection Exposure Guidelines A: General Product Information Protective equipment should be provided as necessary to prevent inhalation of vapors, prolonged skin contact, and to keep exposure levels below the applicable exposure limits. B: Component Exposure Limits Proprietary Additive (Proprietary) ACGIH: 200 ppm TWA Ethylene glycol (107-21-1) OSHA: 50 ppm Ceiling; 125 mg/m3 Ceiling ACGIH: 100 mg/m3 Ceiling (aerosol only) Material Name: JM Corbond (B) Resin Safety Data Sheet ID: 1079 ____________________________________________________________ Page 3 of 6 Issue Date: 03/01/2011 Revision: 1.0000 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT Personal Protective Equipment: Eyes/Face Safety glasses with side shields, chemical goggles, or a face shield is required. Personal Protective Equipment: Skin Impervious gloves such as nitrile rubber should be used to help prevent excessive skin contact. A protective suit should be worn. Personal Protective Equipment: Respiratory A NIOSH approved respirator must be used if vapor concentrations exceed exposure limits. Ventilation Local exhaust or general dilution ventilation may be required to maintain exposures below the applicable exposure limits. The need for ventilation systems should be evaluated by a professional industrial hygienist, while the design of specific ventilation systems should be conducted by a professional engineer. Personal Protective Equipment: General Protective equipment should be provided as necessary to prevent irritation of the throat, eyes, and skin, and to keep exposures below the applicable exposure limits identified in Section 8. Section 9 - Physical & Chemical Properties Appearance: Blue color Odor: amine Physical State: liquid pH: Not Determined Vapor Pressure: Not Determined Melting Point: Not Determined Boiling Point: Not Determined Percent Volatile: Not Determined Solubility (H2O): Moderate Freezing Point: Not Determined VOC: Not Determined Section 10 - Stability & Reactivity Information Stability These products are not reactive. Stability: Conditions to Avoid Keep away from ignition sources. Do not freeze. Do not thin. Incompatibility Strong acids, alkalis, and oxidizing agents Hazardous Decomposition May form carbon dioxide, carbon monoxide, halogenated hydrocarbons, nitrogen oxides, various hydrocarbons. Hazardous Polymerization Will not occur. Section 11 - Toxicological Information Acute Toxicity A: General Product Information Vapors from this product may cause eye, respiratory and skin irritation, B: Component Analysis - LD50/LC50 Triethyl phosphate (Present in Corbond III products only) (78-40-0) Oral LD50 Rat: 1165 mg/kg 2-Propanol, 1-chloro-, phosphate (3:1) (13674-84-5) Inhalation LC50 Rat: 5 mg/L/4H; Inhalation LC50 Rat:>17.8 mg/L/1H; Oral LD50 Rat:500 mg/kg; Dermal LD50 Rat:>5000 mg/kg; Dermal LD50 Rabbit:1230 mg/kg Proprietary Additive (Proprietary) Oral LD50 Rat: 1235 mg/kg; Dermal LD50 Rabbit:>5 g/kg Diethyltoluenediamine (Present in Corbond III products only) (68479-98-1) Oral LD50 Rat: 472 mg/kg Material Name: JM Corbond (B) Resin Safety Data Sheet ID: 1079 ____________________________________________________________ Page 4 of 6 Issue Date: 03/01/2011 Revision: 1.0000 Ethylene glycol (107-21-1) Oral LD50 Rat: 4000 mg/kg; Dermal LD50 Rabbit:9530 µL/kg Ethylene oxide-Nonylphenol polymer (Present in Corbond III products only) (9016-45-9) Oral LD50 Rat: 1310 mg/kg; Dermal LD50 Rabbit:2 mL/kg Component Carcinogenicity Ethylene glycol (107-21-1) ACGIH: A4 - Not Classifiable as a Human Carcinogen Chronic Toxicity Prolonged, excessive exposures to vapors may cause nervous system, kidney and liver damage. Section 12 - Ecological Information Ecotoxicity A: General Product Information No data available for this product. B: Component Analysis - Ecotoxicity - Aquatic Toxicity 2-Propanol, 1-chloro-, phosphate (3:1) (13674-84-5) 96 Hr LC50 Brachydanio rerio: 56.2 mg/L [static]; 96 Hr LC50 Leuciscus idus: 180 mg/L [static]; 96 Hr LC50 Pimephales promelas: 98 mg/L [static]; 96 Hr LC50 Poecilia reticulata: 30 mg/L [static] 72 Hr EC50 Scenedesmus subspicatus: 45 mg/L; 96 Hr EC50 Selenastrum capricornutum: 4 mg/L 48 Hr EC50 Daphnia magna: 63 mg/L Proprietary Additive (Proprietary) 96 Hr LC50 Lepomis macrochirus: 135 mg/L [static] Ethylene glycol (107-21-1) 96 Hr LC50 Oncorhynchus mykiss: 41000 mg/L; 96 Hr LC50 Oncorhynchus mykiss:14-18 ml/L [static]; 96 Hr LC50 Lepomis macrochirus:27540 mg/L [static]; 96 Hr LC50 Oncorhynchus mykiss:40761 mg/L [static]; 96 Hr LC50 Pimephales promelas:40000-60000 mg/L [static]; 96 Hr LC50 Poecilia reticulata:16000 mg/L [static] 96 Hr EC50 Selenastrum capricornutum: 6500 - 13000 mg/L 48 Hr EC50 water flea: 46300 mg/L Section 13 - Disposal Considerations US EPA Waste Number & Descriptions A: General Product Information Cure materials prior to disposal to minimize residual resin content. After curing, comply with applicable federal, state, and local regulations for disposal. Product characterization after use is recommended to ensure proper disposal under federal and/or state requirements. If uncured materials must be disposed, the product should be characterized and disposed in accordance with all applicable federal, state, and local regulations. Do not mix with uncured Part A in disposal containers. If you are unsure of the regulations, contact your local Public Health Department or the local office of the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). B: Component Waste Numbers Proprietary Additive (Proprietary) RCRA: waste number U079 Disposal Instructions Dispose of waste material according to Local, State, Federal, and Provincial Environmental Regulations. Section 14 - Transport Information International Transport Regulations These products are not classified as dangerous goods according to international transport regulations. Material Name: JM Corbond (B) Resin Safety Data Sheet ID: 1079 ____________________________________________________________ Page 5 of 6 Issue Date: 03/01/2011 Revision: 1.0000 Section 15 - Regulatory Information US Federal Regulations A: General Product Information SARA 311 Status. The following SARA 311 designations apply to this product: Immediate (acute) health hazard. Delayed (chronic) health hazard. B: Component Analysis This material contains one or more of the following chemicals required to be identified under SARA Section 302 (40 CFR 355 Appendix A), SARA Section 313 (40 CFR 372.65) and/or CERCLA (40 CFR 302.4). Proprietary Additive (Proprietary) CERCLA: 1000 lb final RQ; 454 kg final RQ Ethylene glycol (107-21-1) CERCLA: 5000 lb final RQ; 2270 kg final RQ State Regulations A: General Product Information Other state regulations may apply. Check individual state requirements. WARNING: This product contains a substance known to the state of California to cause cancer: Formaldehyde CAS# 50-00-0 ~0.01% 1,4 Dioxane CAS#123-91-1 ~0.04% Dichloromethane CAS# 75-09-2 <0.0028% B: Component Analysis - State The following components appear on one or more of the following state hazardous substances lists: Component CAS # CA FL MA MN NJ PA Proprietary Additive Proprietary Yes No Yes No No Yes Ethylene glycol 107-21-1 Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes A: TSCA Status This product and its components are listed on the TSCA 8(b) inventory. None of the components listed in this product are listed on the TSCA Export Notification 12(b) list. B: Component Analysis - Inventory Component CAS # TSCA DSL EINECS 1,1,1,3,3-Pentafluoropropane (HFC-245fa) 460-73-1 Yes Yes No 2-Butyne-1,4-diol, polymer with (chloromethyl)oxirane, brominated, dehydrochlorinated, methoxylated (present in Corbond III products only) 68441-62-3 Yes Yes No Triethyl phosphate (Present in Corbond III products only) 78-40-0 Yes Yes Yes 2-Propanol, 1-chloro-, phosphate (3:1) 13674-84-5 Yes Yes Yes Proprietary Additive Proprietary Yes Yes Yes Diethyltoluenediamine (Present in Corbond III products only) 68479-98-1 Yes Yes Yes Ethylene glycol 107-21-1 Yes Yes Yes Ethylene oxide-Nonylphenol polymer (Present in Corbond III products only) 9016-45-9 Yes Yes No International Regulations A: General Product Information JM CORBOND III AND JM CORBOND III-2.8 ARE ONLY APPROVED FOR SALE AND USE IN THE UNITED STATES AND CANADA. B: Component Analysis - WHMIS IDL No components are listed in the WHMIS IDL. WHMIS Classification This is not a WHMIS controlled product. This product has been classified in accordance with the hazard criteria of the Controlled Products Regulations. This SDS contains all the information required by the Controlled Products Regulations. Material Name: JM Corbond (B) Resin Safety Data Sheet ID: 1079 ____________________________________________________________ Page 6 of 6 Issue Date: 03/01/2011 Revision: 1.0000 Section 16 - Other Information Other Information Prepared for: Johns Manville Insulation Systems P. O. Box 5108 Denver, CO USA 80217-5108 Prepared by: Johns Manville Technical Center P.O. Box 625005 Littleton, CO USA 80162-5005 The information herein is presented in good faith and believed to be accurate as of the effective date given. However, no warranty, expressed or implied, is given. It is the buyer's responsibility to ensure that its activities comply with Federal, State or provincial, and local laws. Date MSDS # Reason 03/01/11 1079-1.0000 New JM product End of Sheet 1079 LEVENBETTS 508 W 26 ST 317 NEW YORK NEW YORK 10001 T 212 242 1414 WEB WWW.LEVENBETTS.COM SUBMITTAL COVER Project Name: Cornell University, East Sibley Hall, Third Floor Owner: Cornell University To: The Pike Company Attn: Norm Rockefeller Address : One Circle Street Rochester, NY 14607 Contractors Submittal # 062000-001 Date of Submittal: 05/15/2014 Date of Response: 05/21/2014 Type of Submittal Product Data Color Selection O&M Manual Shop Drawings Sample Record Document Substitution Yes No Product Identification Contract Dwg. No.: Product Name: Part/Paragraph: Manufacturer: Comments (Architect Use Only) Reviewed Revise and Resubmit Rejected Furnish as Noted Corrections or comments made on submittals and/or shop drawings during this review do not relieve the contractor from compliance with requirements of the drawings and specifications. This check is only for review of general conformance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. The contractor is responsible for confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions; selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction; coordinating his work with that of all other trades; and performing his work in a safe and satisfactory manner. By: Andrew Feuerstein, LEVENBETTS Date: 05/21/14 Architect Comments The PIKE Company SUBMITTAL COVER BY THIS SUBMITTAL HAS BEEN REVIEWED ARCHITECT'S STAMP WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE PIKE COMPANY AS COMPLYING BY: _____________________ DATE: RECEIVED STAMPS 5/15/2014 PIKE JOB NO:13897 PROJECT NO: 5/15/2014DATE:Pike Submittal No: 062000-001 General Contracting The Pike Company, Inc. Construction Management One Circle Street, Rochester, NY 14607 Phone: (585) 271-5256 / 800 264 PIKE / Fax: (585) 271-3101Specialty Contracting Facility Service E-mail: pike@pikeco.com / Online: www.pikeco.com Program Management DESCRIPTION OF SUBMITTAL: REFERENCES:Spec. Section:Review Cycle No.:062000 Remarks: Fire Retardant Treatment CarpentrySUBMITTAL NAME: Drawings:Supplier: Albany - Phone: (518) 371-5900 Pike Branch Offices: Hartford, CT - Phone: (860) 251-8000 TYPE OF SUBMITTAL:Product Data 001 The Pike Company, Inc. PROJECT NAME:Sibley Hall OWNER: ARCHITECT:The Pike Company, Inc. Norm Rockefeller ®Expedition form sb_20b The PIKE Company SUBMITTAL COVER BY THIS SUBMITTAL HAS BEEN REVIEWED ARCHITECT'S STAMP WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE PIKE COMPANY AS COMPLYING BY: _____________________ DATE: RECEIVED STAMPS 3/6/2014 PIKE JOB NO:13897 PROJECT NO: 3/6/2014DATE:Pike Submittal No: 051200-002 General Contracting The Pike Company, Inc. Construction Management One Circle Street, Rochester, NY 14607 Phone: (585) 271-5256 / 800 264 PIKE / Fax: (585) 271-3101Specialty Contracting Facility Service E-mail: pike@pikeco.com / Online: www.pikeco.com Program Management DESCRIPTION OF SUBMITTAL: REFERENCES:Spec. Section:Review Cycle No.:051200 Remarks: Welding Certifications Sturctural SteelSUBMITTAL NAME: Drawings:Supplier: Albany - Phone: (518) 371-5900 Pike Branch Offices: Hartford, CT - Phone: (860) 251-8000 TYPE OF SUBMITTAL:Certification 001 Apollo Steel, Corp PROJECT NAME:Sibley Hall OWNER: ARCHITECT:The Pike Company, Inc. Norm Rockefeller ®Expedition form sb_20b REVIEWED BY______ DATE________________ RSA PROJECT NO._______________ RB 03/18/2014 14980 LEVENBETTS 508 W 26 ST 317 NEW YORK NEW YORK 10001 T 212 242 1414 WEB WWW.LEVENBETTS.COM SUBMITTAL COVER Project Name: Cornell University, East Sibley Hall, Third Floor Owner: Cornell University To: The Pike Company Attn: Norm Rockefeller Address : One Circle Street Rochester, NY 14607 Contractors Submittal # 051200-001 Date of Submittal: 01/30/2014 Date of Response: 02/10/2014 Type of Submittal Product Data Color Selection O&M Manual Shop Drawings Sample Record Document Substitution Yes No Product Identification Contract Dwg. No.: Product Name: Part/Paragraph: Manufacturer: Comments (Architect Use Only) Reviewed Revise and Resubmit Rejected Furnish as Noted Corrections or comments made on submittals and/or shop drawings during this review do not relieve the contractor from compliance with requirements of the drawings and specifications. This check is only for review of general conformance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. The contractor is responsible for confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions; selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction; coordinating his work with that of all other trades; and performing his work in a safe and satisfactory manner. By: Stella Betts, LEVENBETTS Date: 02/10/14 Architect Comments 1. Structural Engineer ’s Notes and Comments in Red. 2. Architect ’s Notes and Comments in Blue. 3. Cont ractor to verify all existing dimensions, elevations and conditions in field prior to fabrication of steel. 4. Prior to installation, contractor to submit Record Copy of Shop Drawings with Structural and Architectural Notes incorporated into drawings. 5. Contractor to submit missing shop drawings on specific items noted prior to fabrication as per notes on drawings. The PIKE Company SUBMITTAL COVER BY THIS SUBMITTAL HAS BEEN REVIEWED ARCHITECT'S STAMP WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE PIKE COMPANY AS COMPLYING BY: _____________________ DATE: RECEIVED STAMPS 1/30/2014 PIKE JOB NO:13897 PROJECT NO: 1/30/2014DATE:Pike Submittal No: 051200-001 General Contracting The Pike Company, Inc. Construction Management One Circle Street, Rochester, NY 14607 Phone: (585) 271-5256 / 800 264 PIKE / Fax: (585) 271-3101Specialty Contracting Facility Service E-mail: pike@pikeco.com / Online: www.pikeco.com Program Management DESCRIPTION OF SUBMITTAL: REFERENCES:Spec. Section:Review Cycle No.:051200 Remarks: Erection Drawings 1 through 5 Sturctural SteelSUBMITTAL NAME: Drawings:Supplier: Albany - Phone: (518) 371-5900 Pike Branch Offices: Hartford, CT - Phone: (860) 251-8000 TYPE OF SUBMITTAL:Shop Drawing 001 Apollo Steel, Corp PROJECT NAME:Sibley Hall OWNER: ARCHITECT:The Pike Company, Inc. Norm Rockefeller ®Expedition form sb_20b DRAWING LIST ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- G.W.SLADE CONSULTANTS INC. A-18B - 6120 - 2ND ST S.E. PH: 403 265 6523 CALGARY AB CANADA T2H-2L8 FAX: 403 265 6583 DRAWING LIST ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- PROJECT: APOLLO STEEL CLIENT: APOLLO STEEL Page: 1 BLDG NAME:EAST SIBLEY CLIENT NO:1404 Date: 01/29/2014 TITLE: STEEL LAYOUTS GWS NO: 14-1314 Rev: INFO ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- TYPE NAME/No. DRG. TITLE DRG. SIZE ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- G [2] 1-E1 REV: AA 36 x 24 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- G [3] 2-E1 REV: AA 36 x 24 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- G [4] 3-E1 REV: AA 36 x 24 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- G [5] 4-E1 REV: AA 36 x 24 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- G [6] 5-E1 REV: AA 36 x 24 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- Submission # Project # Date Returned Reviewed By This drawing has been reviewed and the following ACTION is noted: Fabrication manufacture or construction may proceed as per notations, if any. Fabrication manufacture or construction may proceed only on items without notation. For any items with notation Contractor shall resubmit shop drawing prior to proceeding with fabrication of those items. Shop drawing does not comply with the Contract Documents. Resubmit shop drawing. Drawing reviewed for design and general arrangement only and is subject to Contract Documents. Action noted above does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility to coordinate all trades and to check quantities and dimensions against conditions in the field. 14980 2/7/2014 RB 1 X RESUBMIT RECORD COPY NOTE 1. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ALL EXISTING DIMENSIONS, ELEVATIONS AND CONDITIONS IN FIELD PRIOR TO FABRICATION OF STEEL. COORDINATE FRAME DIMENSIONS AND ELEVATIONS WITH ARCHITECT. PROVIDE 5/16" WELD ALL AROUND PER TYPICAL DETAIL ON S201 PROVIDE NON-SHRINK GROUT UNDER BEARING PLATE ; COORDINATE STEEL DIMENSIONS PROVIDE MINIMUM OF 8" BETWEEN CENTERLINE OF EXISTING COLUMN AND EDGE OF MASONRY WALL TO BE DEMO'D ALL STF PLATES TO BE REMOVED EXCEPT @ EXTERIOR FACE ALL STF PLATES TO BE REMOVED EXCEPT @ EXTERIOR FACE ALL STF PLATES TO BE REMOVED EXCEPT @ EXTERIOR FACE T.O. EXISTING STEEL GIRDER SEE 02/A401 AND 04/A503 ALIGN FACE OF STEEL WITH FINISH WALL @ STUDIO 340 T.O. PLATE TO ALIGN W/ EXISTING DOME FINISH FLOOR NON CONTINIOUS PLATE FOR RECESSED GLASS SEE 01/A503 NON CONTINIOUS PLATE FOR RECESSED GLASS SEE 01/A503 ALIGN FACE OF STEEL WITH FINISH WALL @ STUDIO 340 VIFSHOW EXPOSED FASTENERS @ ALL VERTICAL & HORIZONTAL W SECTIONS SEE 02/A503 AND 01/A504 T.O. PLATE TO ALIGN W/ DOME FINISH FLOOR SEE 03/A503VIFALIGN NEW SLEEL W/ TOP OF EXISTING GIRDER 1. LEVENBETTS comments are in blue UON. 2. Contractor is responsible for verifying dimensions with actual site conditions. 3. See Structural Engineer's review for additional comments. GENERAL NOTES Corrections or comments made on the shop drawings during this review do not relieve the contractor from compliance with requirements of the drawings and specifications. This check is only for review of general conformance and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. The contractor is responsible for confirming and correlating site dimensions related to the work, selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction, coordinating the work with that of all other trades and performing the work in a safe and satisfactory manner. BY: REVISE & RESUBMIT REJECTED FURNISH AS NOTED PROJECT:CORNELL SIBLEY HALL AF/SB 02/10/2014 REVIEWED DATE: X DATE: RECEIVED 02/10/2014 LEVENBETTS VIF VIFVIF VIF11'-10" (VIF) (VIF) T.O. EXISTING FINISH FLOOR @ DOME STRUCTURE LINE "C" IN WRONG LOCATION ON DRAWING SEE NOTES ON A-A /1-1E1 VIF VIF Submission # Project # Date Returned Reviewed By This drawing has been reviewed and the following ACTION is noted: Fabrication manufacture or construction may proceed as per notations, if any. Fabrication manufacture or construction may proceed only on items without notation. For any items with notation Contractor shall resubmit shop drawing prior to proceeding with fabrication of those items. Shop drawing does not comply with the Contract Documents. Resubmit shop drawing. Drawing reviewed for design and general arrangement only and is subject to Contract Documents. Action noted above does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility to coordinate all trades and to check quantities and dimensions against conditions in the field. 14980 2/7/2014 RB 1 RESUBMIT RECORD COPY CONFIRMED PROVIDE NON-SHRINK GROUT UNDER BEARING PLATE ; COORDINATE STEEL DIMENSIONS CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY EXISTING BEAM SIZE IN FIELD AND COORDINATE HOLE LOCATIONS CONFIRMED 1/4" FILLET WELD, 3-12 PER 2/S300 CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY EXISTING BEAM FLANGE WIDTH IN FIELD. PROVIDE MINIMUM 1-1/4" FROM EDGE OF FLANGE TO CENTER OF BOLT HOLE. PROVIDE MOMENT CONNECTION DESIGN CAPABLE OF RESISTING FORCES AS INDICATED ON FRAME ELEVATION ON S101 NOTE 1. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ALL EXISTING DIMENSIONS, ELEVATIONS AND CONDITIONS IN FIELD PRIOR TO FABRICATION OF STEEL. COORDINATE FRAME DIMENSIONS AND ELEVATIONS WITH ARCHITECT. FIX DRAWING ALIGNMENT REMOVE CONTINUOUS BOLT PLATE @ HEAD OF STEEL FRAME SEE DRAWING 08/A503 FOR REFERENCE REMOVE CONTINUOUS BOLT PLATE @ HEAD OF STEEL FRAME SEE DRAWING 08/A503 FOR REFERENCE CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE POSITION OF BASE PLATE, ATTACHMENT BLOCKING & COVER PLATE @ FFL. SEE DRAWING 11/A502 FOR REFERENCE FINISH COVER PLATE TO BE FLUSH W/ FINISH WOOD FLOOR 1'-0"1'-0" BOTTOM OF EXISTING STEEL GIRDER VIF 1. LEVENBETTS comments are in blue UON. 2. Contractor is responsible for verifying dimensions with actual site conditions. 3. See Structural Engineer's review for additional comments. GENERAL NOTES Corrections or comments made on the shop drawings during this review do not relieve the contractor from compliance with requirements of the drawings and specifications. This check is only for review of general conformance and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. The contractor is responsible for confirming and correlating site dimensions related to the work, selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction, coordinating the work with that of all other trades and performing the work in a safe and satisfactory manner. BY: REVISE & RESUBMIT REJECTED FURNISH AS NOTED PROJECT:CORNELL SIBLEY HALL AF/SB 02/10/2014 REVIEWED DATE: X DATE: RECEIVED 02/10/2014 LEVENBETTS Submission # Project # Date Returned Reviewed By This drawing has been reviewed and the following ACTION is noted: Fabrication manufacture or construction may proceed as per notations, if any. Fabrication manufacture or construction may proceed only on items without notation. For any items with notation Contractor shall resubmit shop drawing prior to proceeding with fabrication of those items. Shop drawing does not comply with the Contract Documents. Resubmit shop drawing. Drawing reviewed for design and general arrangement only and is subject to Contract Documents. Action noted above does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility to coordinate all trades and to check quantities and dimensions against conditions in the field. 14980 2/7/2014 RB 1 X RESUBMIT RECORD COPY CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY RAFTER SIZE IN FIELD 5/8" DIAMETER 2" MINIMUM EDGE DISTANCE AT RAFTER PROVIDE MOMENT CONNECTION DESIGN CAPABLE OF RESISTING FORCES AS INDICATED ON FRAME ELEVATION ON S101 PROVIDE MOMENT CONNECTION DESIGN CAPABLE OF RESISTING FORCES AS INDICATED ON FRAME ELEVATION ON S101 PROVIDE L6x6x3/8 IN ALL LOCATIONS NOTE 1. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ALL EXISTING DIMENSIONS, ELEVATIONS AND CONDITIONS IN FIELD PRIOR TO FABRICATION OF STEEL. COORDINATE FRAME DIMENSIONS AND ELEVATIONS WITH ARCHITECT. 5/8" DIAMETER CENTER COLUMN MOUNTED ANGLE ON GRID LINE 5 CONTRACTOR TO SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS FOR CROSS BRACE & CONNECTIONS AS PER DRAWINGS 05/06/07/08 A502 COLUMN TO BE CENTERED ON GRID LINE C 1/2" MIN MAINTAIN 1/2" MIN OVERLAP @ BOTH SIDES 1/2" MIN CONTINUOUS BEAM - NO SPLICINGCONTINUOUS BEAM - NO SPLICING CENTER COLUMN @ GRID LINE C PROVIDE ATTACHMENT LOCATION FOR FINISH COVER PLATE AS PER 04/05/06/A501 AND 05/08/11/12/A502 VIFVIFVIFCorrections or comments made on the shop drawings during this review do not relieve the contractor from compliance with requirements of the drawings and specifications. This check is only for review of general conformance and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. The contractor is responsible for confirming and correlating site dimensions related to the work, selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction, coordinating the work with that of all other trades and performing the work in a safe and satisfactory manner. BY: REVISE & RESUBMIT REJECTED FURNISH AS NOTED PROJECT:CORNELL SIBLEY HALL AF/SB 02/10/2014 REVIEWED DATE: X DATE: RECEIVED 02/10/2014 LEVENBETTS 1. LEVENBETTS comments are in blue UON. 2. Contractor is responsible for verifying dimensions with actual site conditions. 3. See Structural Engineer's review for additional comments. GENERAL NOTES SEE NOTE ON DETAIL 1/3-E1 SEE NOTE ON DETAIL 1/3-E1 14980 2/7/2014 RB 1 X RESUBMIT RECORD COPY NOTE 1. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ALL EXISTING DIMENSIONS, ELEVATIONS AND CONDITIONS IN FIELD PRIOR TO FABRICATION OF STEEL. COORDINATE FRAME DIMENSIONS AND ELEVATIONS WITH ARCHITECT. Submission # Project # Date Returned Reviewed By This drawing has been reviewed and the following ACTION is noted: Fabrication manufacture or construction may proceed as per notations, if any. Fabrication manufacture or construction may proceed only on items without notation. For any items with notation Contractor shall resubmit shop drawing prior to proceeding with fabrication of those items. Shop drawing does not comply with the Contract Documents. Resubmit shop drawing. Drawing reviewed for design and general arrangement only and is subject to Contract Documents. Action noted above does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility to coordinate all trades and to check quantities and dimensions against conditions in the field. CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE / VERIFY LOCATION OF STEEL SUPPORTS WITH MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT ABOVE CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE / VERIFY LOCATION OF STEEL SUPPORTS WITH MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT ABOVEVIFVIF 1. LEVENBETTS comments are in blue UON. 2. Contractor is responsible for verifying dimensions with actual site conditions. 3. See Structural Engineer's review for additional comments. GENERAL NOTES Corrections or comments made on the shop drawings during this review do not relieve the contractor from compliance with requirements of the drawings and specifications. This check is only for review of general conformance and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. The contractor is responsible for confirming and correlating site dimensions related to the work, selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction, coordinating the work with that of all other trades and performing the work in a safe and satisfactory manner. BY: REVISE & RESUBMIT REJECTED FURNISH AS NOTED PROJECT:CORNELL SIBLEY HALL AF/SB 02/10/2014 REVIEWED DATE: X DATE: RECEIVED 02/10/2014 LEVENBETTS 3" MAXMUM Submission # Project # Date Returned Reviewed By This drawing has been reviewed and the following ACTION is noted: Fabrication manufacture or construction may proceed as per notations, if any. Fabrication manufacture or construction may proceed only on items without notation. For any items with notation Contractor shall resubmit shop drawing prior to proceeding with fabrication of those items. Shop drawing does not comply with the Contract Documents. Resubmit shop drawing. Drawing reviewed for design and general arrangement only and is subject to Contract Documents. Action noted above does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility to coordinate all trades and to check quantities and dimensions against conditions in the field. 14980 2/7/2014 RB 1 X RESUBMIT RECORD COPY NOTE 1. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ALL EXISTING DIMENSIONS, ELEVATIONS AND CONDITIONS IN FIELD PRIOR TO FABRICATION OF STEEL. COORDINATE FRAME DIMENSIONS AND ELEVATIONS WITH ARCHITECT. CONTRACTOR TO REVISE TIE ROD CONNECTION DETAIL AS PER DRAWINGS 08 & 09/A501 1. LEVENBETTS comments are in blue UON. 2. Contractor is responsible for verifying dimensions with actual site conditions. 3. See Structural Engineer's review for additional comments. GENERAL NOTES Corrections or comments made on the shop drawings during this review do not relieve the contractor from compliance with requirements of the drawings and specifications. This check is only for review of general conformance and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. The contractor is responsible for confirming and correlating site dimensions related to the work, selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction, coordinating the work with that of all other trades and performing the work in a safe and satisfactory manner. BY: REVISE & RESUBMIT REJECTED FURNISH AS NOTED PROJECT:CORNELL SIBLEY HALL AF/SB 02/10/2014 REVIEWED DATE: X DATE: RECEIVED 02/10/2014 LEVENBETTS SEE NOTES ON 1-E1